JP6645017B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  2. Description of the Related Art As a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a game machine provided with a variable ball-in device provided in a game area is known (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP 2003-325811 A

  Here, in the gaming machine, a device for increasing the degree of attention to the game is desired.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances and the like, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the degree of attention to a game.

The present invention
Firing means for firing a game ball toward a game area based on a player's firing operation;
A variable receiving means provided in the game area and capable of switching between a first state in which game balls can be received and a second state in which game balls are less likely to be received than the first state;
Variable reception control means for executing state switching control between the first state and the second state of the variable reception means based on the occurrence of a predetermined event;
A specific passing portion through which the game ball received by the variable receiving means can pass;
A privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player based on that the game ball has passed through the specific passing portion,
At a predetermined timing, a first mode in which the game balls received by the variable receiving means are easily distributed to the specific passing section, and a second mode in which the game balls are less likely to be distributed to the specific passing section than the first mode. Switchable sorting means,
A game in which the specific control in which the state switching control of the variable receiving means is performed a plurality of times based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition can be shifted to a special game state that can be executed a plurality of times. State transition means;
With
In the special game state, in one of the specific control, based on that the game ball has passed through the specific passing portion, it is possible to perform the next specific control,
The variable reception control means,
A first switching execution unit that executes the state switching control at a first timing in the specific control;
A second switching execution unit configured to execute the state switching control at a second timing different from the first timing in the specific control;
With
It is set such that the state switching control is performed at the first timing, so that the game ball can easily pass through the specific passage section than the state switching control is performed at the second timing,
The specific control before and after the specific control in which the state switching control is performed by the second switching performing means is set so that the state switching control is performed by the first switching performing means.

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, the attention degree to a game can be improved.

It is a front view showing the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the main structure of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the main structure of a pachinko machine. It is a front view showing the composition of a game board. (A) is a perspective view showing a configuration of the accessory device, and (b) is a plan view schematically showing a configuration of a passage provided in the accessory device. It is a perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows a role item apparatus. It is a perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the rotating body unit which comprises a bonus item apparatus. It is a top view which shows a rotating body unit. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of various counters used for a success / failure lottery. (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a result table, (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a type table, and (c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining an opening timing table. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU of the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows winning processing for an operation mouth. It is a flowchart which shows an information acquisition process. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a normal process executed by the MPU of the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows an accessory control process. It is a flowchart which shows data setting. It is a flowchart which shows a success / failure determination process. It is a flowchart which shows a control start process. It is a flowchart which shows a process during control. It is a flowchart which shows a process for distribution. It is a flowchart showing a winning process. It is a flowchart which shows a game state transition process. It is a flowchart which shows an opening / closing process. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of each round. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for each release. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for describing a round pattern table. It is an explanatory view for explaining an opening and closing pattern table. 6 is a timing chart for explaining a relationship between an opening / closing pattern during a round and distribution timing. In the second embodiment, (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a result table for a first operating port, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a result table for a second operating port. . It is a timing chart for explaining the relation between winning timing to the operating port and distribution timing. It is a timing chart for explaining the relation between the winning timing to the operating port and the distribution timing as a modification of the second embodiment. In the third embodiment, (a) is a flowchart showing a setting process of each round, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a round pattern table. It is a flow chart which shows opening and closing processing in a 4th embodiment. It is an explanatory view for explaining the distribution table of each opening and closing pattern. It is an explanatory view for explaining an opening-and-closing pattern table in a 5th embodiment. It is an explanatory view for explaining the distribution table of each opening and closing pattern. It is a flowchart which shows the process for effects performed by MPU of the effect control device in 6th Embodiment. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating an opening / closing pattern table, (b) It is a flowchart which shows opening corresponding processing, (c) It is the schematic diagram for demonstrating the outline of each special effect. It is a flow chart which shows opening and closing processing in a 7th embodiment. (A) is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between the winning timing to the operating port and the distribution timing, and (b) is a schematic diagram for explaining the outline of each effect mode. It is a flow chart which shows opening and closing timing setting processing in an 8th embodiment. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining each release timing table. It is a timing chart for explaining the relation between winning timing to the operating port and distribution timing. It is a flow chart which shows game control processing in a 9th embodiment. (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the number of common reservations and the fluctuation display time of the game times, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the overlap between the number of common reservations and V distribution. . It is a flow chart which shows normal processing in a 10th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows a process for distribution. It is a flowchart which shows a control start process. It is a timing chart for explaining the relation between winning timing to the operating port and distribution timing. It is a flow chart which shows opening and closing timing setting processing in an 11th embodiment. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a state in which an opening pattern is changed. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a state in which an opening pattern is changed. As a modified example of the ninth embodiment, (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a type table, and (b) is a flowchart showing a process of setting a variable display time.

<First embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, referred to as a “pachinko machine”), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIGS. 2 and 3 are exploded perspective views showing main components of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In FIG. 2, the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the game area is omitted for convenience.

  The pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a game machine main body 12 rotatably attached to the outer frame 11 forward. The gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 arranged behind the inner frame 13.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 11 with one of the left and right side portions as a support side. A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable forward with one of the left and right side portions being a supporting side. A back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable rearward with one of the left and right side portions being a supporting side.

  The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device 16 at its rotating tip, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 so that it cannot be opened with respect to the outer frame 11. The front door frame 14 has a function of locking the inner frame so that the front door frame 14 cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using an unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 exposed on the front of the pachinko machine 10.

  The front door frame 14 provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 13 is formed with a window portion 61 which allows almost the entire game area described later to be visually recognized from the front. The window 61 has a substantially elliptical shape, and has a window panel 62 fitted therein. Although the window panel 62 is formed to be colorless and transparent by glass, it is not limited to this, and may be formed to be colorless and transparent by synthetic resin.

  Around the window 61, light emitting means such as various lamps are provided. A display light emitting section 63 is provided above the window section 61 as a part of the various lamp sections. Further, on both left and right sides of the display light emitting unit 63, there are provided speaker units 64 for outputting sound effects and the like according to the game situation.

  Below the window 61 in the front door frame 14, an upper bulging portion 65 and a lower bulging portion 66 bulging toward the near side are vertically arranged side by side. An upper plate 71 that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 65, and a lower plate 72 that also opens upward inside the lower bulging portion 66. The upper plate 71 has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device 96 provided in the back pack unit 15 and guiding the game balls to the game ball launching mechanism 53 side while aligning them in a line. The lower plate 72 has a function of storing surplus game balls in the upper plate 71.

  A firing handle 60 is provided on the right side of the lower plate 72 in the front door frame 14. By operating the firing handle 60, a game ball is fired from the game ball firing mechanism 53 provided below the game area in the inner frame 13 toward the game area. In this case, by changing the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 60, the firing strength of the game ball fired toward the game area, that is, the firing momentum is changed.

  The game area is formed on a game board 24 mounted on the inner frame 13. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 24 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a front view of the game board 24.

  An inner rail section 32 and an outer rail section 33 are attached to the surface of the game board 24, and a game area is formed so as to be partitioned by the inner rail section 32 and the outer rail section 33. The inner rail portion 32 and the outer rail portion 33 constitute a guide rail 34 for a game ball to a game area, and the game ball fired from the game ball firing mechanism by the player rotating the firing handle 60 is The guide rail 34 guides the player to the upper part of the game area.

  The guide rail 34 is formed such that an exit portion thereof is directed to the upper center of the game area on one side of the game area. Therefore, as the amount of rotation operation of the firing handle 60 by the player increases, the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area is shifted from the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed to the side opposite thereto. It shifts to the side of the department. The exit portion of the guide rail 34 is provided on the left side of the game area.

  In a range defined as a game area on the game board 24, a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing are formed. In each opening, a general winning opening 35, a first operating opening (first starting entrance portion) 38, a second operating opening (second starting entrance portion) 39, an accessory device 150, a through gate 41, a variable display unit. 42, a main display section 43, a display section for accessory, and the like are provided.

  When a ball enters the general winning opening 35, the first operating opening 38, the second operating opening 39, and the accessory device 150, it is detected by a detection sensor (first operating sensor 38a) disposed on the back side of the game board 24. , The second operation sensor 39c and the entrance sensor 179 (see FIG. 6, etc.)), and a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out based on the detection result. In this case, when a ball enters the first operating port 38 and when a ball enters the second operating port 39, seven prize balls are paid out and the prize balls are entered into the general winning port 35. When a ball occurs, payout of eight prize balls is executed, and when a ball enters the accessory device 150, payout of 15 prize balls is executed. However, the number of these prize balls is arbitrary. For example, the prize balls of both operation ports 38 and 39 are set such that the number of prize balls of the second operation port 39 is larger than the number of prize balls of the first operation port 38. The number may be different.

  In addition, an out port 45 is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 24, and game balls that have not entered various winning ports are discharged from the game area through the out port 45. Further, on the game board 24, a large number of nails 46 are planted for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the game ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are provided.

  Here, the entering ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and is not only discharged from the game area after passing through the opening, but also discharged from the game area after passing through the opening. A mode in which the flow in the game area is continued without being included is also included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the game ball from entering the out port 45, the game ball to the accessory device 150, the first operation port 38, the second operation port 39, or the through gate 41 will be described. Entering a ball is also referred to as winning.

  The accessory device 150 is disposed substantially at the center of the game board 24. The first operating port 38 and the second operating port 39 are arranged side by side in the game board 24 below this accessory device 150 in the horizontal direction. Two first operation ports 38 are provided on the left and right of the accessory device 150, and the second operation port 39 is disposed at a position sandwiched by the left and right first operation ports 38. In relation to the accessory device 150, the left and right first operating ports 38 are disposed so as to sandwich the accessory device 150, and a game ball that has not won a prize to the accessory device 150 may have one of the first operating ports. 38 can be reached (winning possible). In addition, the horizontal distance between the first operation ports 38 and the accessory device 150 is equal to or greater than the diameter of one game ball, and the distance between the first operation port 38 and the accessory device 150 is larger. Game balls can flow down.

  The second operating port 39 is provided below the accessory device 150. The second operating port 39 is disposed slightly below the first operating ports 38, and game balls that have not entered the accessory device 150 or the first operating port 38 can reach the second operating port 39. (Can enter).

  The second operating port 39 is provided with an electric accessory 39a as a guide piece (support piece) composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces. The electric accessory 39a is connected to an electric accessory driving unit 39b mounted on the back side of the game board 24, and is driven by the electric accessory driving unit 39b to be in a closed state (unsupported state or non-guide state) and It is arranged in either the open state (support state or guide state). When the electric accessory 39a is closed, the game ball cannot enter the second operating port 39, and when the electric accessory 39a is opened, it is possible to win the second operating port 39.

  It is to be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and a state in which a game ball can easily be won to the second operating port 39 and a state in which a prize is not impossible but a prize is harder to occur than the state in which the prize is more likely to be generated, The configuration may be such that the electric accessory 39a is switched. Further, the electric accessory 39a may not be provided, and switching between a state in which a prize is more likely to occur and a state in which a prize is less likely to occur may be performed by the displacement of the second operating port 39 itself.

  The main display section 43 and the accessory display section 44 are provided on a decorative member 47 arranged along the outer edge on the lower side of the game area. The decorative member 47 extends from the board of the game board 24 to the front of the pachinko machine 10. More specifically, the front surface of the decorative member 47 faces a window panel 62 provided on the front door frame 14 so that the game area can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. The distance between them is smaller than one game ball. This prevents the game ball from falling in front of the front surface of the decorative member 47.

  The main display unit 43 and the accessory display unit 44 are provided so as to be exposed from the front surface of the decorative member 47. That is, the main display unit 43 and the accessory display unit 44 are visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 62 of the front door frame 14, and a game ball is provided in front of both the display units 43 and 44. Falling is prevented.

  In the main display unit 43, the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning in each of the operating ports 38 and 39 is clearly displayed by displaying a picture or the like.

  In addition, the main display unit 43 is configured by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined mode, but is not limited thereto, and includes a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, Other types of display devices such as a CRT and a dot matrix may be used. The pattern displayed on the main display unit 43 includes a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, or a plurality of types of colors. A configuration to be displayed can be considered.

  In the accessory display unit 44, the display of the pattern is changed with the winning of the through gate 41 as a trigger, and as a result of the stop of the changing display, the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through gate 41 is displayed. Specified by indication. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning in the through gate 41 is a winning result corresponding to the shift to the electric-operating-open state, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the accessory display unit 44 and displayed in a fluctuating manner. Is stopped, the state shifts to the electric utility open state. In the electric-power-opened state, the electric-powered object 39a provided in the second operating port 39 is opened in a predetermined manner.

  The variable display unit 42 is provided with a symbol display device 51 for variably displaying (or variably or switching) a symbol which is a kind of symbol. The symbol display device 51 is configured as a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 51 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, but may be another display device such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

  Below the main display unit 43 in the decorative member 47, a first reserved light emitting unit 54 and a second reserved light emitting unit 55 corresponding to the main display unit 43 are provided. The first reserved light emitting unit 54 has a plurality of (specifically, four) light emitting units arranged side by side, and the number of game balls that have won the first operating port 38 is reserved up to four, and the first reserved light emission is performed. When the unit 54 is turned on, the number of the reserved items is displayed. The second reserved light emitting unit 55 has a plurality of (specifically, four) light emitting units arranged side by side, and the number of game balls winning in the second operating port 39 is reserved up to four, and the second reserved light emission is performed. The reserved number is displayed by lighting of the unit 55. In addition, a third reserved light emitting unit 56 corresponding to the accessory display unit 44 is provided below the accessory display unit 44 in the decorative member 47. The number of times that the game balls have passed through the through gate 41 is held up to four times, and the number of the held balls is displayed by turning on the third holding light emitting unit 56. Note that a configuration in which a part or all of the reserved light emitting units 54 to 56 are displayed on a part of the symbol display device 51 may be employed.

  The accessory device 150 enters an open state on condition that a game ball enters one of the operation ports 38 and 39, and the game ball can enter the accessory device 150. When a game ball enters the accessory device 150, and further enters the V winning opening provided in the accessory device 150, it is detected by a V winning sensor 192 described later, and a big hit state is established.

  Here, the configuration of the accessory device 150 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 5A is a perspective view of the accessory device 150, FIG. 5B is a plan view schematically showing a configuration of a passage provided in the accessory device 150, and FIG. FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view, FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view of a rotator unit 180 constituting the accessory device 150, and FIG. 8 is a plan view of the rotator unit 180.

  The accessory device 150 is roughly composed of an accessory unit 160 and a rotator unit 180. As shown in FIG. 6, the accessory unit 160 includes a base frame 161, and a flange 162 of the base frame 161 is fixed to the game board 24 by screws. The base frame 161 is vertically divided by a ball receiving plate 163 extending in the front-rear direction, and has an upper opening 164 and a lower opening 165 penetrating back and forth.

  Above the upper opening 164 on the front surface of the base frame 161, a ceiling member 167 having a predetermined thickness is attached. The variable display unit 42 is formed on the ceiling member 167, and the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 is installed so as to face the front of the gaming machine.

  On both left and right sides of the upper opening 164 of the base frame 161, a pair of opening and closing accessories 168 having the same thickness as the ceiling member 167 is provided. A passage forming member 171 and a drive unit fixing plate 172 are provided on the back side of the base frame 161, and a pair of opening / closing accessory drive units 173 (electromagnetic solenoids) are attached to the back surface of the drive unit fixing plate 172. I have. One end of a link 176 provided through the passage forming member 171 and the drive unit fixing plate 172 is connected to the opening / closing accessory driving unit 173, and the other end of the link 176 is connected to the shaft of the opening / closing accessory 168. Are linked. Therefore, the opening and closing accessory 168 is opened by the driving of the opening and closing accessory drive 173.

  The opening operation will be described in detail. Each opening / closing accessory 168 rises upward when the opening / closing accessory drive unit 173 is not driven (excited), and each tip is close to the left and right ends of the ceiling member 167. On the other hand, when the opening / closing accessory drive unit 173 is driven (excited), each opening / closing accessory 168 is opened outward, and a game ball is provided between the tip of each opening / closing accessory 168 and the left and right ends of the ceiling member 167. A gap larger than one is created. With this configuration, it is possible to enter a game ball into the accessory device 150 only when each of the opening and closing accessory 168 is opened and the accessory device 150 is opened. In addition, even when the opening / closing accessory drive unit 173 is not driven (excited) (when the opening / closing accessory 168 stands up), the opening / closing accessory drive 173 is driven (excited). It is only necessary to adopt a mode in which it is difficult to enter the accessory device 150 than when the opening / closing accessory 168 is opened outward, and when the opening / closing accessory drive unit 173 is not driven (excited), the role is increased. The structure which can enter the object device 150 may be sufficient. For example, when the opening / closing accessory driving unit 173 is driven, the gap between the tip of the opening / closing accessory 168 and the left and right ends of the ceiling member 167 is about one game ball, and the opening / closing accessory driving unit 173 is driven. It is conceivable that the gap becomes larger when driven.

  Further, the opening and closing accessory drive unit 173 is invisible from the front of the gaming machine by the passage forming member 171 and the driving unit fixing plate 172, and the opening and closing accessory drive unit 173 is covered by a cover member 174 on the back side. I have.

  A front frame 175 is attached to an edge of the lower opening 165 on the front surface of the base frame 161. The extension wall 175a formed on the upper portion of the front frame 175 extends above the ball receiving plate 163 of the base frame 161. The front of the game ball reaching the ball receiving plate 163 by the extension wall 175a. Jumping out to is regulated.

  A passage plate 177 extending in the front-rear direction and connected to the ball receiving plate 163 is formed in the passage forming member 171, and a game ball passage 178 extending vertically is formed on the back side of the passage plate 177 (FIG. 5 (b)). Further, since the passage plate 177 is inclined downward toward the game ball passage 178 and becomes narrower toward the game ball passage 178, the game ball reaching the ball receiving plate 163 becomes a game ball. Guided to passage 178. The game ball guided to the game ball passage 178 flows down the game ball passage 178. An entrance sensor 179 is provided on the entrance side of the game ball passage 178. A game ball that has entered the accessory device 150 always passes through the entrance sensor 179 immediately. Thus, the entry of the game ball into the accessory device 150 is detected. Note that the entrance sensor 179 is configured by a known proximity sensor.

  The rotating body unit 180 is attached to the accessory unit 160 so as to be located below the passage forming member 171. As shown in FIG. 7, the rotator unit 180 includes a guide passage forming member 181 and a discharge passage forming member 191.

  The guide passage forming member 181 has a recess 182 that is recessed downward at substantially the center. The concave portion 182 has a circular shape in plan view. An annular guide passage 183 is formed along the outer edge of the upper surface opening of the recess 182. The guide passage 183 is symmetrical left and right, and is inclined so as to be lower from the center toward the rear side toward the center toward the front side. The front center of the guide passage 183 is located at the lower end of the lower opening 165 of the base frame 161. The center on the back side of the guidance passage 183 is located vertically below the game ball passage 178 of the accessory unit 160. A passage wall 183a forming the center on the back side of the guide passage 183 is taller than the surrounding passage wall 183a, and a passage cover 184 extending in the horizontal direction is formed above the guide passage 183 on the back side. . However, an entrance opening 184a is formed in the passage cover 184, and the plan view (see FIG. 8) has a configuration in which only the center of the back side of the back side of the guide passage 183 is exposed. Since the entrance opening 184a overlaps with the exit of the game ball passage 178, the game ball flowing down the game ball passage 178 surely reaches the center on the back side of the guide passage 183.

  A ball sorting portion 185 is formed at the center on the back side of the guide passage 183. The ball sorting unit 185 has an inclined surface that is inclined downward from the center toward both left and right. Therefore, the game ball that has reached the guidance passage 183 is distributed to either the left or right. Then, by rolling along the slope of the guide passage 183, the vehicle is guided toward the near side of the guide passage 183. On the front side of the guide passage 183, a lead-out portion 186 inclined toward the concave portion 182 is formed.

  The recess 182 has a V winning opening 182a formed on the bottom surface thereof. The V winning opening 182a communicates with a V winning passage 191a formed in the discharge passage forming member 191. The game balls entering the V winning opening 182a are discharged to the outside of the accessory device 150 through the V winning passage 191a. In this case, a V winning sensor 192 is provided in the V winning passage 191a, and a game ball passing through the V winning passage 191a is detected by the V winning sensor 192.

  Further, an opening 182b is formed on the side surface of the concave portion 182. The outgoing opening 182b communicates with an outgoing passage 191b formed in the discharge passage forming member 191. The game ball entering the outgoing opening 182b is discharged out of the accessory device 150 through the outgoing passage 191b. In this case, a disconnection sensor 193 is provided in the disconnection passage 191b, and a game ball passing through the disconnection passage 191b is detected by the disconnection sensor 193. It should be noted that the V winning sensor 192 and the departure sensor 193 are constituted by known proximity sensors. In addition, game balls discharged to the outside of the accessory device 150 through the V winning path 191a and the release path 191b are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through a discharge path (not shown).

  The drive unit 194 for the rotating body is attached to the discharge passage forming member 191 from below, and the output shaft 194 a extending in the vertical direction of the drive unit 194 for the rotating body is connected to the discharge passage forming member 191 and the guide passage forming member 181. Penetrates. The rotating body 201 is fixed to the output shaft 194a. Note that the rotating body driving unit 194 may be a stepping motor.

  The rotating body 201 has a substantially disk shape with a diameter slightly smaller than the concave portion 182 of the guide path forming member 181, and is located in the concave portion 182. The rotating body 201 rotates counterclockwise with the driving of the rotating body driving unit 194. On the outer periphery of the rotating body 201, there are formed ten ball guide portions 202 which are depressed inward, and these ball guide portions 202 are arranged at equal intervals. Of these, the nine ball guides 202 serve as bottomed opening guides 203, and one ball guide 202 serves as a bottomless V winning opening guide 204. The bottom surface of the opening guide 203 is inclined so as to be lower toward the outside. Each ball guide unit 202 is large enough to accommodate one game ball, and a game ball led out from the lead-out unit 186 of the guidance passage 183 enters one of the ball guide units 202. In this case, the game ball that has entered the V winning opening guide unit 204 reaches the upper portion of the V winning opening 182a with the rotation of the rotating body 201, and falls from the V winning opening 182a into the V winning passage 191a. On the other hand, the game ball that has entered the exit guide portion 203 reaches the side of the exit 182b with the rotation of the rotating body 201, and enters the exit passage 191b from the exit 182b.

  In the present embodiment, a rotation position detection sensor 196 is provided to grasp the rotation position of the rotating body 201. The rotation position detection sensor 196 has a pair of arms 196a and 196b facing each other at a predetermined interval, and a light emitting element is disposed on one arm 196a, and a light emitting element on the other arm 196b is provided. A light receiving element is provided at a position facing the light receiving element. The rotation position detection sensor 196 is provided on a sensor substrate 197. The sensor substrate 197 is provided between the two arm portions 196a and 196b of the rotation position detection sensor 196 (between the light emitting element and the light receiving element). It is fixed to the discharge passage forming member 191 so that the cut bang 198 provided on the output shaft 194 a of the portion 194 is located.

  The cut bang 198 has a substantially donut shape, and rotates with the rotation of the output shaft 194a. However, the notch 198a is formed so as to be discontinuous. Accordingly, the light from the light emitting element of the rotation position detection sensor 196 is basically blocked by the cut bang 198, and the light emitting element is turned off only when the notch 198a passes between the two arms 196a and 196b with the rotation of the output shaft 194a. Light reaches the light receiving element. The notch 198a is formed corresponding to the position of the V winning opening guide 204 on the outer periphery of the rotating body 201, so that it is monitored whether or not the light receiving element detects light from the light emitting element. , The rotational position of the rotating body 201 can be grasped. Incidentally, the notch 198a passes between the two arms 196a and 196b when the V winning opening guide 204 passes on the front side of the outlet 186.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the first distribution member 300 is provided in one of the left and right sides of the guide passage 183, more specifically, in the left guide passage 183 on the side where the disconnection port 182b is formed. The first distribution member 300 is disposed above the outflow opening 182b in the guide passage 183 as a bottom part of a part of the floor of the guide passage 183. The first distribution member 300 is disposed on the back side of the opening 182b. The first distribution member 300 is connected to the first distribution drive unit 300a (electromagnetic solenoid), and the first distribution drive unit 300a is driven and controlled, so that the floor portion of the guide passage 183 is formed. Is displaced between a non-distributed state that constitutes a part of the first distributing member 300 and a distributing state in which the rear end of the first distributing member 300 rotates downward with the rear end of the first distributing member 300 as a rotation axis and is inclined downward toward the opening 182b. .

  According to the above configuration, when the first distribution driving unit 300a is not driven (is not in the excited state) and the first distribution member 300 is in the non-distributed state, the first distribution driving unit 300a moves to the left in the guide passage 183. The distributed game balls pass over the first distribution member 300 with the first distribution member 300 as a floor, and reach one of the ball guide portions 202 in the rotating body 201. On the other hand, the first distribution driving unit 300a is driven (excited), and the first distribution member 300 is in the distribution state, so that the first distribution member 300 is inclined toward the lower opening 182b. The game ball passing over the first distribution member 300 does not reach the rotating body 201 and is guided to the exit 182b (the exit passage 191b) as it is. Therefore, the V winning probability (probability detected by the V winning sensor 192) changes depending on the state of the first distribution member 300.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a warp passage 250 is provided that directly guides the game ball passing through the game ball passage 178 to the V winning passage 191a. The warp passage 250 has a passage area 251 through which one game ball can pass, and the passage area 251 is formed to be curved rearward and downward. More specifically, an opening (not shown) that is opened rearward is formed in the passage wall 183a behind the ball sorting portion 185 in the guide passage 183, and the opening portion of the passage area 251 is formed in the opening. The entrance 252 is in communication. Further, a V guide passage 260 through which one game ball can pass toward the V winning passage 191 a is formed above the discharge passage forming member 191, and the warp is formed at the rear end 261 of the V guide passage 260. The outlet 253 of the passage area 251 in the passage 250 communicates. The V guidance passage 260 is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the V winning passage 191a, and a front end 262 of the V guidance passage 260 communicates with the V winning passage 191a.

  With the above configuration, when a game ball that has reached the guide passage 183 is guided to the warp passage 250 side, the game ball passes through the passage area 251 in the warp passage 250 and is guided to the V guide passage 260. Then, the game ball passes through the V guiding passage 260, enters the V winning passage 191a, and is detected by the V winning sensor 192 (V winning).

  Here, upstream (forward) of the entrance 252 of the warp passage 250, the inflow of game balls into the warp passage 250 is regulated (distribution of whether to distribute to the warp passage 250 or to the left and right in the guidance passage 183). The second sorting member 310 is provided. The second distribution member 310 is connected to a second distribution drive section 310a (electromagnetic solenoid), and the second distribution drive section 310a is driven and controlled, so that the entrance section 252 of the warp passage 250 is closed. It is displaced between a non-distribution state arranged in front and a distribution state arranged above and not arranged in front of the entrance 252. That is, when the second distribution drive unit 310a is not driven (is not in the excited state) and is in the non-distributed state, the game ball cannot flow into the warp passage 250, and Sorted left and right. On the other hand, when the second distribution driving unit 310a is driven (excited) and enters the distribution state, the game balls can flow into the warp passage 250 (rearward). It is led directly to the V winning path 191a without passing through the minutes. That is, the V winning probability (probability detected by the V winning sensor 192) changes depending on the state of the second distribution member 310.

  In addition, the ball distribution unit 185 at the center on the back side of the guide passage 183 has a downward slope inclined backward so that the game balls can be distributed not only right and left but also rearward. However, when the second distribution member 310 is in the non-distribution state, the second distribution member 310 is arranged on the downward inclined surface, and the second distribution member 310 is in the non-distribution state. Nevertheless, the occurrence of an event in which the game ball is likely to be distributed to the above-described downward inclined surface side and stays there is suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, the period required for the game ball that has won the bonus item device 150 to reach the position to be distributed by the second distribution member 310 (the ball distribution section 185) is about 0.3 sec. The passage length is set so as to be as follows. In addition, the period until the game ball winning the bonus item device 150 reaches the position (on the first distribution member 300) to be distributed by the first distribution member 300 is about 0.5 sec. Is set with a passage length.

  The game ball that has entered the accessory device 150 described above enters the game ball passage 178 by rolling on the ball receiving plate 163. In this case, the game ball is detected by the entrance sensor 179. The game ball that has flowed down the game ball passage 178 reaches a ball distribution unit 185 formed in the center on the back side of the guide passage 183. Then, on the condition that the second sorting member 310 arranged in the ball sorting unit 185 is in the non-sorting state, the ball is sorted to the left or right guiding passage 183. Then, it is guided to the lead-out section 186 by rolling in the guide path 183 on the side where the sorting is performed. The game ball guided to the derivation unit 186 is led out into the recess 182 by rolling along the inclination of the derivation unit 186. However, when the ball is distributed to the left side in the ball distribution unit 185, the condition that the first distribution member 300 is in the non-distributed state is a condition to be led out to the concave portion 182 side. That is, the game ball guided to the left guiding passage 183 may be led to the concave portion 182 side, or may be led to the exit 182b as it is.

  In the concave portion 182, the rotating body 201 is constantly rotating at a constant speed, and the game ball drawn into the concave portion 182 and entering the outlet guide portion 203 is guided to the outlet 182b. In this case, the game ball is detected by the off sensor 193. On the other hand, a game ball drawn into the concave portion 182 and entered the V winning opening guide section 204 is guided to the V winning opening 182a. In this case, the game ball is detected by the V winning sensor 192. Then, a big hit state occurs by being detected by the V winning sensor 192.

  When the game ball reaches the above-mentioned ball distribution unit 185, when the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state, the game ball is directed not only to the left or right guide path 183 but also to the warp path 250 side. Are sorted. Then, by being distributed to the warp passage 250 side, without being distributed by the first distribution member 300 or the rotating body 201, it is directly detected by the V winning sensor 192, and a big hit state occurs.

  Since one of the ten ball guide portions 202 has one V winning opening guide portion 204, the game ball that has entered the concave portion 182 of the accessory device 150 has a 1/10 probability of a V winning hole 182a. You will enter. In addition, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the upper plate 71 by detecting game balls by the V winning sensor 192 and the sensor 193 for coming off. Further, the movement of the game ball on the rotator unit 180 is visible from the front of the game machine through the opening of the front frame 175 and the lower opening 165 of the base frame 161.

  However, the number of ball guides 202, the number of V winning opening guides 204, and the like are not limited to those described above. A configuration of winning a V-prize with a probability of / 6 or a configuration of winning a V-prize with another probability may be used.

  The power lines and signal lines of the sensors 179, 192, 193, 196, etc., and the drive units 173, 300a, 310a, 194, etc. in the above-mentioned accessory device 150 are connected to the relay terminal plate attached to the guide passage forming member 181. 199. These signal lines are bundled as a harness and connected to a main control device, which will be described later. The main control device detects an incoming ball and controls driving of a driving unit. However, a configuration in which some or all of these are performed by an effect control device described later, which is a sub-side control device, may be employed.

  In the symbol display device 51, a notification that a game ball enters one of the operation ports 38, 39 and the accessory device 150 is opened, a notification that a game ball enters the accessory device 150, Notification of the distribution ratio to the two distribution members 300 and 310, the result of distribution, and the like, notification of the distribution state by the rotating body 201, detection of the game ball by the V winning sensor 192, and notification of occurrence of a big hit state, etc. In addition to the notification during the normal game state, the round effect during the jackpot state is also notified. Note that the contents of these effects are not particularly limited as long as the player can clearly grasp the respective game situations.

  Next, the configuration of the back side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a main control device 81 and an effect control device 82 are mounted on the back surface of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24).

  The main control device 81 includes a main control board having a function of controlling the main control of the game (main control circuit) and a function of monitoring the power supply (power failure monitoring circuit), and the main control board is made of a transparent resin material. It is housed in a substrate box 83 made of the same. The board box 83 includes a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box base (front case body) and a box cover (back case body) that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are inseparably connected to each other by a box connecting portion 85 as separation preventing means (or connecting means), whereby the board box 83 is sealed. And, by being inseparably connected by these box connecting portions 85, when opening the internal space of the board box 83, the board box 83 needs to be broken or partly cut off. A plurality of box connecting portions 85 are provided on the long sides of the substrate box 83, and at least one of them is used for performing the connecting process.

  Any configuration can be applied to the box connecting portion 85 as long as the box base and the box cover are connected so that the box base cannot be opened. The box cover and the box cover cannot be opened. The combining process by the box combining unit 85 prevents unauthorized opening after the combining, and makes it possible to detect such a situation early and easily even if unauthorized opening is performed. Even after opening, it is possible to perform the opening process again. That is, the coupling process is performed by inserting the locking claw into at least one elongated hole of the plurality of box coupling portions 85. When the board box 83 is opened, for example, when a failure occurs in the accommodated main control board or when the main control board is inspected, the box connecting portion 85 into which the locking claw is inserted and the other box connecting portion 85 are connected. And the connecting part with the box body are cut off. Thereby, the box base and the box cover of the board box 83 are separated, and the internal main control board can be taken out. After that, when the joining process is performed again, the locking claws are inserted into the long holes of the other box joining portions 85. If a history indicating that the board box 83 has been opened is left in the board box 83, it can be easily found by looking at the board box 83 that unauthorized opening has been performed.

  A plurality of connecting pieces 86 are provided on one short side of the substrate box 83 so as to protrude to the side. The connecting pieces 86 correspond one-to-one with a plurality of connected pieces 87 formed on the mounting base of the main control device 81. The connecting pieces 86 and the connected pieces 87 make the board box 83, the mounting base and The combining process is performed between.

  In addition, as a trace means for detecting unauthorized opening of the substrate box 83, a seal may be attached so as to straddle the boundary between the box base and the box cover. In this case, when the sealing seal is peeled off from the affixed portion, the adhesive layer of the sealing seal remains on the substrate box 83 side, and a trace thereof remains. Furthermore, an IC tag for transmitting a response wave including identification information in response to a call wave of a predetermined frequency is provided on the seal, and when the seal is removed, the antenna of the IC tag is cut off and the response time is reduced. It is good also as a structure which cannot transmit a wave.

  The effect control device 82 includes an effect control board that controls sound and lamp display according to instructions from the main control device 81 and a display control device (not shown), and the effect control board is a board box made of a transparent resin material or the like. 84.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 91, and a payout mechanism 92 and a control device assembling unit 93 are attached to the back pack 91. The back pack 91 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and has a protective cover portion 94 projecting rearward and having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape so as to cover the main control device 81 and the performance control device 82 from the rear. ing.

  The payout mechanism 92 is disposed so as to bypass the protective cover 94, and a tank 95 to which game balls supplied from island facilities of the game arcade are sequentially replenished, and a game stored in the tank 95 are provided. And a payout device 96 for paying out balls. The game balls paid out from the payout device 96 are discharged to the upper plate 71 or the lower plate 72 through a payout passage (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the payout device 96. The dispensing mechanism 92 is provided with a back pack substrate provided with a main power supply of, for example, 24 volts AC, and provided with a power switch for performing an ON operation and an OFF operation of the power supply.

  Further, the back pack 91 is provided with an external output terminal 99 on the rotation axis side of the back pack unit 15 and on the upper edge side. The external output terminal 99 includes an output terminal for outputting a signal when the game balls run short in the tank 95 or the like, an output terminal for outputting a signal each time a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out, and a predetermined number of game balls. An output terminal for outputting a signal each time it is lent, an output terminal for outputting a signal when the gaming machine main body 12 is opened, an output terminal for outputting a signal when the front door frame 14 is opened, and when transitioning to a state such as an open / close execution mode. An output terminal for outputting a signal (or during transition to a state) is provided. Then, through these output terminals, a signal relating to the state of the frame side is output to the management control device of the game hall side. An output terminal for outputting a signal every time a predetermined number of game balls are lent is unnecessary in a so-called cash machine.

  The control device assembling unit 93 includes a payout control device 97, a power supply and a firing control device 98. The payout control device 97 and the power supply and firing control device 98 are arranged one on top of the other so that the payout control device 97 is located behind the pachinko machine 10.

  The payout control device 97 is configured such that a payout control board that controls the payout device 96 is accommodated in a substrate box. In this case, the same fraud suppression means as the board box 83 of the main control device 81 may be applied to the board box of the payout control device 97.

  The power supply and the launch control device 98 are configured such that a power supply and a launch control board are accommodated in a board box, and the board generates and outputs predetermined power required by various control devices and the like, and furthermore, The launching of the game ball is controlled in accordance with the operation of the firing handle 60. Further, the pachinko machine 10 has a function of storing and holding various data, and can retain the state at the time of power failure even in the event of a power failure, and can return to the state at the time of power failure when returning from the power failure. It has become.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

  On the back side of the inner frame, a main control device 81, an effect control device 82, and a display control device 100 are mounted. The back pack unit is provided on the back of the inner frame as described above. The back pack unit includes a payout mechanism including a payout device 96, a payout control device 97, a power supply and a firing control. The device 98 is mounted.

  The main control device 81 includes a main control board 111 that controls the main control of the game, and a power failure monitoring board 115 that monitors a power supply. In the main control device 81, a trace means for leaving a trace of the opening may be provided to the board box accommodating the main control board 111 and the like, or a trace structure for leaving a trace of the opening may be provided. . As the trace means, a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box are inseparably connected and a predetermined portion is required to be broken at the time of separation. A configuration is conceivable in which a sealing sticker that leaves a trace of being peeled off by being left is attached so as to straddle the boundary between a plurality of case bodies. Further, as the trace structure, a configuration in which an adhesive is applied to a boundary between a plurality of case bodies constituting the board box is considered.

  The MPU 112 is mounted on the main control board 111. The MPU 112 includes a ROM 113 storing various control programs executed by the MPU 112 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 113. A certain RAM 114, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are built in. It is not essential that the ROM 113 and the RAM 114 be integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 112, and each may be configured as an individual chip. The same applies to the MPUs of the control devices other than the main control device 81.

  The MPU 112 is provided with an input port and an output port. On the input side of the MPU 112, a power failure monitoring board 115 and a payout control device 97 provided in the main control device 81 are connected. In this case, a power supply having a function of supplying operating power and the launch control device 98 are connected to the power failure monitoring board 115, and power is supplied to the MPU 112 via the power failure monitoring board 115.

  Various sensors are connected to the input side of the MPU 112. The various sensors include a first prize sensor 38a and a second activating sensor 39c for detecting a prize in both the operation ports 38 and 39, and a prize detection sensor for detecting a prize in other ball entry portions. There are provided a sensor 35a for detecting a prize to the 35, a sensor 41a for detecting a prize to the through gate 41, and the like. In addition, the various sensors include an entrance sensor 179, a V winning sensor 192, a departure sensor 193, a rotation position detection sensor 196, and the like in the accessory device 150. The MPU 112 makes a winning determination (ball entry determination) for each ball entry section based on the detection results of these various sensors 38a, 39c, 35a, 41a, 179, 192, 193, and 196, and determines the position of the rotating body 201. And grasp it. Further, in the MPU 112, various lotteries are executed based on winning in the first operating port 38 or the second operating port 39.

  The output side of the MPU 112 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 115, the payout control device 97, the effect control device 82, and the like. For example, a prize ball command is output to the payout control device 97 based on the result of the prize determination to the prize-corresponding ball entry portion.

  Various commands for effects are output to the effect control device 82. Details of these various commands will be described later. Incidentally, the effect control device 82 is electrically connected to the main control device 81 via connector units (connection units) provided with connectors at both ends of the signal line.

  On the output side of the MPU 112, various driving units such as an electric accessory driving unit 39b, an opening / closing accessory driving unit 173, a first distribution driving unit 300a, a second distribution driving unit 310a, a rotator driving unit 194, and the like. Is connected. The main control board 111 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 112 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits. Specifically, when a prize occurs in one of the operation ports 38 and 39 or when the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode based on the prize to the V winning sensor 192, the opening / closing accessory driving unit 173 of the accessory device 150 is driven. Under the control, the opening and closing operation of the opening and closing accessory 168 is executed. In these cases, drive control of the dual distribution drive units 300a and 310a is performed, and drive control of the rotator drive unit 194 is performed.

  In addition, when a winning or losing lottery based on winning in both the operation ports 38 and 39 is performed, the MPU 112 executes display control of the main display unit 43. In addition, when the lottery result indicating whether or not the electric accessory 39a is to be opened is specified, the display control of the accessory display unit 44 is executed in the MPU 112.

  The power failure monitoring board 115 relays between the main control board 111 and the power supply and the launch control device 98, and monitors a DC stable 24 volt voltage output from the power supply and the launch control device 98. The payout control device 97 controls the payout of a prize ball and a loaned ball by the payout device 96 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 81.

  The power supply and the launch control device 98 are connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game arcade or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, it generates necessary operating power for the main control board 111, the payout control device 97, and the like, and supplies the generated operating power. Incidentally, the power supply and the firing control device 98 are provided with a power supply unit at the time of power failure such as a backup capacitor. The power for storing and storing is supplied to the RAM 114 of the control device 81.

  The power supply and launch control device 98 is responsible for launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 53, and the game ball launch mechanism 53 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met. In this case, the game ball launching mechanism 53 includes a launch rail extending toward the guide rail 34 of the game board 24, a ball feeder for supplying the game balls stored in the upper plate 71 to the launch rail, and a And a solenoid that is an electric actuator for firing the game ball supplied to the guide rail 34. The drive signal is supplied to the solenoid from the power supply and the firing control device 98, so that the game ball is Fired.

  The effect control device 82 includes an effect control board 141 on which the MPU 142 is mounted. The MPU 142 includes a ROM 143 storing various control programs executed by the MPU 142 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 143. A certain RAM 144, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are built in.

  The MPU 142 controls the driving of the various light emitting units 54 to 56 and 63 and the speaker unit 64 based on the command received from the main control device 81. Further, a command resulting from analyzing these commands is transmitted to the display control device 100. Incidentally, the effect control device 82 is electrically connected to the display control device 100 via a connector unit (connection unit) in which connectors are provided at both ends of the signal line.

  The display control device 100 includes a display control board 151 on which are mounted an MPU 152, a video display processor (VDP) 155, a character ROM 156, and a video RAM 157, each of which is an element in which a program ROM 153 and a work RAM 154 are combined into a chip. It has.

  The MPU 152 analyzes the various commands received from the effect control device 82 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 155 (specifically, generate an internal command for the VDP 155).

  The program ROM 153 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 152 and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage unit that does not require external power supply when storing the stored information. The work RAM 154 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when the MPU 152 executes various programs, and is a volatile storage unit that requires an external power supply when storing the stored information. It is.

  The VDP 155 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the symbol display device 51. Since the VDP 155 is formed as an IC chip, it is also called a “drawing chip”, and the substance of the VDP 155 is a microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 155 adjusts the respective timings of the MPU 152, the video RAM 157, and the like, intervening in the reading and writing of data. The VDP 155 reads out the image data to be stored in the video RAM 157 from the character ROM 156 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 51.

  The character ROM 156 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the symbol display device 51. The character ROM 156 stores bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table that is referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like.

  The video RAM 157 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 51, and the display content of the symbol display device 51 is changed based on rewriting the content of the video RAM 157.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in MPU 112 of main controller 81>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the MPU 112 of the main control device 81 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The MPU 112 uses a variety of counter information during the game to perform a jackpot occurrence lottery, set the display of the main display unit 43, set the symbol display of the symbol display device 51, set the display of the accessory display unit 44, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10, a jackpot random number counter C1 used for the lottery of the jackpot occurrence, and a jackpot used for determining a jackpot type such as whether or not to open / close the opening / closing accessory 168. A type counter C2, and an opening type counter CS for setting a waiting period from the winning to the opening when the opening / closing accessory 168 is opened based on winning in the operating ports 38 and 39; A random number initial value counter CINI used for setting an initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is used. Furthermore, an electric accessory opening counter C4 used for a lottery to determine whether or not the electric accessory 39a of the second operating port 39 is in the electric opening state is used.

  Each of the counters C1, C2, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value every time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 114a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 114. In the lottery counter buffer 114a, information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the open type counter CS is stored when the first operating port 38 or the second operating port 39 wins. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area 114b as a means.

  The reserved ball storage area 114b includes a reserved area RE including a reserved area Ra for the first result display unit and a reserved area Rb for the second result display unit, and an execution area AE. The holding areas Ra and Rb have a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area, respectively, and a lottery counter is set in accordance with a winning history of the first operating port 38 or the second operating port 39. Numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the open type counter CS stored in the buffer 114a is stored in any area as pending information. The suspension information corresponds to special information.

  In this case, in the first area to the fourth area, if a prize to the first operating port 38 or the second operating port 39 occurs continuously plural times, the first area → the second area → the third area → Each numerical information is stored in time series in the order of the fourth area. Since the four areas are provided in this manner, up to four winning histories of game balls to the first operating port 38 or the second operating port 39 are respectively held and stored. Further, the reserved ball storage area 114b is provided with a total reserved number storage area, and the total reserved number storage area stores the number of winning prizes to the first operating port 38 or the second operating port 39. Is stored.

  The execution area AE is an area for moving each value stored in the first area of the holding area RE when starting the variable display of the main display unit 43, and the execution area AE when starting one game round. Is determined based on various types of numerical information stored in the.

  More specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to be added one by one in the range of, for example, 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). When the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 99). The jackpot random number counter C1 is updated periodically, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 114b of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation port 38 or the second operation port 39. More specifically, the game result is stored in the first result display section holding area Ra of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins in the first operation port 38, and the second result of the RAM 114 is stored at the timing when the game ball wins in the second operation port 39. It is stored in the display area Rb.

  The value of the random number for winning the jackpot is stored as a result table (game result information group) in a result table storage area 113a as a win / fail information group storage means in the ROM 113.

  Here, the contents of the result table will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 11 (a), in the result table, out-of-game results, direct hit results, and normal opening results are set as game results. The normal opening result is a game result in which the opening / closing accessory 168 of the accessory device 150 is opened based on the winning in the operating ports 38 and 39. In the present embodiment, the opening / closing role object 168 is opened once when a prize occurs in the first operating port 38, and the opening / closing role article 168 is opened twice when a prize is generated in the second operating port 39. It is set to be. The departure result is a result in which the opening / closing handpiece 168 does not enter the open state even when a winning has occurred in the operating ports 38 and 39. In this case, it is not possible to make the accessory device 150 win a prize, and it is impossible to expect a shift to the jackpot state (open / close execution mode). The direct hit result is a result of shifting to the big hit state (opening / closing execution mode) only when a prize is generated in the operating ports 38 and 39. Even if a V prize does not occur in addition to the prize in the accessory device 150. , As described above.

  Among the jackpot random number counters C1 (0 to 99), the number of random numbers resulting in an outlier is one, the number of random numbers resulting in a direct hit is one, and the rest is a normal release result. It has the corresponding value. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the opening / closing handpieces 168 corresponding to the operating ports 38 and 39 are opened with a probability of 98/100 based on the winning of both the operating ports 38 and 39, and 1/100 Although the opening / closing accessory 168 is not opened with a probability, the shift to the opening / closing execution mode is performed without passing the V prize, and the opening / closing accessory 168 is not opened or switched to the opening / closing execution mode with a probability of 1/100. No migration takes place.

  It should be noted that the configuration may be such that no direct hit result or no off result is provided. However, by including these results, the diversification of the game is achieved, and particularly when the direct hit result is provided, a game in which a prize to the accessory device 150 does not frequently occur due to nail adjustment or the like. Even if it is a table, it is possible to expect the occurrence of a jackpot state, and even with such a game table, it is possible to expect an effect of increasing the desire to play a game.

  The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by one, for example, in the range of 0 to 99, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 114b of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation port 38 or the second operation port 39. More specifically, the game result is stored in the first result display section holding area Ra of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins in the first operation port 38, and the second result of the RAM 114 is stored at the timing when the game ball wins in the second operation port 39. It is stored in the display area Rb.

  The value of the random number for setting the type of the jackpot result is stored as a type table (game type information group) in the various table storage area 113d as the hit / fail information group storage means in the ROM 113.

  Here, the contents of the type table will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 11B, in the type table, a 16R (round) continuation mode and a continuation rate fluctuation mode are set as the type of the jackpot result. The 16R continuation mode indicates a mode in which 16 round games are executed, and the continuation rate change mode indicates a mode in which the continuation rate to the next round game changes in a round game.

  Here, the round game means that (1) the opening and closing of the opening / closing accessory 168 with the predetermined upper limit opening frequency is performed, and (2) the total winning number of the game balls to the accessory device 150 is determined in advance. Is a game that continues until one of the conditions is reached. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the opening and closing of the opening and closing accessory 168 is performed 19 times in one round game, and the upper limit winning number of one round game is set to nine.

  The maximum number of times the round game is performed in each jackpot type is predetermined, and specifically, the maximum round game is set to 16 times regardless of the jackpot result in any mode. In this case, in the 16R continuation mode, 16 round games are set to be continued unconditionally. On the other hand, in the continuation rate change mode, the round game is set to be continued when a predetermined continuation condition is satisfied. The continuation condition is that a game ball wins in the accessory device 150 during the round game, and that the game ball wins V.

  The opening type counter CS is configured to be incremented by one, for example, in the range of 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). The release type counter CS is updated periodically. However, the update timing is set to be different from the timing of the big hit random number counter C1 and the big hit type counter C2. Therefore, it is difficult for an illegal act of reading the update timing of each counter value by some method. Like the other counters C1 and C2, the updated open type counter CS is stored in the reserved ball storage area 114b of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation port 38 or the second operation port 39. More specifically, the game result is stored in the first result display section holding area Ra of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins in the first operation port 38, and the second result of the RAM 114 is stored at the timing when the game ball wins in the second operation port 39. It is stored in the display area Rb.

  The value of the random number for setting the standby time (opening timing) from the winning of the operating ports 38 and 39 to the opening of the opening / closing accessory 168 is stored in the opening timing table storage area 113c as the standby information group storage means in the ROM 113. (Standby period information group).

  Here, the contents of the release timing table will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 11C, as the opening timing, a plurality of types of standby time (standby period) from the winning timing to the operating ports 38 and 39 (or the previous closing timing of the opening / closing accessory 168) are set. ing. More specifically, 20 types of standby times are set from 0.5 sec to 2.4 sec at intervals of 0.1 sec. The interval (0.1 sec) between these times is set to be shorter than the firing cycle (0.6 sec cycle) of the game ball, and a prize to the accessory device 150 by so-called hitting or the like. It is difficult to intentionally change (increase) the probability.

  The electric accessory opening counter C4 is configured to be incremented by one, for example, in the range of 0 to 250 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 250). The electric accessory opening counter C4 is updated periodically, and is stored in the electric utility holding area 114c of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 41.

  Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to control the electric accessory 39a to the open state based on the stored value of the electric accessory release counter C4. For example, if C4 = 0 to 190, the electric accessory 39a is controlled to be open, and if C4 = 191 to 250, the electric accessory 39a is not controlled to be open.

  In the present embodiment, the opening and closing of the electric accessory 39a is set so as not to be different regardless of the gaming state. That is, in the open lottery of the electric accessory 39a, it is easy to win or in a state where the open time or the number of times of opening is large (so-called high frequency support mode), or when the winning probability in the open lottery is lower or the win is made. A mode such as a state where the time and the number of times of opening are small (a so-called low frequency support mode) is not provided. In the configuration having these modes, the range of increase and decrease of pitches can be increased, so that the interest can be improved.On the other hand, in order to adjust the pitches in the high frequency support mode, the low frequency support mode In such a case, it may be necessary to adopt a specification in which the winning frequency of the two operation ports 38 and 39 is set low. Therefore, in the low-frequency support mode, winning in the operating ports 38 and 39 is unlikely to occur, and there is a possibility that the willingness to play may decrease. Therefore, by setting the open state of the electric accessory 39a regardless of the gaming state as in the present embodiment, it is possible to expect a certain amount of prizes to the operating ports 38 and 39 even in the normal gaming state, Can be avoided.

<Regarding Various Processes Executed by Main Controller 81>
Next, a timer interrupt process and a normal process executed by the MPU 112 in the main control device 81 to advance a game will be described. Note that, in addition to the timer interrupt process and the normal process, the MPU 112 performs a main process started upon power-on and an NMI interrupt process started by input of a power failure signal to an NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). The description of these processes is omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
First, the timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. This process is started by the MPU 112 periodically (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec).

  In step S101, reading processing of various detection sensors is executed. In the reading process, the states of the various detection sensors 38a, 39c, 35a, 41a, 179, 192, 193, and 196 are read, and the states of the various detection sensors 38a, 39c, 35a, 41a, 179, 192, 193, and 196 are changed. A process for determining and storing the detection information is executed. In addition, when the various game sensors 38a, 39c, 35a, 179 corresponding to the generation of the prize ball detect the winning of the game ball, the prize for instructing the payout control device 97 to pay out the prize ball. Set the sphere command. For example, when the entrance sensor 179 detects a prize in the accessory device 150, a prize ball command for designating 15 prize balls corresponding to the number of prize balls is set. In a succeeding step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated.

  In the following step S103, the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the electric accessory opening counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the electric accessory opening counter C4 are each incremented by one, and are cleared to 0 when their counter values reach the maximum values. Then, the updated values of the counters C1, C2, C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 114.

  In a succeeding step S104, a prize-for-through process is executed with a prize to the through gate 41. In the prize-for-through process, when a prize has been generated in the through gate 41, the number of retained bonuses stored in the electrical winning reserve area 114c is less than the upper limit (for example, “4”). On the condition that the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 updated in the step S103 is stored in the electric privilege holding area 114c. In addition, the effect control device 82 performs a process for turning on the third reserved light-emitting unit 56 corresponding to the number of the retained accessory storage numbers.

  Then, after performing the winning process for the operating port in step S105, the timer interrupt process ends. In the winning processing for the operating port, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won one of the operating ports 38 and 39, and if it is determined that the winning has been achieved, numerical information such as the jackpot random number counter C1 at that time is determined. And the numerical information is stored in the lottery counter buffer 114a.

  More specifically, the winning process for the operating port will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS.

  In step S201, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the first operating port 38 (start winning) based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first operating port 38. If it is determined that a game ball has won the first operation port 38, in step S202, a prize ball command for paying out seven game balls to the payout control device 97 is set. In a succeeding step S203, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that the gaming ball has won the first operating port 38. In step S204, the value stored in the reserved number storage area of the first result display unit reserved area Ra is read, and the start reserved storage number RaN reserved and stored in the first result display unit reserved area Ra is set. (Hereinafter, this is also referred to as the first start suspension storage number RaN). In the following step S205, a process of setting the number of times of opening and closing of the opening and closing accessory 168 to one is executed. Specifically, a process of setting “1” to the number-of-openings counter provided in the various counter areas 114 d of the RAM 114 is executed. Thereafter, in step S206, an information acquisition process for storing the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the open type counter CS is performed, and the main prize process ends.

  When it is determined in step S201 that the game ball has not won the first operating port 38, in step S207, it is determined whether the game ball has won the second operating port 39 (start winning). Is determined based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to. If it is determined that a game ball has won the second operation port 39, a prize ball command for paying out seven game balls is set in the payout control device 97 in step S208. In a succeeding step S209, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has won the second operation port 39. In step S210, the value stored in the reserved number storage area of the second result display unit reserved area Rb is read, and the start pending stored number RbN stored in the second result display unit reserved area Rb is set. (Hereinafter, this is also referred to as a second start hold storage number RbN). In a succeeding step S211, a process of setting the number of times of opening and closing of the opening and closing accessory 168 to two is executed. Specifically, a process of setting “2” to the above-mentioned number-of-openings counter is executed. Even if the number of times of opening is set in the processing of step S205 or step S211, there is a possibility that the opening / closing handpiece 168 does not enter the open state depending on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 as described above. Thereafter, information acquisition processing is performed in step S206, and the winning processing is completed.

  On the other hand, if both the step S201 and the step S207 are NO, that is, if the gaming ball has not won any of the first operating port 38 and the second operating port 39, the main winning processing is ended as it is.

  The prize ball commands set in steps S202 and S208 are transmitted to the payout control device 97 in an external output process S401 in a normal process described later.

  Here, the information acquisition process in step S206 will be described in detail with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In the information acquisition processing, first, in step S301, it is determined whether or not the number N (RaN or RbN) of the storage for starting suspension set in step S204 or step S210 is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment). judge. If the number N of start-hold storage is equal to the upper limit, the information acquisition process is terminated as it is. If the number N is less than the upper limit, the number N of start-hold storage of the corresponding result display-hold area is set in step S302. At the same time, the value stored in the total reserved number storage area in step S303 (hereinafter referred to as the common reserved number CRN) is incremented by one.

  In the following step S304, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 updated in step S103 and the open type counter CS updated in the normal processing described later are stored in the corresponding result display part holding area. It is stored in the first storage area of the storage area area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the number of pending storage incremented by 1 in step S302.

  In other words, when the number of start hold storage numbers RaN for the first operating port is set, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the opening type counter CS are stored in the holding area Ra for the first operating port. Is stored in the first storage area of the available storage areas, that is, the reserved area Ra corresponding to the number of start-reserved storages RaN for the first working port that has been incremented by one in step S302.

  In addition, when the number RbN of the starting hold storage for the second operating port is set, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the opening type counter CS is stored in the holding area Rb for the second operating port. Is stored in the first storage area among the available storage areas, that is, the reserved area Rb corresponding to the number RbN of the start reserved storage for the second working port, which is incremented by one in step S302. After executing the processing of step S304, the information acquisition processing ends.

<Normal processing>
Next, the flow of the normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal process is a process that is started after a main process started upon power-on is executed. In the normal process, main processes of a game are executed. As an outline, the processing in steps S401 to S406 is executed as a periodic processing with a period of 4 msec, and the counter updating processing in steps S408 and S409 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the normal processing, first, an external signal output processing is executed in step S401. In the external signal output process of step S401, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt process or the previous normal process is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, it determines the presence or absence of a prize ball command, and if the prize ball command is set, transmits it to the payout control device 97. If an effect command has been set, the command is transmitted to effect controller 82.

  Next, in step S402, the release type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the release type counter CS is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to zero. Then, the updated value of the release type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 114.

  In a succeeding step S403, a game control process for advancing the game is executed. In this game control processing, drive control and the like of each drive unit of the accessory device 150 based on winning in the operating ports 38 and 39 are performed.

  After executing the game control process in step S403, the process proceeds to step S404, in which a game state transition process is executed. By this game state transition processing, the game state transitions to the open / close execution mode. The details of the game control processing in step S403 and the game state transition processing in step S404 will be described later.

  In a succeeding step S405, a power support process for controlling the driving of the electric accessory 39a provided in the second operating port 39 is executed. In this electric role support processing, the electronic part release whether or not the electric part 39a is to be opened using the numerical information acquired from the electric part release counter C4 stored in the electric part holding area 114c of the RAM 114 is determined. In addition to performing the lottery, when the winning combination is in the open state, the opening and closing process of the electrical accessory 39a is executed. In addition, the display control of the accessory display unit 44 is performed so as to teach the lottery result of the electric lot opening lottery.

  Thereafter, in step S406, a game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, the solenoid of the game ball launch mechanism 53 is excited once every predetermined period (for example, 0.6 sec) on condition that the launch permission signal is input from the power supply and the launch control device 98. . Thereby, the game ball is launched toward the game area.

  In the following step S407, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the previous normal process. Then, the update of the random number initial value counter CINI and the release type counter CS is repeatedly executed within the remaining time until the next normal processing execution timing.

  That is, in step S408, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in a corresponding area of the RAM 114. In step S409, the release type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the release type counter CS is incremented by 1, and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the release type counter CS is stored in a corresponding area of the RAM 114.

Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S401 to S406 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1) can be updated at random. The release type counter CS can also be updated at random.
<Game control processing>
Next, the game control process in step S403 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS.

  In the game control process, first, in step S501, it is determined whether or not the vehicle is in the open / close execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode flag (open / close execution state information) is stored (stored) in the open / close execution mode flag storage area (open / close execution state information storage unit) in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114. I do. The open / close execution mode flag is stored when the game state is shifted to the open / close execution mode in the later-described game state shift processing, and is cleared when the open / close execution mode is ended in the same game state shift processing.

  When the opening / closing execution mode is in progress, the game control process is executed without executing any of the processes after step S502, that is, the game start process of steps S503 to S506 and the game progress process of steps S507 to S509. To end. In other words, when the opening / closing execution mode is in progress, the game starts (regardless of whether or not a prize is generated in the operating ports 38, 39) (the accessory device triggered by the prize in the operating ports 38, 38). 150 is not released).

  If it is not in the open / close execution mode, it is determined in step S502 whether or not the accessory device 150 is in the control state. The control state includes whether or not the opening and closing operation of the accessory device 150 based on the winning of the operation ports 38 and 39. The determination as to whether or not this control state is made is based on the condition that the accessory control flag is stored in the accessory control flag storage area in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114. I do. The above-described accessory control flag is stored when the game result based on winning in the operating ports 38 and 39 is an open result (in this embodiment, a normal open result), and the accessory device 150 based on the result is stored. It is deleted at the end of the operation (including the waiting period after closing).

  If the accessory device 150 is not in the control state, the process proceeds to a game start process in steps S503 to S506. In the game start processing, first, in step S503, it is determined whether the common hold number CRN is “0”. The case where the common suspension number CRN is “0” means that the start suspension storage numbers RaN and RbN are both “0” for both the first operation port 38 and the second operation port 39. Therefore, the game control process ends as it is. If the common hold number CRN is not “0”, the data stored in the first result display part holding area Ra or the second result display part holding area Rb is set for variable display in step S504. Is performed, and in step S505, a right / wrong determination process for determining a game result of the data set in the data setting process is performed. In step S506, the control of the accessory device 150 is performed. After executing the control start process to be started, the game control process is terminated.

  Here, the data setting process of step S504, the success / failure determination process of step S505, and the control start process of step S506 will be described in detail below.

  First, the data setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In the data setting process, first, in step S601, it is determined whether or not the second startup suspended storage number RbN that is suspended and stored in the second result display unit suspension area Rb is “0”. If the second start-hold storage number RbN is “0”, the data setting process for the first result display unit in steps S602 to S607 is executed. If the second start-hold storage number RbN is not “0”, Executes the data setting process for the second result display unit in steps S608 to S613.

  Here, the case where the data setting process is executed is a case where the common suspension number CRN is 1 or more, as described above. In this case, in the data setting process, it is determined whether or not the second startup hold storage number RbN is “0”. If the second start hold storage number RbN is not “0”, that is, the hold information for variable display is displayed for the second result display unit BS. If stored, the data stored in the second result display section reserved area Rb is set for variable display regardless of whether the first start pending stored number RaN is 1 or more. I made it. Thereby, when the hold information is stored in both the first result display section holding area Ra and the second result display section holding area Rb, the second result display section corresponding to the second operating port 39 is stored. The hold information stored in the hold area Rb has priority.

  In the data setting process for the first result display unit, first, in step S602, the first start reserved storage number RaN of the first result display unit reserved area Ra is decremented by one. In a succeeding step S603, the common reservation number CRN is decremented by one. After that, in step S604, the data stored in the first area of the first result display part holding area Ra is moved to the execution area AE.

  After that, in step S605, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first result display part holding area Ra is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. The data in the first area is cleared and the second area → the first area, The data in each area is shifted such as 3 areas → second area, fourth area → third area, and so on.

  In the following step S606, the second result display section flag (second result display section information) is stored in the second result display section flag storage area (second result display section information storage means) provided in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114. If it is stored, it is deleted, and if it is not stored, its state is maintained. The second result display unit flag is used to specify which of the hold information of the first result display unit hold area Ra and the second result display unit hold area Rb corresponds to the target of the current pass / fail determination. Information.

  In the following step S607, a shift command (shift occurrence information) is set, which is information for causing the effect control device 82 as the sub-side control device to recognize that the data in the holding area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area of the ROM 113, information indicating that the hold area targeted for the current data shift corresponds to the first result display section hold area Ra, that is, the first operation port 38 A command at the time of shift including information of correspondence is selected, and the selected command at the time of shift is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82. Thereafter, the data setting process ends.

  The shift command set in step S607 is transmitted to effect control device 82 in step S401 in the normal processing (FIG. 15). The effect control device 82 executes a process for changing the display on the first hold light-emitting unit 54 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holdings, based on the received shift command.

  In the data setting process for the second result display unit, first, in step S608, the second start hold storage number RbN of the second result display unit hold area Rb is decremented by one. In a succeeding step S609, the common reservation number CRN is decremented by one. After that, in step S610, the data stored in the first area of the second result display part holding area Rb is moved to the execution area AE.

  Thereafter, in step S611, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second result display section holding area Rb is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. The data in the first area is cleared and the second area → the first area, The data in each area is shifted such as 3 areas → second area, fourth area → third area, and so on.

  In the following step S612, the second result display section flag (second result display section information) is stored in the second result display section flag storage area (second result display section information storage means) provided in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114. If it is not stored, the second result display section flag is stored, and if it is stored, the state is maintained.

  In the following step S613, a shift command (shift occurrence information) is set, which is information for causing the effect control device 82 as the sub-side control device to recognize that the data in the holding area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area of the ROM 113, information indicating that the hold area for which the current data is to be shifted corresponds to the hold area Rb for the second result display unit, that is, the information corresponding to the second operation port 39. A command at the time of shift including the information that the command is being performed is selected, and the selected command at the time of shift is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82. Thereafter, the data setting process ends.

  The shift command set in step S613 is transmitted to effect control device 82 in step S401 in the normal processing (FIG. 15). The effect control device 82 executes a process for changing the display on the second hold light emitting section 55 in accordance with the decrease in the number of hold, based on the received shift command.

  Next, the success / failure determination processing in step S505 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  First, in step S701, it is determined whether or not the current game result is a direct hit result by referring to the data (big hit random number counter C1) shifted to the current execution area AE and the result table of the ROM 113. If it is a direct hit result, the process proceeds to step S702 to execute a process of storing a V winning flag in the various flag storage area 114e. The V winning flag is a flag for the MPU 112 to recognize the occurrence of the release execution mode.

  In a succeeding step S703, the direct hit command is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82. In step S703, a process of switching the display on the main display unit 43 to a display corresponding to a direct hit is executed. Thereafter, the true / false determination processing ends.

  The direct hit command set in step S703 is transmitted to effect control device 82 in step S401 in the normal processing (FIG. 15). The effect control device 82 executes a process for a start effect of the opening / closing execution mode based on the received direct hit command.

  If it is not a direct hit result in step S701, the process proceeds to step S704. In step S704, by referring to the data (big hit random number counter C1) shifted to the current execution area AE and the result table of the ROM 113, it is determined whether or not the current game result is a departure result. If the result is a miss, the process proceeds to step S705, and the value set in the opening number counter in step S205 or step S211 in the winning processing for the operating port (FIG. 13) is cleared to "0".

  Then, in step S706, the disconnection command is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82. In step S706, a process of switching the display of the main display unit 43 to a display corresponding to the departure result is executed. Thereafter, the true / false determination processing ends.

  The departure command set in step S706 is transmitted to effect control device 82 in step S401 in the normal processing (FIG. 15). The effect control device 82 executes a process for notifying that the accessory device 150 does not enter the open state based on the received disconnect command.

  If the result is not a departure in step S704, a normal release command is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S707. In step S704, a process of switching the display on the main display unit 43 to a display corresponding to the normal opening result is executed. Thereafter, the true / false determination processing ends.

  The normal release command set in step S707 is transmitted to effect control device 82 in step S401 in the normal processing (FIG. 15). The effect control device 82 executes a process for notifying that the accessory device 150 is in an open state based on the received normal open command.

  That is, in the present embodiment, the result of the winning / fail determination (game result) is immediately notified based on the winning in the operating ports 38 and 39.

  Next, the control start process in step S506 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In the control start process, first, in step S801, a process of ascertaining the number of times of opening / closing accessory 168 is performed with reference to the number-of-openings counter in RAM 114 described above. In a succeeding step S802, an opening / closing timing setting process is executed. In the opening / closing timing setting process, of the data shifted to the execution area AE in the data setting process (FIG. 17), data relating to the opening timing, that is, the value of the opening type counter CS and the opening timing table stored in the ROM 113 , The opening timing of the opening and closing accessory 168 this time is set. More specifically, from this processing, a numerical value corresponding to how many seconds after which the opening / closing accessory 168 is to be opened (whether to start the drive control of the opening / closing accessory driving unit 173) is read from the opening timing table. The data is input to a standby counter provided in various counter areas 114d. This standby counter is updated (subtracted) at a predetermined cycle, and when it reaches a predetermined value (for example, “0”), it is possible to know that it is the opening timing of the opening and closing accessory 168.

  In a succeeding step S803, a first distribution setting process is executed. In the first distribution setting process, the first distribution member 300 is placed in the distribution state at a timing after a predetermined first period (0.0 sec) has elapsed from the opening timing set in step S802. The first distributing member 300 is set to be in the non-distributed state at a timing when a predetermined second period (1.5 sec) has elapsed therefrom.

  Then, in step S804, after executing the second distribution setting process, the control start process ends. In the second distribution setting process, the second distribution member 310 is placed in the distribution state at a timing when a predetermined third period (1.8 sec) has elapsed from the opening timing set in step S802. The second distributing member 310 is set to be in the non-distributed state at a timing when a predetermined fourth period (0.1 sec) has elapsed therefrom.

  These timings can be grasped by the first distribution counter and the second distribution counter provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114. Specifically, in steps S803 and S804, first, the value corresponding to the first and third periods (the value corresponding to the timing of displacing from the non-distributed state to the distributed state) is stored in the corresponding distribution counter. input. These distributing counters are updated (subtracted) at a predetermined cycle and become a predetermined value (for example, “0”), so that the corresponding distributing members 300 and 310 have the displacement (non-distributed state → distributed state) timing. Can be grasped. Then, in a distribution process (FIG. 21) described later, the displacement of the distribution members 300 and 310 (drive control of the driving units 300a and 310a) is performed, and the value corresponding to the period for maintaining the distribution state is: It is input to the same distribution counter. Thereafter, when the same distribution counter reaches a predetermined value, it is possible to grasp the timing of displacement (allocation state → non-allocation state) again.

  That is, in the present embodiment, the timing at which the first distribution member 300 and the second distribution member 310 are displaced is uniquely determined, and more specifically, the opening and closing of the opening and closing accessory 168 in the accessory device 150. The period from the timing to the displacement of each of the distribution members 300 and 310 is determined.

  Note that, in the first to fourth periods, the period in which the distribution members 300 and 310 are in the distribution state is the period in which game balls entering the accessory device 150 can reach the distribution members 300 and 310. It is set to be.

  Next, the game progress processing in the game control processing (FIG. 16) will be described. As described above, the game progress processing is processing performed when it is determined in step S502 that the accessory device 150 is in the control state. In other words, when the control state is being established in step S502, the in-control process is executed in step S507, the distribution process is executed in step S508, and the winning process is executed in the subsequent step S509. Then, the game control process ends.

  First, the processing during control in step S507 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In step S901, it is determined whether it is the opening timing of the opening / closing accessory 168. In this determination, whether or not it is the opening timing can be confirmed by referring to the value of the standby counter set in step S802. If it is the opening timing in step S901, an opening control process is executed in step S902. In this process, the opening and closing accessory 168 is displaced to the open state by controlling the driving of the opening and closing accessory drive 173. In step S902, a process of inputting a value corresponding to the current open period (in this embodiment, uniformly 2 seconds) to the open period counter provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 is executed. The open period counter is updated (subtracted) at a predetermined cycle, and when it reaches a predetermined value (for example, “0”), it is possible to grasp that the opening / closing accessory 168 is closed.

  Then, in the subsequent step S903, a process of subtracting "1" from the open counter of the RAM 114 is performed, and then the control-in-progress process ends.

  If it is not the opening timing of the opening / closing accessory 168 in step S901, the process proceeds to step S904. In step S904, it is determined whether or not it is time to close the opening / closing accessory 168. In this process, by referring to the value of the open period counter input in step S902, it can be confirmed whether or not it is the close timing. If it is the closing timing in step S904, a closing control process is executed in step S905. In this processing, the drive control of the opening / closing accessory drive unit 173 is ended, and the opening / closing accessory 168 is displaced to the closed state.

  In the subsequent step S906, it is determined whether or not the remaining number of times of release is “0” by referring to the number of times of release of the RAM 114. If it is "0", control end processing is executed in step S907. In this process, a process for ending the control of the accessory device 150 for one piece of hold information is performed. Specifically, confirmation of the presence or absence of an error in each of the driving units 173, 300a, 310a, and 194, a process of returning to the initial position, and the like are performed. In a succeeding step S908, a control end command is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82. Thereafter, the control-time processing ends.

  The control end command set in step S908 is transmitted to effect control device 82 in step S401 in the normal processing (FIG. 15). The effect control device 82 executes a process for notifying that the control of the accessory device 150 is to be ended based on the received control end command.

  If the number of releases is not “0” in step S906, a standby period setting process is performed in step S909. In the standby period setting process, a process of inputting a value corresponding to the current standby period (1 second in this embodiment) to the standby period counter of the RAM 114 is executed.

  If it is not the closing timing in step S904, after executing the processing in step S908 or after executing the processing in step S909, the in-control processing ends.

  Next, the distribution process in step S508 in the game control process (FIG. 16) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In step S1001, it is determined whether or not it is the displacement timing of the first distribution member 300. This determination can be confirmed by referring to the value of the first distribution counter of the RAM 114 as described above. If it is the displacement timing, a first distribution control process is executed in step S1002. In this process, a process of changing the driving state of the first distribution driving unit 300a is performed. Specifically, the driving state of the first distribution driving unit 300a is grasped, and when the driving state is the driving state, the driving is terminated, and the first distribution member 300 is changed from the distribution state to the non-distribution state. Displace. In addition, when the first distribution driving unit 300a is not in the driving state, the driving is started, and the first distribution member 300 is displaced from the non-distribution state to the distribution state. When the distribution state is set, a value corresponding to the second period is input to the first distribution counter.

  In step S1002, if the current control corresponds to opening twice (opening based on winning in the second operating port 39), similar to the processing in step S803, from the opening timing of the opening and closing accessory 168, The first distribution member 300 is set to the distribution state at a timing when a predetermined first period has elapsed, and the first distribution member 300 is not distributed at a timing when a predetermined second period has elapsed therefrom. Set to state. Note that a period from when the first distribution member 300 is displaced from the distribution state to the non-distribution state until the opening timing of the second opening / closing handpiece 168 is also referred to as a fifth period. In the present embodiment, the fifth period is set to 1.0 sec.

  If it is not the displacement timing of the first distribution member 300 in step S1001, or after the process of step S1002 is performed, the process proceeds to step S1003. In step S1003, it is determined whether or not it is the displacement timing of the second distribution member 310. This determination can be confirmed by referring to the value of the second distribution counter of the RAM 114 as described above. If it is the displacement timing, in step S1004, a second distribution control process is executed. In this process, a process of changing the drive state of the second distribution drive unit 310a is performed. Specifically, the driving state of the second distribution driving unit 310a is grasped, and if the driving state is the driving state, the driving is terminated, and the second distribution member 310 is changed from the distribution state to the non-distribution state. Displace. When the second distribution driving unit 310a is not in the driving state, the driving is started, and the second distribution member 310 is displaced from the non-distribution state to the distribution state. When the distribution state is set, a value corresponding to the fourth period is input to the first distribution counter.

  In step S1004, if the current control corresponds to opening twice (opening based on winning in the second operating port 39), similar to the processing in step S804, from the opening timing of the opening and closing accessory 168, At the timing when a predetermined third period has elapsed, the second distribution member 310 is set to the distribution state, and when the predetermined fourth period has elapsed therefrom, the second distribution member 310 is not distributed. Set to state. Note that a period from when the second distribution member 310 is displaced from the distribution state to the non-distribution state until the opening timing of the second opening / closing handpiece 168 is also referred to as a sixth period. In the present embodiment, the sixth period is set to 0.6 seconds.

  If it is not the displacement timing of the second distribution member 310 in step S1003, or after the processing of step S1004 is performed, the main distribution processing ends.

  Next, the winning process in step S509 in the game control process (FIG. 16) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In step S1101, a detection signal from the entrance sensor 179 is grasped, and it is determined whether or not a game ball has won a prize in the accessory device 150. If a winning has been achieved, in step S1102, a winning command in the accessory is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82. Thereafter, the control-time processing ends.

  The inside-prize winning command set in step S1102 is transmitted to effect control device 82 in step S401 in the normal processing (FIG. 15). The effect control device 82 notifies that a prize has occurred in the accessory device 150 based on the received accessory prize command (notifies the operation of the game ball in the accessory device 150). Execute the process for

  If the entrance sensor 179 is not in the detection state in step S1101 (including already won), or after executing the processing of step S1102, the process proceeds to step S1103. In step S1103, a detection signal from the V winning sensor 192 is grasped, and it is determined whether or not a V winning has occurred. In the event that a V winning has occurred, in step S1104, storing the V winning flag in the RAM 114 stores the occurrence of the big hit state (transition to the open / close execution mode). Then, in step S1105, a control end process is executed. In step S1106, a control end command is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82.

  The processing in step S1105 is the same as the processing in step S907. Further, the control end command set in the process of step S1106 may be the same as the command of step S908, or may include information indicating that a V winning has occurred. Even if it is the same as the command in step S908, a command for the opening / closing execution mode is output at the start of the opening / closing execution mode, so that the effect control device 82 can grasp the transition to the opening / closing execution mode and suppress an increase in the number of commands. It is possible. On the other hand, if the command in step S1106 includes information indicating that a V prize has occurred, the effect can be quickly grasped on the effect control device 82 side, and an effect that congratulates the V prize can be obtained. This can be performed at a timing closer to the V winning timing of the game ball.

  If no V winning has been detected in step S1103, or after performing the processing in step S1106, the main winning processing ends.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the game state transition processing of step S404 in the normal processing (FIG. 15) will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS.

  First, in step S1201, it is determined whether the mode is the open / close execution mode. If it is not in the open / close execution mode, the process proceeds to step S1202, and it is determined whether or not the current game result corresponds to the shift to the open / close execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a V winning flag is stored in the RAM 114. If the V winning flag has not been stored, the present game state transition processing ends.

  If the V prize flag is stored, open / close execution mode start processing is executed in step S1203. In the start process, an opening standby time (start standby period) for waiting without opening the opening and closing accessory 168 of the accessory device 150 for opening of the opening and closing execution mode is set. More specifically, opening standby time information stored in the ROM 113 in advance is set in the standby time counter area provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114. The value of the standby time information set here is decremented by one each time the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 12) is executed.

  In the following step S1204, a type determination process is performed to determine the type of the current open / close execution mode. Specifically, of the hold information stored in the current execution area AE, the jackpot type counter C2 is grasped, and the type of the current open / close execution mode is determined to be 16R continuous mode by referring to the type table of the ROM 113. Or the continuation rate fluctuation mode is determined.

  In the following step S1205, it is determined whether or not the current open / close execution mode is the 16R continuation mode based on the processing result of step S1204. If the 16R continuation mode is set, the continuation flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114 in step S1206. The continuation flag is a flag for the MPU 112 to recognize that the current open / close execution mode is the 16R continuation mode.

  If the mode is not the 16R continuation mode in step S1205, or after executing the processing in step S1206, the process proceeds to step S1207. In step S1207, “15” is set in the first round counter RC1 provided in the various counter area 114d of the RAM 114, and “19” is set in the second round counter RC2 provided in the various counter area 114d. . The first round counter RC1 is a counter for counting the number of round games in one open / close execution mode, and the second round counter RC2 counts the number of times the opening / closing accessory 168 is opened in one round game. It is a counter to perform.

  After executing the processing in step S1207, an opening command is set in step S1208. The set opening command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S401 in the normal processing (FIG. 15). This opening command includes information indicating whether the mode is the 16R continuation mode or the continuation rate variation mode. The effect control device 82 determines the contents of the effect corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices such that the determined contents of the effect are executed. The content of the effect includes the display mode on the symbol display device 51, and the determined display mode is output from the effect control device 82 to the display control device 100 as a display content command. The display control device 100 controls the display of the symbol display device 51 based on the display content command received from the effect control device 82 so that a display (for example, a moving image display) corresponding to the current opening / closing execution mode is performed.

  In a succeeding step S1209, after executing the external signal setting processing, the game state transition processing ends. In the external signal setting process, the signal output state of the jackpot signal output terminal provided at the external output terminal 99 is set to the jackpot signal output state. As a result, when the jackpot signal output terminal is connected to the management control device on the gaming hall side, a jackpot signal is output to the management control device, and the jackpot occurs in the pachinko machine 10 in the management control device. You can understand what you have done.

  On the other hand, in the case of the open / close execution mode, an affirmative determination is made in step S1201, and the process proceeds to step S1210. In step S1210, it is determined whether the opening standby time has elapsed. If the waiting time for the opening has not elapsed, the present game state transition processing ends. If the opening standby time has elapsed, an opening / closing process is performed in step S1211.

  Here, the opening and closing process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1301, it is determined whether the opening / closing accessory 168 is being opened. Specifically, the determination is made based on the driving state of the opening / closing accessory driving unit 173. If the opening / closing accessory 168 is not being opened, it is determined in step S1302 whether the value of the first round counter RC1 is “0”, and in step S1303, the timer provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 is determined. It is determined whether or not the value of the counter T is “0”.

  When the value of the first round counter RC1 is “0” or when the value of the timer counter T is not “0”, the main opening / closing process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if the value of the first round counter RC1 is not “0” and the value of the timer counter T is “0”, the process advances to step S1304 to execute the setting process of each round.

  More specifically, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 25, first, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not the activation timing of the current setting process is the start timing of each round. Specifically, when the second round counter RC2 is “0”, it is determined that it is the start timing of each round. If it is not the start timing, the setting process ends.

  In a succeeding step S1402, it is determined whether or not the continuation flag is stored in the RAM 114. That is, it is determined whether or not the current open / close execution mode is the 16R continuation mode. If the continuation flag is not stored and the current opening / closing execution mode is the continuation rate fluctuation mode, the process of grasping the number of rounds is executed in step S1403. In this process, the number of rounds to be set in the current round setting process in the open / close execution mode is determined by referring to the value of the first round counter RC1. Then, in step S1404, the round pattern table stored in the various table storage area 113d of the ROM 113 is referred to.

  In the round pattern table, as shown in FIG. 27, in one open / close execution mode, the open / close pattern of each round is defined. A plurality of types of opening / closing patterns of the opening / closing accessory 168 in each round are set, and an opening / closing pattern A, an opening / closing pattern B, and an opening / closing pattern C are set.

  As described above, in the 16R continuation mode, the round game continues unconditionally until the 16th round. On the other hand, in the continuation rate fluctuation mode, the next round is continued when the continuation condition is satisfied. The continuation condition is that a game ball wins in the accessory device 150 during a round game, and that the game ball wins V.

  In this embodiment, the continuation rate of each round in the continuation rate fluctuation mode is changed by making the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing accessory 168 different in each round. More specifically, the opening / closing pattern A is easier to continue than B and C. When the opening / closing pattern B is compared with the opening / closing pattern C, the probability of the V prize may differ depending on the timing of entering the game ball.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 28, in the opening / closing pattern table stored in the various table storage area 113d of the ROM 113, the opening / closing mode differs depending on the number of times of opening in the opening / closing patterns A to C of each round. Is set to

  For example, in the opening and closing pattern A, during the 19th opening in one round game, the opening times of the first to 16th times (RC2 = 1 to 16) are longer than the firing cycle of the game ball (0.6 sec) ( (3 times), open for 1.8 sec, and then close for 0.5 sec (also referred to as open / close pattern A1). In the 17th to 19th times (RC2 = 17 to 19), the opening is performed for 1.0 second, and then the closing is performed for 4.0 seconds (also referred to as opening / closing pattern A2). That is, in the case of A1, winning in the accessory device 150 is relatively easy to occur in relation to the firing cycle, and in the case of A2, it can occur but is less likely to occur than in A1.

  Regarding the opening / closing pattern B, at the first to tenth (RC2 = 1 to 10) opening times, the opening is performed for 0.2 sec, and then the closing is performed for 2.1 sec (also referred to as the opening / closing pattern B1). The eleventh to thirteenth (RC2 = 11 to 13) open for 1.0 sec and then close for 1.3 sec (also referred to as open / close pattern B2). The 14th to 16th times (RC2 = 14 to 16) are the same as the opening / closing pattern B1. In the 17th to 19th times (RC2 = 17 to 19), the opening is performed for 0.2 sec, and then the closing is performed for 4.8 sec (also referred to as opening / closing pattern B3). That is, in the case of B1 and B3, a prize to the accessory device 150 hardly occurs due to the firing cycle, and in the case of B2, a prize may be generated at a level substantially equal to A2.

  Regarding the opening / closing pattern C, in the first to 16th (RC2 = 1 to 16) opening times, the opening is performed for 0.2 sec, and then the closing is performed for 2.1 sec (also referred to as the opening / closing pattern C1). The opening / closing pattern C1 is the same as the opening / closing pattern B1. In the 17th to 19th times (RC2 = 17 to 19), the opening is performed for 1.0 second, and then the closing is performed for 4.0 seconds (also referred to as opening / closing pattern C2). The opening / closing pattern C2 is the same as the opening / closing pattern A1. That is, in the case of C1, a prize to the accessory device 150 hardly occurs, and in the case of C2, it is the same as A2.

  Thus, the opening / closing patterns are different depending on the opening / closing patterns A to C set in each round. Further, even in the same round, the opening / closing mode differs depending on the number of times of opening / closing.

  On the other hand, the operation of the distribution members 300 and 310 is the same in both rounds.

  Specifically, for any of the opening / closing patterns A to C, the first distribution member 300 opens and closes the opening / closing accessory 168 at the first to tenth (RC2 = 1 to 10) opening times. After the period TA1 (0.0 sec) from the start, the state changes to the distribution state, and after the period TA2 (0.1 sec), the state changes to the non-distribution state. After that, the state changes to the non-distribution state over the period TA3 (1.3 sec). The distribution state is maintained (also referred to as operation pattern VA1). The eleventh to sixteenth times (RC2 = 11 to 16) are displaced in the distribution state after a period TA4 (0.0 sec) from the start of opening of the opening / closing accessory 168, and are not changed after a period TA5 (1.0 sec) from the displacement. The state is shifted to the distribution state, and thereafter, the non-distribution state is maintained for TA6 (1.3 seconds) (also referred to as an operation pattern VA2). From the 17th to 19th times (RC2 = 17 to 19), no displacement occurs in the non-distributed state (also referred to as operation pattern VA3).

  Regardless of the opening / closing patterns A to C, the second distribution member 310 is not displaced in the non-distributed state in the first to sixteenth (RC2 = 1 to 16) opening times (operation pattern). VB1). The 17th to 19th times (RC2 = 17 to 19) are displaced to the distribution state after a period TB1 (1.0 sec) from the start of opening of the opening / closing accessory 168, and are not changed after a period TB2 (0.1 sec) from the displacement. The state is shifted to the distribution state, and thereafter, the non-distribution state is maintained for TB3 (3.9 sec) (also referred to as an operation pattern VB2).

  Here, in each round game in the opening / closing execution mode, the total operation period of the opening time and the closing time at each opening / closing (RC2) is predetermined. That is, in any opening / closing pattern, the operation period at the time of the first to sixteenth opening and closing (RC2 = 1 to 16) is the first operation period (2.3 sec), and the seventeenth to nineteenth (RC2 = The operation period at the time of opening and closing of 17 to 19) is the second operation period (5.0 sec).

  In addition, the operation pattern of each of the distribution members 300 and 310 during the opening and closing execution mode does not change in relation to the opening and closing patterns A1 to A2, B1 to B3, and C1 to C2 of the opening and closing accessory 168. That is, in any opening / closing pattern, the first distribution member 300 operates in the VA1 operation pattern at the first to tenth opening / closing (RC2 = 1 to 10), and the eleventh to sixteenth (RC2 =). At the time of opening / closing of 11 to 16), it operates according to the operation pattern of VA2, and at the 17th to 19th times (RC2 = 17 to 19), it operates at the operation pattern of VA3. Further, the second distribution member 310 operates according to the VB1 operation pattern at the time of the first to sixteenth (RC2 = 1 to 16) opening and closing, and operates at the VB2 at the seventeenth to 19th (RC2 = 17 to 19) opening and closing. Operates in an operation pattern.

  In other words, the operation pattern of the first distribution member 300 is 23.0 sec (0 sec to 23.0 sec, 2.3 sec × 10 times) after the start of one round game (when the round game is first opened). It switches from VA1 to VA2, and switches from VA2 to VA3 36.8 seconds after the start of the same round game (23.0 to 36.8 seconds, 23.0 seconds + 2.3 seconds × 6 times). Then, the operation of VA3 is continued until after 51.8 sec (36.8 sec to 51.8 sec, 36.8 sec + 5.0 sec × 3 times).

  The operation pattern of the second distribution member 310 is such that VB1 is set 36.8 seconds after the start of one round game (when the round game is first opened) (0 sec to 36.8 sec, 2.3 sec × 16 times). From VB2 to VB2, and the operation of VB2 continues after 51.8 sec (36.8 sec to 51.8 sec, 36.8 sec + 5.0 sec × 3 times).

  That is, the operation pattern of the distribution members 300 and 310 is uniquely determined in each round.

  The relationship between each of the opening / closing patterns A to C and the operation pattern of each distribution member will be described in more detail. In the opening / closing pattern A, during the period A1, (RC2 = 1 to 16), a prize to the accessory device 150 is obtained. It is relatively easy to occur, and during VA1 (RC2 = 1 to 10), it is easy to get a V prize (it is hard to be assigned to the off side). On the other hand, even during A1 (RC2 = 1 to 16), during VA2 (RC2 = 111 to 16), V winning is less likely than in VA1 (it is likely to be distributed to the off side). During this A1, the distribution by the second distribution member 310 is not performed (VB1). In the opening / closing pattern A, when A2 is reached (RC2 = 17 to 19), a prize to the accessory device 150 is less likely to occur than A1, but no distribution to the off side by the first distribution member 300 is performed. (VA3) Then, distribution to the V winning side by the second distribution member 310 may occur (VB2). That is, in the round of the opening / closing pattern A, there is a relatively high expectation for the occurrence of the V winning in any period (RC2 = 1 to 19), and the possibility of continuing the round is high.

  In the case of the opening / closing pattern B, during the period B1 (RC2 = 1 to 10), a prize to the accessory device 150 hardly occurs, but if a prize occurs, the first distribution member 300 moves the prize to the outside side. It is difficult to share (VA1). When B2 is reached (RC2 = 11 to 13), a prize to the accessory device 150 can be generated, but it is easy for the first distribution member 300 to be distributed to the off side (VA2). While B1 and VA2 (RC2 = 14 to 16), a prize to the accessory device 150 hardly occurs, and even if a prize is won, it is likely to be distributed to the off side. When B3 is reached (RC2 = 17 to 19), although the winning in the accessory device 150 hardly occurs, the first distribution member 300 does not perform the distribution to the outside side (VA3), and the second distribution is performed. Distribution to the V winning side by the member 310 may occur (VB2). That is, from the relationship with the winning rate to the accessory device 150 and the operation of the distribution members 300 and 310, in the round of the opening and closing pattern B, the V prize occurs during the period B2 (RC2 = 11 to 13). If not, the possibility of occurrence of the V prize is low in other periods, and the possibility of continuing the round is low.

  In the case of the opening / closing pattern C, the winning in the accessory device 150 hardly occurs during C1 (RC2 = 1 to 16), but if it occurs, it is assumed that the winning is performed during VA1 (RC2 = 1 to 10). ) Is more likely to win V than during VA2 (RC2 = 11 to 16). On the other hand, if C2 (RC2 = 17 to 19), winning in the accessory device 150 is more likely to occur than C1, and further, the first distribution member 300 does not perform the distribution to the outside (VA3). Then, distribution to the V winning side by the second distribution member 310 may occur (VB2). In other words, from the relationship with the winning rate to the accessory device 150 and the operation of the distribution members 300 and 310, in the round of the opening and closing pattern C, the V prize hardly occurs during the period C1, but during the period C2. We can expect the occurrence of the V prize, and we can expect the continuation of the round.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, although the operation patterns of the distribution members 300 and 310 and the rotator 201 are the same in each round, the ease of continuation of the round differs depending on the opening / closing pattern of each round (RC1). I do. Further, the ease of continuing the round (easiness of winning a V) differs depending on the number of times of opening and closing (RC2) in each round.

  Returning to the description of the setting processing of each round (FIG. 25), after referring to the round pattern table in step S1404, processing of setting the opening / closing pattern of the corresponding round is executed in step S1405. Specifically, a flag storage area corresponding to each of the patterns A to C is provided in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. For example, in the case of the opening / closing pattern A, the flag is stored in the corresponding area.

  If the continuation flag is stored in step S1402, or after performing the processing in step S1405, the process advances to step S1406. In step S1406, “9” is set in the winning counter PC provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114. The winning counter PC indicates the number of winnings in one round game. In the present embodiment, the round game ends when nine game balls win the bonus device 150 in one round game. In step S1407, a process of setting “19” to the second round counter RC2 is executed, and then the setting process ends.

  Returning to the description of the opening / closing process (FIG. 24), after executing the process of step S1304, the respective opening setting processes are executed in step S1305.

  In the setting process for each release, specifically, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 26, first, it is determined whether or not the continuation flag is stored in step S1501. This process is the same as the process in step S1402. If the continuation flag is stored, the open / close pattern of the current round is set to A1 in the following step S1502. That is, in the case of the 16R continuation mode, the opening and closing pattern of the pattern having the longest opening time is set in all rounds (RC1) and in all opening times (RC2). For this reason, in the 16R continuation mode, the winning of the maximum winning number is likely to occur in each round. In the present embodiment, in the open / close execution mode of the 16R continuation mode, the next round is continued even if the V prize is not won (even if the continuation condition is not satisfied).

  If the continuation flag is not stored in step S1501 and the mode is the continuation rate fluctuation mode, the process proceeds to step S1503. In step S1503, the second round counter RC2 is grasped, and it is grasped how many times the opening and closing of the opening and closing accessory 168 this time is during one round. Then, in step S1504, the corresponding open / close patterns A1 to A2, B1 to B3, and C1 to C2 are set in step S1505 by referring to the open / close pattern table from the various table storage areas 113d of the ROM 113.

  In a succeeding step S1506, a process of setting an operation pattern of the distribution members 300 and 310 corresponding to the value of the current second round counter RC2 is executed. In this process, the above-described first distribution counter and second distribution counter provided in the RAM 114 are used. Then, referring to the opening / closing pattern table, the operation patterns of the corresponding distribution members 300 and 310 are grasped, and values corresponding to the timing of displacing from the non-distributed state to the distributed state are input. As described above, these distribution counters are updated (subtracted) at a predetermined cycle and become a predetermined value (for example, “0”), thereby displacing the corresponding distribution members 300 and 310 (non-distribution state → (Distribution state) timing. In a closing process (step S1321) and a closing time setting process (steps S1324 and S1325) to be described later, the distributing members 300 and 310 are displaced (distributed state → non-distributed state) and non-distributed. A value corresponding to the period during which the minute state is maintained is input to the simultaneous distribution counter. Thereafter, when the same distribution counter reaches a predetermined value, it is possible to grasp the timing of the displacement (non-distribution state → distribution state) again.

  After the processing of step S1502 or the processing of step S1506 is performed, in step S1507, the processing of subtracting “1” from the second round counter RC2 is performed, and then the setting processing ends.

  Returning to the description of the opening / closing process (FIG. 24), after executing each opening setting process in step S1305, the opening process is executed in step S1306. Specifically, the drive control of the opening / closing accessory drive 173 is started, and the opening / closing accessory 168 is set to the open state. Then, an open command is set in step S1307, and the open / close process ends. The set release command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 15). This release command includes information on whether the mode is the 16R continuation mode, what round the release is (information of the first round counter RC1), and how many times the release is in one round (second information). Information of the round counter RC2) and information of the opening / closing patterns A1 to A2, B1 to B3, and C1 to C2. In the effect control device 82, based on the received opening command, the effect of notifying the opening / closing pattern, the winning rate to the accessory device 150, the level of the V winning rate when a winning to the accessory device 150 occurs, and the like are performed. The content is determined, and various devices are controlled so that the determined content of the effect is executed.

  If the opening / closing accessory 168 is being opened in step S1301, the process advances to step S1308 to determine whether the value of the timer counter T is “0”. If the value of the timer counter T is not “0”, it is determined in step S1309 whether or not a game ball has won the accessory device 150 based on the detection state of the entrance sensor 179. If no winning has occurred, the main open / close process is terminated. On the other hand, if a winning has occurred, the value of the winning counter PC is decremented by "1" in step S1310, and in step S1311, the detection state of the V winning sensor 192 determines whether or not a V winning has occurred. Determined by

  If a V winning has occurred in step S1311, it is determined in step S1312 whether or not a continuation flag is stored, and it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode of the 16R continuation mode is set. If no V winning has occurred in step S1311, or if the 16R continuation mode has been set in step S1312, the flow advances to step S1313 to determine whether or not the winning counter PC is "0". . If it is not “0” and the maximum number of winnings in one round has not been reached, the main opening / closing process is terminated as it is.

  When the value of the timer counter T is "0" in step S1308, or when the winning counter PC becomes "0" in step S1313, further, in step S1312, a V winning occurs in the continuation rate fluctuation mode. In this case, in steps S1314 to S1328, each process for closing the opening / closing accessory 168 is executed.

  That is, if the winning counter PC is “0” in step S1313 and the maximum winning number has been reached, it is determined in step S1314 whether a continuation flag is stored. This process is the same as the process in step S1312. If the continuation flag is not stored and the continuation rate variation mode is set, a process of clearing the first round counter RC1 to “0” is performed in step S1315. This process is a process for terminating the open / close execution mode when the maximum number of round games has been reached without a V prize occurring in the continuation rate fluctuation mode.

  On the other hand, if the timer counter T is “0” in step S1308, or if the winning counter PC becomes “0” in the 16R continuation mode in step S1314, the process proceeds to step S1316. In step S1316, a process of subtracting “1” from the second round counter RC2 is performed. Then, in a step S1317, it is determined whether or not the second round counter RC2 is “0”. If a V prize has occurred in the continuation rate variation mode in step S1312, a process of clearing the second round counter RC2 to “0” is performed in step S1318. This process is a process for terminating the round game when a V prize occurs during the round game in the continuation rate variation mode.

  When it is determined in step S1317 that the second round counter RC2 is “0”, or after executing the processing in step S1318, it is determined in step S1319 that one round has ended, and the first round counter RC1 is set to “1”. A process of subtracting “1” is executed. Then, in step S1320, a process of storing the round update flag in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114 is executed. The round update flag is a flag for the MPU 112 to know that each process for closing this time is a process corresponding to the end of one round.

  When the process of step S1315 has been performed (when the maximum winning number in one round has been reached without a V winning occurring during the continuation rate fluctuation mode), the second round counter RC2 is not “0” in step S1317. If the processing of step S1320 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1321. In step S1321, a closing process is performed. In this processing, the drive control of the opening and closing accessory drive unit 173 is terminated, and the opening and closing accessory 168 is brought into the closed state.

  Then, in step S1322, it is determined whether the first round counter RC1 is “0” and the current round is the last round of the open / close execution mode. If the first round counter RC1 is not "0", the flow advances to step S1323 to determine whether or not the round update flag is stored. If the round update flag is stored and each of the processes for closing this time is a process corresponding to the end of one round, the process proceeds to step S1324.

  In step S1324, a setting process of a closing time (closing period, standby period) between rounds is performed. In this process, a numerical value corresponding to a predetermined time (for example, 1.0 sec) is input to the timer counter T.

  On the other hand, the round update flag is not stored in step S1323, and each closing process corresponds to each opening (closing) in one round (corresponding to the second round counter RC2). In this case, the process proceeds to step S1325. In step S1325, a setting process of a closing time (closing period, standby period) for each opening is executed. In this processing, by referring to the value of the second round counter RC2 and the above-mentioned opening / closing pattern table, the current closing time (closing period, standby period) is grasped, and the numerical value corresponding to the time is determined by the timer counter. Input to T.

  After executing the processing of step S1324 or step S1325, a closing command is set in step S1326, and the opening / closing processing ends. The set closing command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S401 in the normal processing (FIG. 15). The close command includes information on whether each process for closing this time corresponds to the end of one round or whether it corresponds to each opening and closing during one round. The effect control device 82 determines the content of the effect corresponding to each of the information based on the received closing command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the effect is executed.

  If it is determined in step S1322 that the first round counter RC1 is "0", ending starting processing is executed in step S1327. In the start processing, a standby time for ending in the open / close execution mode is set. More specifically, ending waiting time information stored in the ROM 113 is set in a waiting time counter provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114. In this case, the standby time information is different depending on the type of the opening / closing execution mode (16R continuation mode or continuation rate variation mode), and the ending standby time is longer in the 16R continuation mode than in the continuation rate variation mode. Wait time information is set. In the continuation rate fluctuation mode, the standby time information is set such that the longer the open / close execution mode continues (the number of round games is increased), the longer the ending standby time is. In this way, even if the opening / closing execution mode ends with a small number of round games, it is possible to immediately shift to the next game, and expect the next opening / closing execution mode to occur. The player's feelings can be switched to perform. In other words, by increasing the number of round games in the opening / closing execution mode this time, the longer the ending standby time, the longer the time for the player to immerse in the sense of superiority. The value of the standby time information set here is decremented by "1" each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12) is executed.

  Thereafter, in step S1328, after the ending command is set, the main opening / closing process ends. The set ending command is transmitted to effect control device 82 in step S401 in the normal processing (FIG. 15). This ending command includes information on the standby time for ending set in step S1327, information on the type of opening / closing execution mode, the number of times the round game is continued, and the like. The effect control device 82 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the end of the open / close execution mode based on the received ending command, and controls various devices such that the determined effect of the effect is executed. The content of the effect includes the display mode on the symbol display device 51, and the determined display mode is output from the effect control device 82 to the display control device 100 as a display content command. The display control device 100 controls the display of the symbol display device 51 based on the display content command received from the effect control device 82 so that a display (for example, a moving image display) corresponding to the current opening / closing execution mode is performed.

  Returning to the description of the game state transition processing (FIG. 23), after executing the opening / closing processing in step S1211, it is determined in step S1212 whether or not the value of the first round counter RC1 is “0”. It is determined whether the waiting time for ending has elapsed. When the value of the first round counter RC1 is not “0” or when the waiting time for ending has not elapsed, the present game state transition processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first round counter RC1 is “0” and the waiting time for ending has elapsed, a transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode is executed in step S1214. In this process, a process for returning the game state after the open / close execution mode to the normal game state (normal game state) is performed. For example, the distribution members 300 and 310 and the rotating body 201 in the accessory device 150 are arranged at the initial position.

  In addition, as the normal gaming state, the opening / closing mode of the electric accessory 39a provided in the second operating port 39 changes (for example, the opening / closing mode in which the second operating port 39 is more easily won than in other states). When the opening / closing execution mode ends, the game state or the like in which the type or probability of the game result when the winning is made to the operating ports 38 and 39 changes (for example, the probability of a direct hit result changes). It is good to set it as those game states in the transfer process of.

  After the transition processing at the end of the open / close execution mode in step S1214 ends, in step S1215, the end state of the open / close execution mode is executed, and then the game state transition processing ends. In the end processing of the opening and closing execution mode, the continuation flag and the like used during the opening and closing execution mode are deleted. In step S1215, information indicating that one open / close execution mode has ended is output to the outside by stopping the jackpot signal output in 1209, for example. Thus, the start and end of one open / close execution mode can be grasped by the hall computer of the game hall.

  The relationship between the opening and closing patterns A1 to A2, B1 to B3, and C1 to C2 in the opening and closing execution mode and the operation timings of the distribution members 300 and 310 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. explain. For details of each open / close pattern, refer to FIG. 28 again.

  When the operation pattern of the first distribution member 300 is VA1 (RC2 = 1 to 10), the non-distribution state is changed from the non-distribution state to the distribution state at the same timing as t1 when the opening / closing handpiece 168 is displaced to the open state. Displace. Then, at the timing of t2 (after 0.1 sec), the state is changed from the distribution state to the non-distribution state. In this situation (RC2 = 1 to 10), since the second distribution member 310 is not displaced, no distribution to the V winning side by the second distribution member 310 occurs.

  In the situation of the operation pattern VA1, if the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing accessory 168 is A1, the opening / closing role is displaced to the open state at the timing of t1, and the open state is maintained until the timing of t6 (after 1.8 sec). . In this case, the ratio of the period (0.1 sec) in which the first distribution member 300 is in the distribution state to the period (1.8 sec) in which the opening and closing accessory 168 is in the open state is very small. In the pattern, it is unlikely that the first distribution member 300 will distribute the pattern to the off side.

  On the other hand, in the situation of the operation pattern VA1, if the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing accessory 168 is B1 (C1), the opening / closing accessory 168 is displaced to the open state at the timing of t1, and the open state is shifted to the open state at the timing of t3 earlier than the timing of t6. It is maintained until the timing (after 0.2 sec). In this case, the ratio of the period (0.1 sec) in which the first distribution member 300 is in the distribution state to the period (0.2 sec) in which the opening / closing handpiece 168 is in the open state is determined by the above-mentioned opening / closing pattern A1. It is larger than in the case, and the possibility of being distributed to the off side by the first distribution member 300 is higher than that of the opening / closing pattern A1. However, since the period during which the opening and closing accessory 168 is in the open state is short, the winning probability to the accessory device 150 is lower than the opening and closing pattern A1. In consideration of the probability of winning to the accessory device 150 and the distribution rate of the first distribution member 300 when a prize is won, in the situation of the operation pattern VA1, the opening / closing pattern A1 is larger than the opening / closing pattern B1 (C1). ), The V winning ratio is higher.

  When the operation pattern of the first distribution member 300 is VA2 (RC2 = 11 to 16), the non-distribution state is changed from the non-distribution state to the distribution state at the same timing as t1 when the opening / closing handpiece 168 is displaced to the open state. Displace. Then, at the timing of t4 (after 1.0 sec), the state is changed from the distribution state to the non-distribution state. In this situation (RC2 = 11 to 16), since the second distribution member 310 does not displace, no distribution to the V winning side by the second distribution member 310 occurs.

  In the situation of the operation pattern VA2, if the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing accessory 168 is A1, the first sorting member 300 is in the sorting state for the period (1.8 sec) in which the opening / closing accessory 168 is in the open state. The ratio of the period (1.0 sec) becomes larger than the situation of the operation pattern VA1, and the possibility of being assigned to the off side by the first distribution member 300 becomes higher than that of the operation pattern VA1. .

  On the other hand, if the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing accessory 168 is B2 (RC2 = 11 to 13) in the situation of the operation pattern VA2, the opening / closing accessory 168 is displaced to the open state at the timing of t1, and the open state is shifted from the timing of the above-described t3. Is maintained until the later timing t4 (after 1.0 sec). In this case, the ratio of the period (1.0 sec) in which the first distribution member 300 is in the distribution state to the period (1.0 sec) in which the opening / closing accessory 168 is in the open state is determined by the above-mentioned opening / closing pattern B1. It is larger than in the case, and the possibility of being distributed to the off side by the first distribution member 300 is higher than that of the opening / closing pattern B1. However, since the period during which the opening / closing accessory 168 is in the open state is longer than the opening / closing pattern B1, the winning probability for the accessory device 150 is higher than the opening / closing pattern B1. In consideration of the probability of winning in the accessory device 150 and the distribution rate of the first distribution member 300 when a prize is won, in the situation of the operation pattern VA2, the open / close pattern B2 is more open / closed pattern B1 (C1). ), The V winning ratio is higher.

  If the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing accessory 168 is B1 (C1) (RC2 = 14 to 16) in the situation of the operation pattern VA2, the opening / closing accessory 168 is displaced to the open state at the timing of t1, and the open state is changed to the above-described t3. (After 0.2 sec). In this case, the ratio of the period (1.0 sec) in which the first distribution member 300 is in the distribution state to the period (0.2 sec) in which the opening / closing accessory 168 is in the open state is determined by the opening / closing pattern B1, B2, the possibility of being assigned to the off side by the first sorting member 300 is increased as compared with the opening / closing patterns B1, B2 in the operation pattern VA1. In addition, since the period during which the opening and closing accessory 168 is in the open state is shorter than the opening and closing pattern B2, the winning probability to the accessory device 150 is lower than that of the opening and closing pattern B2. Further, in the case of this operation pattern VA2, the opening / closing timing of the opening / closing accessory 168 and the period during which the open / closed state is maintained are the same as in the case of VA1, but in the case of VA2, the opening / closing accessory 168 changes from the open state. Since there is a period in which the first distribution member 300 is in the distribution state even after switching to the closed state, for example, a game ball that has won the bonus item device 150 just before the opening and closing role 168 is in the closed state. Even if there is, there is a possibility that the first distribution member 300 will subsequently distribute to the off side. Therefore, in the situation of the operation pattern VA2, the V winning probability of B1 is lower than that of the opening / closing pattern B2, and the V winning probability of VA2 is lower than that of VA1 even for the same opening / closing pattern B1.

  When the operation pattern of the first distribution member 300 is VA3 (RC2 = 17 to 19), the first distribution member 300 does not operate, and thus there is no possibility that the first distribution member 300 will be distributed to the off side. . On the other hand, during this period, the operation pattern of the second distribution member 310 is switched from VB1 to VB2, and there is a possibility that the second distribution member 310 is distributed to the V winning side. Specifically, in the operation pattern VB2, at the timing of t4, which is 1.0 sec after the timing of t1 when the opening / closing handpiece 168 is displaced to the open state, the second distribution member 310 changes from the non-distribution state to the distribution state. Is displaced. Then, the distribution state is maintained for 0.1 sec, and the state is changed from the distribution state to the non-distribution state at a timing of t5.

  In the situation of the operation patterns VA3 and VB2, if the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing accessory 168 is A2 (C2), the opening / closing accessory 168 is displaced to the open state at the timing of t1, and the open state is changed to the timing of t4. (After 1.0 sec). In this case, a game ball that has won the accessory device 150 just before the opening / closing accessory 168 enters the closed state may be distributed to the V winning side by the second sorting member 310 thereafter.

  On the other hand, if the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing accessory 168 is B3 in the situation of the operation patterns VA3 and VB2, the opening / closing accessory 168 is displaced to the open state at the timing of t1, and the open state is changed to the timing of the timing t3 ( 0.2 sec). In this case, even if a game ball enters the accessory device 150, an interval between a period in which the opening / closing accessory 168 is in the open state and a period in which the second sorting member 310 is in the sorting state. Is large, the possibility that the second distribution member 310 will be assigned to the V winning side in this pattern is low.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  When the opening / closing accessory 168 provided in the accessory device 150 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, a game ball can win the accessory device 150, and a V prize sensor in the accessory device 150. In the configuration in which the round of the opening / closing execution mode is continued by being detected by 192, the opening / closing timing of the opening / closing accessory 168 is made different in each round. Accordingly, the continuation rate (V winning rate) of each round can be changed without changing the operation timing of each of the bonus items (the distribution members 300 and 310, the rotating body 201, and the like) provided in the bonus item device 150. It is possible to do. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest while ensuring the fairness of the game.

  In each round game in the opening / closing execution mode of the continuation rate variation mode, rounds (opening / closing patterns B and C) in which the V winning probability is lower than other rounds (opening / closing patterns A) are provided. Thereby, it is possible to make the user particularly interested in whether or not to continue to the next round in this round, and the degree of attention can be appropriately increased.

  The next round of the round of the opening and closing pattern having a low V winning probability is a round of the opening and closing pattern having a higher V winning probability. This makes it easy to continue after the round in which the V winning probability is low, so that the degree of attention to the round in which the V winning probability is low can be further increased.

  In the opening / closing pattern of each round, the V winning probability is made different depending on the number of times the opening / closing role 168 is opened and closed. As a result, in one round game, it is possible to perform a game such as the number of open / close times at which the V prize is won and whether the V prize is easy to win, and the interest can be improved.

<Second embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the opening / closing timing of the opening / closing accessory 168 in the normal gaming state is made different so that the V winning rate in the accessory device 150 is made different. Hereinafter, differences from the first embodiment will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the determination as to whether or not a winning has been made in the first operating port 38 is different from the determination as to whether or not the winning has been achieved in the second operating port 39. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 30, in the present embodiment, the result table storage area 113a of the ROM 113 stores the result table for the first working port (FIG. 30A) and the result table for the second working port. A result table (FIG. 30B) is stored. The result table for the first working port is the same as the result table in the first embodiment, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In the result table for the second operating port, a special opening A result and a special opening B result are set as the game result in addition to the off result, the direct hit result, and the normal opening result. The special release A result and the special release B result are the same as the normal release result (two times), and the first release timing is the same as the normal release result (by the release type counter CS). The length of the period for maintaining the first open state, the length of the period for maintaining the closed state, and the length of the period for maintaining the second open state are set to be different.

  Specifically, in the case of the normal opening result, the period in which the open state is continued is uniformly 2.0 sec, and the standby period in which the closed state is maintained between the first open and the second open Is also uniformly 1.0 sec. On the other hand, when the result is the special release A result, the period in which the first open state is maintained is the period TC1 (0.1 sec), and the period in which the second open state is maintained is the period TC3 ( 0.7 sec), and the standby period between the first and second open states is a period TC2 (1.2 sec). If the result is the special release B result, the period during which the first open state is maintained is the period TD1 (0.1 sec), and the period during which the second open state is maintained is the period TD3 (0.3 sec) ), And the standby period between the first and second open states is a period TD2 (1.5 sec).

  The period during which the first open state is maintained and the period during which the second open state is maintained are set in step S902 in the process during control (FIG. 20). Specifically, in step S902, a process is executed in which a game result that has triggered the current opening is referred to, and based on the result, a value corresponding to the current opening period is input to the opening period counter. The standby period between the first and second open states is set in step S909 in the above-described process during control (FIG. 20). Specifically, in step S909, a process is executed in which a game result that has triggered the opening of the game this time is referred to, and a value corresponding to the current waiting period is input to the waiting period counter based on the result.

  In the present embodiment, the relationship between the opening / closing timing of the opening / closing accessory 168 during the normal gaming state and the operation timing of each of the distribution members 300 and 310 will be described with reference to a timing chart of FIG. FIG. 31A shows the relationship between the opening / closing timing of the opening / closing accessory 168 and the operation timing of each of the distribution members 300 and 310 in the case of the normal opening result, and FIG. Also, the relationship between the opening / closing timing of the opening / closing accessory 168 and the operation timing of each of the distribution members 300 and 310 in the case of the special opening B result is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 31 (a), when a prize occurs in the operating ports 38 and 39 at the timing of t1, after a period corresponding to the value of the opening type counter CS (step S802), the opening / closing accessory at the timing of t2. 168 is displaced to the open state. The open state is maintained for 2.0 seconds, and is changed to the closed state at the timing of t9. If the prize generated at the timing of t1 is a prize to the second operating port 39, and if the result of the normal opening is twice, the opening / closing handpiece 168 is opened at the timing of t10 which is a timing 1.0 sec after the timing of t9. Displaced to open state. This open state is also maintained for 2.0 seconds, and is shifted to the closed state at the timing of t14.

  The operation of each of the distribution members 300 and 310 will be described. As described above, the setting of the operation timing of each of the distribution members 300 and 310 and the drive control are performed by the first distribution setting in step S803 in the control start process (FIG. 19). The processing is performed in the second distribution setting processing in step S804, the first distribution control processing in step S1002 in the distribution processing (FIG. 21), and the second distribution control processing in step S1004.

  The first distributing member 300 is displaced from the non-distributed state to the distributed state at a timing t2 when the opening / closing accessory 168 is opened (after the first period elapses after the opening state), and 1.5 sec. This distribution state is maintained over the (second period). Then, at the timing of t5, the state is changed from the distribution state to the non-distribution state. If the opening this time is the result of opening twice, the non-distribution state is maintained for 1.0 sec (fifth period) from the timing of t5, and the opening timing of the opening / closing accessory 168 at t10 At the timing (after the elapse of the first period from the opening state), the state is changed to the distribution state again. This distribution state is also maintained for 1.5 seconds (second period), and changes to the non-distribution state at the timing of t11.

  The second distribution member 310 is displaced from the non-distribution state to the distribution state at a timing t7 after a lapse of 1.8 sec (third period) from the timing t2 when the opening / closing accessory 168 enters the open state. . This distribution state is maintained for 0.1 sec (fourth period), and changes to the non-distribution state at the timing of t8. If the opening this time is the result of opening twice, 0.6 seconds (sixth period) from the timing of t8 to the timing of t10, and after the opening / closing handpiece 168 is opened at the timing of t10. The non-distribution state is maintained for 1.8 sec (the third period). Then, at the timing of t12, the state is changed from the non-distributed state to the distributed state, the state is maintained for 0.1 sec (the fourth period), and the state is changed to the non-allocated state at the timing of t13.

  As shown in FIG. 31 (b), when the game result is the special opening A result or the special opening B result, when the winning in the operating ports 38 and 39 occurs at the timing of t1, the value of the opening type counter CS (Step S802), the opening / closing role object 168 is displaced to the open state at the timing of t2. This operation is the same as in the case of the normal release result.

  When the game result is the special opening A result, the open state is maintained for 0.1 sec (period TC1) from the timing of t2, and the game is shifted to the closed state at the timing of t3. Then, at the timing of t4, which is 1.2 sec (period TC2) after the timing of t3, the state is changed from the closed state to the open state. This open state is maintained for 0.7 sec (period TC3), and from the open state to the closed state at the timing of t9, the second opening is completed.

  If the game result is the special open B result, the open state is maintained for 0.1 sec (period TD1) from the timing of t2, and the game is shifted to the closed state at the timing of t3. Then, at the timing of t6, which is 1.5 seconds (period TD2) after the timing of t3, the closed state is changed to the opened state. This open state is maintained for 0.3 sec (period TD3), and is changed from the open state to the closed state at the timing of t8, and the second opening is completed.

  Here, even when the game result is the special opening A result or the special opening B result, the operation timings of the distribution members 300 and 310 are the same. Therefore, the ratio of the period in which each of the distribution members 300 and 310 is in the distribution state / non-distribution state to one open period of the opening / closing handpiece 168 depends on the normal open result, the special open A result, and the special open B result. Is different.

  Specifically, in the normal release result, in one open state (for example, from t2 to t9 and from t10 to t14), the ratio of the first distribution member 300 in the distribution state is 15/20, and the second distribution state is 15/20. The ratio of the distribution member 310 in the distribution state is 1/20.

  On the other hand, in the case of the special release A result, in the second release state (from t4 to t9), the ratio of the first distribution member 300 being in the distribution state is 2/7, and Lower than you would. In addition, the ratio of the second distribution member 310 in the distribution state is 1/7, which is higher than the case of the normal opening result.

  In the case of the special opening B result, in the second opening state (from t6 to t8), the ratio of the first sorting member 300 in the sorting state is 0/3, which is lower than the case of the above normal opening result. The ratio of the second distribution member 310 in the distribution state is 1/3, which is higher than that in the case of the normal opening result.

  As described above, when the first distribution member 300 is in the distribution state, distribution to the off side can occur, and when the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state, distribution to the V winning side can be performed. Can occur. Therefore, as described above, if the probability of being distributed by the first distribution member 300 is lower than the result of the normal release, such as the result of the special release A and the result of the special release B, the probability of occurrence of the V winning is increased. Also, if the probability of being sorted by the second sorting member 310 is higher than the result of the normal opening, the probability of occurrence of the V winning is higher.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the operation pattern of each of the distribution members 300 and 310 and the rotating body 201 in the bonus item device 150 is changed by making the opening / closing mode of the opening / closing accessory 168 different during the normal game state. Without doing this, it is possible to change the probability that a V prize will occur when a prize is won in the accessory device 150.

  In addition, by setting the number of times (two times) of the normal opening result based on winning in the second operating port 39 and the number of times (two times) of the special opening A result and the special opening B result to be the same, Since there is no need to increase the number of times of opening and closing, the storage capacity can be reduced.

  The opening timing of the opening / closing accessory 168 based on the winning in the second operating port 39 is the same timing as the other normal opening result (opening type counter) even if the special opening A result or the special opening B result. Timing based on the value of CS). This makes it possible to suppress the act of firing a game ball in synchronization with the opening timing of the opening / closing role object 168, that is, performing a so-called stopping action.

  The special opening A result or the special opening B result may be notified by the symbol display device 51 or the like at a timing before the opening timing of the opening / closing accessory 168. By doing so, for example, the V winning can be easily performed based on the relationship between the rotation position of the rotating body 201 and the period required to reach the deriving unit 186 and the operation timing of the distribution members 300 and 310. Compared to the configuration of notifying the difficulty of sayading after the prize to the accessory device 150 is generated, the ease of victory of the V is determined before the prize to the accessory device 150. It is possible to do with. By doing so, it is possible to further draw interest in the operation (flowing down mode) of the game ball.

  In the present embodiment, the level of the V winning rate has been described in relation to the result of the normal opening and the result of each special opening. However, the concept of the present invention can be applied to the following modifications. Therefore, in the modification shown in FIG. 32, the level of the V winning rate will be described in relation to each special opening result and the distribution members 300 and 310 (particularly, the second distribution member 310).

  In this modification, a special opening A result, a special opening B result, and a special opening C result are set as the special opening results. Each of the special opening A to C results is a result of performing two opening operations similarly to the special opening A result and the special opening B result in the above embodiment. As the special opening A to C results, the results may be distributed with a predetermined probability based on the winning in the first operating port 38, or may be distributed with a predetermined probability based on the winning in the second operating port 39. Those that can be sorted may be used.

  In the special opening A result in the modified example shown in FIG. 32A, the value of the opening type counter CS is determined based on the winning (distribution) to one of the operating ports 38 and 39 generated at the timing of ta1. The first opening operation is performed at the timing of ta2 after a time corresponding to (the opening / closing handpiece 168 is displaced to the open state).

  In the present modification, the second distribution member 310 as the distribution member for changing the V winning ratio is distributed 1.4 seconds (a timing of ta7) which is a predetermined period from the timing of the time t2. It is assumed that the state is changed to the state and the state is maintained for 0.4 sec (displaced to the non-distributed state at the timing of ta9).

  In the first opening operation as a result of the special opening A, the opening state is maintained for 0.2 sec (period TE1) from the timing of ta2, and the first opening operation ends at the timing of ta3 (opening / closing role 168). Is displaced to the closed state). Then, at the timing of ta7, which is 1.2 sec (period TE2) after the timing of ta3, the second opening operation is started (the opening / closing handpiece 168 is displaced to the open state). Thereafter, at the timing of ta9, which is 0.4 sec (period TE3) after the timing of ta7, the second opening operation ends (the opening / closing role object 168 is displaced to the closed state).

  In the first opening operation of the special opening B result in this modification, the opening state is maintained for 0.2 sec (period TF1) from the timing of ta2, and the first opening operation is performed at the timing of ta3, similarly to the special opening A result. The second opening operation ends. Then, the second opening operation is started at the timing of ta6, which is 0.8 sec (period TF2) different (short) from the period TE2 from the timing of ta3. Thereafter, the second opening operation ends at the timing of ta8, which is 0.5 sec (period TF3) after the timing of ta6.

  In the first opening operation of the special opening C result in the present modified example, the opening state is maintained for 0.2 sec (period TG1) from the timing of ta2, similarly to the special opening A result and the special opening B result, and ta3 The first opening operation ends at the timing shown in FIG. Then, the second opening operation is started at a timing of ta4, which is 0.5 sec (period TG2) different (short) from the period TE2 and the period TF2 from the timing of ta3. After that, at the timing of ta5, which is 0.2 sec (period TG3) after the timing of ta4, the second opening operation ends.

  In these cases, the special opening A result overlaps the situation where the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state from the timing of ta7 to the timing of ta9 when the release state is maintained in the second release operation. In this situation, if a prize occurs in the accessory device 150, the prize is distributed to the V prize side by the second distribution member 310 substantially.

  In the special opening B result, in the second opening operation, the period during which the open state is maintained is longer than the special opening A result (period TE3 <period TF3), while the opening / closing accessory 168 is in the open state. And the period in which the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state is a period from the timing of ta7 to the timing of ta8. The situation in which the duplication occurs is greater than in the case of the special opening A result. Be shorter. As a result, even if a prize occurs in the accessory device 150, the prize is not distributed to the V prize side almost as in the special opening A result, but is distributed to the V prize side by the second distribution member 310 according to the prize timing. It depends on whether you can do it. More specifically, if a prize occurs in the accessory device 150 during the final stage of the second opening operation, the prize is allocated to the V prize side, and otherwise, the prize is not allocated to the V prize side.

  In the special opening C result, in the second opening operation, the period in which the opening / closing accessory 168 is in the open state and the period in which the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state do not overlap. As a result, even if a prize to the accessory device 150 occurs in the second opening operation, the distribution to the V prize side by the second distribution member 310 does not occur.

  As described above, by setting the opening operation timing of each of the special opening A to C results, it is possible to vary the probability of occurrence of the V winning.

  In the modification shown in FIG. 32 (b), the second distribution member 310 has the same total period in which the open states of the special opening A to C results are maintained in the modification shown in FIG. 32 (a). The opening / closing timing is set so that the probability of being assigned to the V winning side differs depending on the.

  That is, similarly to the case of FIG. 32A, the second distribution member 310 is at a timing of tb8, which is a timing 1.4 seconds after the timing of tb2, which is the first opening timing, and a predetermined time after 1.4 sec. Displaced into the distribution state. Then, at the timing of tb10, which is 0.4 seconds later, the state is changed to the non-distributed state.

  In the first opening operation as a result of the special opening A in this modification, the opening state is maintained for 0.2 sec (period TH1) from the timing of tb2, and the first opening operation ends at the timing of tb3. Then, the second opening operation is started at the timing of tb8, which is 1.2 sec (period TH2) after the timing of tb3. Thereafter, the second opening operation ends at a timing of ta9, which is 0.4 sec (period TH3) after the timing of tb8.

  In the first opening operation of the special opening B result in the present modified example, the opening state is maintained for 0.2 sec (period TI1) from the timing of tb2, and the first opening operation is performed at the timing of tb3, similarly to the special opening A result. The second opening operation ends. Then, a second opening operation is started at a timing of tb7, which is 0.9 seconds (period TI2) different from (short) the period TH2 from the timing of tb3. Thereafter, the second opening operation ends at the timing of tb9, which is 0.4 sec (period TI3) after the timing of tb7.

  The first opening operation of the special opening C result in this modification is different from the special opening A result and the special opening B result, and is different from the above-described period TH1 and the period TI1 from the timing of tb2 (long) 0.4 sec (the period TJ1). ), The open state is maintained, and the first open operation ends at the timing of tb4. Then, the second opening operation is started at a timing of tb5, which is 0.3 seconds (period TJ2) different (short) from the period TH2 and the period TI2 from the timing of tb4. After that, at the timing of tb6, which is 0.2 sec (period TJ3) after the timing of tb5, the second opening operation ends.

  In these cases, the total period during which the opening / closing accessory 168 is in the open state in the special opening A result is TH1 + TH3 (0.6 sec), and in the special opening B result, it is TI1 + TI3 (0.6 sec). In the case of the open C result, TJ1 + TJ3 (0.6 sec), and the total period of the open state is the same in any of the special open A to C results.

  As described above, even when the opening / closing timing of each of the special opening A to C results is set so that the total period of the opening state is the same, the opening / closing role object 168 becomes the opening state. The overlapping period and the period in which the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state are in the order of the special opening A result> the special opening B result> the special opening C result. As a result, in each opening result, the V winning rate can be changed in relation to the operation timing of the second distribution member 310 without changing the winning rate itself to the accessory device 150.

<Third embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the setting method of the opening / closing pattern of each round in the opening / closing execution mode is different from the first and second embodiments. Therefore, the setting process of each round in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As described above, the setting process of each round is a process executed in step S1304 of the opening / closing process (FIG. 24) in the game state transition process (FIG. 23), and is started when the opening / closing accessory 168 is opened. This is the process to be performed.

  As shown in FIG. 33A, the setting process of each round in the present embodiment is substantially the same as the process described with reference to FIG. 25 in the description of the first embodiment. The difference is that, when it is determined in step S1402 that the continuation flag is not stored, in each of the above-described embodiments, a process for setting a predetermined round pattern is executed in steps S1403 and S1404. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when a negative determination is made in step S1402, a lottery process for determining a round pattern by lottery is executed in step S1408. In this lottery process, the lottery counter for the round pattern is obtained from the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114, and the lottery table for the round pattern is obtained from the various table storage areas 113d of the ROM 113. The lottery counter for the round pattern is configured as, for example, a loop counter updated at a predetermined cycle, and can acquire random numerical information.

  The lottery table for the round pattern can determine the current round pattern according to the value of the lottery counter for the round pattern. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 33B, for example, the lottery table is set such that the current round pattern differs depending on the previous round pattern. That is, depending on the previous round pattern, the selectivity of the pattern A in which the round can be continued most easily as the current round pattern is different. If the previous round pattern is the pattern A, the pattern A is selected at 50%, In other cases, pattern B or pattern C, in which it is difficult to continue the round, is selected. On the other hand, if the previous round pattern is pattern B or pattern C, in which the round is difficult to continue, pattern A is almost selected (in pattern B, 80% and 90% for pattern C). In the first round of the opening / closing execution mode, a configuration in which a predetermined pattern is set or a configuration in which the pattern is set randomly by lottery or the like may be used.

  After performing the processing of step S1408, the corresponding round pattern is set in step S1405, and then the processing of step S1406 and thereafter is executed.

  By adopting a configuration in which the round pattern is determined by lottery or the like for each round as described above, the opening pattern of each round becomes more diverse in the open / close execution mode, and diversification of the game can be achieved. In the above embodiment, in the next round of the pattern (patterns B and C) in which it is difficult to continue the round, the round in the pattern (pattern A) in which the round is easy to continue is set so as to be easily selected. Even if it is a disadvantageous round for the player, if the round is overcome, the next advantageous round for the player will be, so that even the disadvantageous round can be immersed in the game. Conversely, the next round of the pattern that makes it easy to continue the round is set so that it is easy to select a round that is difficult to continue the round, so it is possible to make the game fair without significantly increasing the ball hitting rate Become.

<Fourth embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the round pattern after the next round is set according to the timing at which the V prize is generated as the condition for the continuation of the round.

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the opening / closing processing in this embodiment, and is basically the same as the opening / closing processing (FIG. 24) in each of the above embodiments. The difference is that when a V prize is generated in step S1311 and it is determined in step S1312 that the continuous fluctuation mode is set, the process proceeds to step S1318 in each of the above-described embodiments, whereas in the present embodiment, the process proceeds to step S1318. In S1329, a process of grasping the timing at which the V winning has occurred, that is, the number of times of opening during the round, is executed. More specifically, a process of storing the value of the second round counter RC2 in the second round counter RC2 storage area provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 is executed. The second round counter RC2 storage area can store the value of the second round counter RC2 independently of the update of the second round counter RC2 even if the update of the second round counter RC2 is performed at each opening and closing during the round. Is configured.

  After the value of the second round counter RC2 is stored in step S1329, the second round counter RC2 is cleared to "0" in step S1318, and the processing of step S1319 and thereafter is executed.

  The setting process for each round in the present embodiment is configured to execute the lottery process of the round pattern for each round as shown in FIG. 33A in the third embodiment. As shown in FIGS. 35A to 35C, the lottery table (distribution table) of the round pattern in the present embodiment includes the previous round pattern, the above-mentioned second round counter RC2, Is set so that the next round pattern is different depending on the value of. More specifically, if the previous round is a round of pattern A in which the last round is likely to continue, as shown in FIG. 35 (a), in the next round, the second round counter RC2 becomes larger than 1-16. In the case of 17 to 19, the pattern A in which the round can be easily continued is more easily selected.

  That is, in the last round, the opening and closing of the first half (RC2 = 1 to 10) and the second half (RC2 = 11 to 16) are performed when the condition of the continuation of the round is satisfied by the number of times of opening and closing in the last stage (RC2 = 17 to 19). This configuration is more advantageous to the player in the next round than when the condition for round continuation is satisfied by the number of times.

  In this way, even in a situation where the condition of the round continuation is not easily satisfied and the player may be uneasy, if the round is continued at the end of the game, it is advantageous to continue the round, and the sense of anxiety and the next It can be a game that enjoys the balance with the round advantage.

  In particular, in the final stage of the pattern A (RC2 = 17 to 19), the configuration is such that the V distribution by the second distribution member 310 is likely to occur. However, at the end of the round, the condition for the round continuation is likely to be satisfied, and occurrence of such an event that the open / close execution mode ends without satisfying the condition for the round continuation is suppressed. For this reason, as described above, in a game for entertaining balance, it is considered that the player will be more interested in the timing of the V winning, so that the V winning occurs at the end of the round as much as possible. Therefore, it is possible to further increase the degree of attention to the game.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 35A, comparing the first half (RC2 = 1 to 10) and the second half (11 to 16) at the time of pattern A, the first half continues the round in the next round more than the second half. The easy pattern A is set to be easily selected, and the first half is set so that the next round is more advantageous than the second half.

  In each of the above embodiments including this embodiment, in the opening and closing execution mode of the continuous fluctuation mode, when the condition of the round continuation is satisfied, even if the winning upper limit number of one round (nine) is not reached, the following is performed. Since the game shifts to the round, the player is considered to be interested in winning the V-prize with the number of prizes as close to the upper limit as possible. Then, for example, if the player wins the V at a stage where the number of winnings is small, the player may feel that the player has lost in the round in relation to the upper limit of winnings. Therefore, as described above, the V-prize winning in the first half of the round where the number of winnings is relatively small is higher than the V-winning in the latter half of the round where the number of winnings is higher than that. If the round is made to be advantageous to the player, even if the player feels that the player has lost the round as described above, the player can secure the round. It can be eliminated.

  In the lottery (distribution) table at the time of the pattern B shown in FIG. 35B and the lottery (distribution) table at the time of the pattern C shown in FIG. When the V prize occurs, the pattern A in which the round can easily be continued in the next round is easily selected. More specifically, as described above, in the pattern B, the opening / closing pattern is set so that a V prize can occur in the latter half of the round (RC2 = 11 to 16). The next round tends to be a pattern A round which is advantageous to the player. Further, in the pattern C, an opening / closing pattern is set so that a V prize can be generated at the end of the round (RC2 = 17 to 19). Round A is easy. On the other hand, in pattern B, in the first half of the round (RC2 = 1 to 10) and the end of the round (RC2 = 17 to 19), winning in the accessory device 150 hardly occurs in the first place. Similarly, in the first half (RC2 = 1 to 10) and the second half (RC2 = 11 to 16) of the round in the pattern C, the prize to the accessory device 150 is unlikely to be generated in the first place. Therefore, by adopting the above-described configuration, points to which the player pays attention can be collected, and the inflection of the game can be obtained.

  Note that the lottery table for each pattern is merely an example, and may have another configuration. For example, if a V prize is generated at a timing at which a prize is unlikely to occur in the pattern B or the pattern C, it is set to be advantageous for the player (so that the pattern A is easily selected). Even in a situation where it is difficult for the game ball to occur, it is possible to bring about the significance of trying to generate a prize to the accessory device 150, and it is possible to suppress a so-called hitting action of stopping the launch of the game ball. .

<Fifth embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the variation of the open pattern in the fourth embodiment is different. That is, as shown in FIG. 36, as the open patterns in the present embodiment, patterns D and E are set in addition to or instead of patterns A to C.

  In the pattern D, in the first half (RC2 = 1 to 10) or the second half (RC2 = 11 to 16) of the round, a prize to the accessory device 150 can occur, and there is a sufficient possibility of a V prize. However, the winning rate and the V winning rate for the accessory device 150 are set lower than those of the pattern A.

  At the end of the round in pattern D (RC2 = 17 to 19), the open period maintenance period is set to be longer than in pattern A, and the prize winning rate to the accessory device 150 and the V prize winning rate are set to the pattern A The pattern D is set higher than the pattern D. For this reason, at the end of the round, the condition of the round continuation is more easily established in the pattern D than in the pattern A. As described above, the ease of the condition being established in the first half and the latter half of the round is suppressed, but the round continuation is finally completed. Can be satisfied. Therefore, in the pattern D, the condition of the round continuation is likely to be satisfied around the winning upper limit number, and the pattern is more advantageous for the player than the pattern A in the open / close execution mode of the continuous fluctuation mode.

  In the pattern E, in the first half of the round (RC2 = 1 to 10), the period during which the open state is maintained is set longer than in the pattern A. Therefore, the winning rate and the V winning rate to the accessory device 150 are higher than those of the pattern A, and the condition of the round continuation is easily satisfied in this period. On the other hand, in the latter half of the round (RC2 = 10 to 16), the opening and closing timing is set so that winning in the accessory device 150 is unlikely to occur, and the same opening and closing timing as the pattern B1 in the pattern B and the pattern C1 in the pattern C It has become.

  At the end of the round in pattern E (RC2 = 17 to 19), the open period maintenance period is set to be longer than the firing cycle of the game balls, and the possibility of winning to the accessory device 150 is sufficiently high. Further, the opening / closing timing is such that the V distribution by the second distribution member 310 can occur if the gaming ball wins the accessory device 150 during the maintenance period of the open state.

  As shown in FIGS. 37 (a) to 37 (e), the lottery table (distribution table) of the round pattern in the present embodiment is based on the value of the previous round pattern and the value of the second round counter RC2. The next round pattern is set to be different.

  The difference from the fourth embodiment is that, in the lottery (sorting) table of each of the patterns A to C, an example in which the pattern D and the pattern E are sorted is added. The point is that a lottery (distribution) table is set. Here, the features of the lottery tables of pattern D and pattern E will be described in detail.

  In the lottery table of the pattern D, if the round continuation condition is satisfied in the first half and the second half (RC = 1 to 16) of the round, the patterns A, D, and E, which facilitate the continuation of the round, are hard to be selected, and the pattern in which the round is difficult to continue is difficult. B and C are easily selected. On the other hand, when the round continuation condition is satisfied at the end of the round (RC = 17 to 19), the pattern A in which the round can be easily continued is easily selected. As described above, in the first half and the second half of the round, a prize may occur in the accessory device 150, but the continuation condition is set to be less likely to be established than in the pattern A. Is generated, but the continuation condition is hard to be satisfied (V winning is hard to occur). Then, at the end of the round in the pattern D, the winning rate to the accessory device 150 and the V winning rate are increased, so that the continuation condition is easily satisfied. Therefore, in the pattern D, in the first half and the second half of the round, the player wins the game up to the limit of the winning number of the round, and at the end of the round, the player wins the game or the player wins the V, so that the timing of establishment of the continuation condition is determined. Can control to some extent. Therefore, the active participation of the player in the game can be expected.

  In the lottery table of the pattern E, if a V prize occurs in the first half of the round (RC2 = 1 to 10) in which a prize to the character device 150 is likely to occur, patterns B and C in which it is difficult to continue the round are likely to be selected, and the round continuation is easy. This makes it difficult to select patterns A, D, and E that are easy to remove. On the other hand, if a V prize occurs at the end of the round (RC2 = 17 to 19) in which a prize to the similar accessory device 150 is likely to occur, the pattern A in which the round can be easily continued is easily selected. Therefore, even if the number of times of opening and closing is likely to generate a prize to the accessory device 150, a game player can select whether to make a prize in the first half or a prize in the last half in relation to the continuation rate of the next round. And can be expected to actively participate in the game.

  Further, in the lottery table of the pattern E, when the V prize occurs in the latter half of the round (RC2 = 11 to 16) in which the prize to the character device 150 is unlikely to occur, the pattern A or the pattern E in which the round can be easily continued is easily selected. ing. Due to the relationship between this point and the selection rate when the V prize occurs at the end of the above, there may be a case where it may be advantageous for the player to aim for the prize to the special equipment device 150 from the latter half depending on the number of rounds. Therefore, even in a situation where it is difficult for a prize to occur to the accessory device 150, it is possible to cause the significance of firing the game ball, and it is possible to suppress a so-called hitting action.

<Sixth embodiment>
In the present embodiment, in the fourth and fifth embodiments, a special notification is executed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 at a predetermined timing in the open / close execution mode. First, the effect processing performed by the MPU 142 of the effect control device 82 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The effect process is a process that is started at a predetermined cycle (for example, a 2 msec cycle).

  In the effect processing, processing for executing various effects is performed based on a command from the main control device 81. Incidentally, the RAM 144 of the effect control device 82 is provided with a received command storage area in which a command received from the main control device 81 can be stored. The area is configured as a ring buffer that can store a plurality of commands individually and can read from the previously stored command.

  In the effect processing, first, it is determined whether or not an opening command has been received in step SB101. As described above, the opening command is a command output from the main control device 81 at each opening in each round in the opening / closing process in the opening / closing execution mode. If it is determined in step SB101 that the release command has been received, a release corresponding process is executed in step SB102. As will be described in detail later, this process is a process for executing special notification at a predetermined timing in the open / close execution mode.

  If a negative determination is made in step SB101, or after the process of step SB102 is performed, the process proceeds to step SB103. In step SB103, it is determined whether a normal release command has been received. As described above, in the normal opening command, a winning in the operating ports 38 and 39 occurs during the normal gaming state, and the opening operation of the opening / closing role object 168 occurs as a result of a lottery based thereon based on a direct hit result or a disconnection result. This command is output from the main controller 81 except when not performed (when the result is a normal release result or a special release result). If it is determined in step SB103 that the normal release command has been received, a normal release corresponding process is executed in step SB104. Incidentally, the normal opening command includes information such as the content of the lottery result set by the main controller 81, the number of times of opening, and the opening / closing timing of the opening / closing accessory 168. In the normal opening correspondence processing, based on the information of the received command, the number of times of opening to notify the number of times of opening at the time of winning a prize to the operating ports 38 and 39, and the opening notification as an effect at the time of opening the opening / closing accessory 168, and the like. Execute the process for performing the effect.

  If a negative determination is made in step SB103, or after the process of step SB104 is performed, the process proceeds to step SB105. In step SB105, as other processing, other commands received from the main control device 81 (a shift command including information on a prize in the normal game state or a shift of the hold information, an out-of-command indicating a game result, or a direct hit command) In addition, the content of the command based on the control end command, the winning inside command, the opening command, the closing command, the ending command, and the like relating to the control of the open / close execution mode, which are output when controlling the accessory device 150). Then, a display content command is output to the display control device 100 so as to execute an effect according to, and processing for controlling the display of the symbol display device 51 is executed. In step SB105, for example, if the operation means for the effect (effect button or the like) is connected to the effect control device 82, the effect (effect for operating the effect button) for responding to the operation is executed. . Also, in step SB105, control for performing an effect for the demonstration screen is performed, and other control for various effects are executed. Then, after executing the processing of step SB105, the present effect processing is ended.

  Next, the content of the special notification in the open / close execution mode in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39A is an explanatory diagram for describing an opening pattern in the opening / closing execution mode added or changed in the present embodiment, and FIG. 39B is a flowchart illustrating opening corresponding processing. (C) is a schematic diagram showing an outline of various special effects performed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 as special notification.

  First, as shown in FIG. 39A, in the present embodiment, patterns C and F having different opening / closing timings according to the value of the number of times of opening (RC2) are set as the opening patterns of the opening / closing execution mode. . As already described, in the pattern C, the opening / closing accessory 168 at the opening / closing timing at which it is difficult to win the bonus item device 150 in both the first half (RC2 = 1 to 10) and the second half (RC2 = 11 to 16) of the round. Works. Then, at the end of the round (RC2 = 17 to 19), the opening / closing handpiece 168 operates at a timing at which V distribution by the second distribution member 310 can occur.

  In the pattern F, in the first half of the round (RC2 = 1 to 10), as in the case of the pattern C, the opening / closing accessory 168 operates at the opening / closing timing at which it is difficult to win a prize to the accessory device 150. The operation timing is the same as that of the pattern C. Therefore, in the first half of the round, it is difficult or impossible for the player to identify whether the round pattern of the pattern C or the round pattern of the pattern F is selected.

  In pattern F, in the latter half of the round (RC2 = 11 to 16), unlike the above-mentioned pattern C, the opening / closing handpiece 168 operates at the opening / closing timing at which a prize to the bonus object device 150 is likely to occur. That is, in the latter half of the round, unlike the pattern C, a prize is won in the accessory device 150, and a V prize may also be generated as a condition for continuing the round.

  In pattern F, at the end of the round (RC2 = 17 to 19), although the V distribution can occur in the same manner as in pattern C, the period during which the opening and closing role 168 is maintained in the open state is the same as the pattern C. It is longer than in the case of C, and the winning rate and the V winning rate to the accessory device 150 are also higher than those of the pattern C.

  As described above, when the pattern C and the pattern F are compared, the opening and closing pattern of the opening and closing accessory 168 is the same as the opening and closing pattern in the first half of the round, and as a result, as a player, It is difficult to identify which pattern C or F is the round. On the other hand, in the latter half and the end of the round, the pattern F is overwhelmingly more advantageous to the player than the pattern C.

  Therefore, such a change in the situation is notified on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51. As a process for this, as shown in FIG. 39B, an opening corresponding process corresponding to an opening command output from the main controller 81 during the opening / closing execution mode is executed. Incidentally, the opening command output from the main controller 81 includes information on the type of the open / close execution mode (16R continuous mode or continuous fluctuation mode), and the open command output at each release includes the current open command. Information on whether the release is a release command at the start of the round or a release command corresponding to each release count during the round, numerical information of the first round counter RC1, numerical information of the second round counter RC2, and the like are included. This information can also be grasped on the effect control device 82 side.

  In the opening correspondence process, first, in step SB201, a process of determining whether or not the current opening pattern is the pattern C or the pattern F is executed. If it is not the pattern C or the pattern F, the corresponding processing is terminated as it is. If the pattern is pattern C or pattern F, it is determined in step SB202 whether or not the second round counter RC2 is “11”. As described above, when the second round counter RC2 is 1 to 10, the opening / closing member operates in the same opening / closing pattern as the pattern C and the pattern F, and after the second round counter RC2 becomes “11”, the pattern becomes The difference between the open / close pattern of C and the pattern F occurs. Therefore, if the second round counter RC2 is not “11” in step SB202, the processing is terminated as it is, and if it is “11”, the process proceeds to step SB203.

  In step SB203, it is determined whether or not the pattern is pattern C. If it is not the pattern C but the pattern F, the process proceeds to step SB204, where the display control device 100 is controlled to execute the special effect A on the symbol display device 51, and then the corresponding processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step SB203 that the pattern is pattern C, the process proceeds to step SB205, where the display control device 100 is controlled to execute the special effect B on the symbol display device 51, and then the corresponding process is performed. finish.

  As shown in FIG. 39 (c), in the special effect A, for example, on the display screen G, "Lucky !!" Continued chance! " In the special effect B, for example, on the display screen G, "..." is displayed so as to notify that the player is disadvantageous to the player after the timing (after the second half of the round) as compared with the case where the special effect A is performed. ... (sorry) "is displayed. In the case of the present embodiment, even in the case of the pattern C, there is a possibility that V distribution by the second distribution member 310 may be performed at the end of the round (RC2 = 17 to 19), so that the player may In order to notify that an advantageous situation exists, in the special effect B, "... Don't give up to the end!" Is displayed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing accessory 168 is the same up to the middle of the round, and the opening / closing pattern (pattern F) that is advantageous to the player from a predetermined timing is different from the opening / closing pattern (pattern F). And the opening / closing pattern (pattern C) is provided, and at the predetermined timing, the symbol display device 51 informs which pattern it is. By doing so, it is difficult to identify which pattern of the round until the predetermined timing, and it is possible to draw interest in the special notification at the predetermined timing.

  In particular, until the predetermined timing, a situation disadvantageous to the player (a situation in which winning in the accessory device 150 is unlikely to occur) is set. It is considered that the player will be more interested in whether or not it changes.

  In the above embodiment, if the selectivity between the pattern C and the pattern F is more easily selected than the pattern C in the open / close execution mode of the continuous fluctuation mode, the disadvantageous situation for the player usually continues. In addition, when the special notification A is performed (when the pattern F is selected), it is possible to increase a sense of surprise. This makes it easier for the player to feel the benefit of the special notification A being performed.

<Seventh embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the special notification is executed at a predetermined timing during the normal game state in the sixth embodiment. As the special notification during the normal game state, a first special notification and a second special notification indicating that the firing timing of the game ball is adjusted are set. The details of each of these special announcements will be described later in detail, but by performing each of the special announcements, the winning rate to the accessory device 150 and the rate at which the V distribution by the second distribution member 310 is performed. And is set to increase.

  As a condition for executing these special notifications, in the present embodiment, for example, in accordance with the round continuation timing in the open / close execution mode, the mode is shifted to a mode in which a special notification advantageous to the player is easily executed and a mode in which it is not so. And As these modes will be described in detail later, first, a process related to grasping the round continuation timing related to the transition of the mode will be described.

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the opening / closing processing in the present embodiment.

  The opening and closing process in this embodiment is basically the same as the opening and closing process (FIG. 24) in each of the above embodiments. The difference is that when a V prize is generated in step S1311 and it is determined in step S1312 that the continuous fluctuation mode is set, the process proceeds to step S1318 in each of the above-described embodiments, whereas in the present embodiment, the process proceeds to step S1318. In S1329, a process of grasping the timing at which the V winning has occurred, that is, the number of times of opening during the round, is executed. More specifically, a process of storing the value of the second round counter RC2 in the second round counter RC2 storage area provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 is executed. The second round counter RC2 storage area can store the value of the second round counter RC2 independently of the update of the second round counter RC2 even if the update of the second round counter RC2 is performed at each opening and closing during the round. Is configured. This is as described in the fourth embodiment.

  After executing the processing of step S1329, the processing of adding the value of the second round counter RC2 grasped in step S1329 to the value of the total round counter TRC provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 in step S1330. Execute The total round counter TRC is a counter for storing the integrated value of the timing (the value of RC2) at which the round continuation condition is satisfied in the V prize in the open / close execution mode of the continuous fluctuation mode.

  Then, after executing the processing of step S1330, the second round counter RC2 is cleared to “0” in step S1318, and the processing of step S1319 and thereafter is executed.

  In the opening / closing process of this embodiment, the value of the total round counter TRC in the current opening / closing execution mode is output to the effect control device 82 at the end of the opening / closing execution mode, that is, at the time of ending. That is, after executing the ending start process in step S1327, the process of reading the value of the total round counter TRC from the various counter areas 114d is executed in step S1331, and in step S1328, the total ending command is read in response to the ending command. The value of the round counter TRC is set.

  As described above, the ending command is output from main control device 81 to effect control device 82, and the process corresponding to the command is performed in another process (step SB105) of the effect process (FIG. 38). Although detailed description is omitted from the drawings, in the other processing, the execution of the special notification of the symbol display device 51 according to the value of the total round counter TRC included in the ending command based on the reception of the ending command. A process of switching display modes having different rates is performed.

  As the display mode, a normal mode, a rescue mode, and a special mode are set. As shown in FIG. 41 (b), the rescue mode has the highest execution rate as the execution rate of the special notification when the special opening result is obtained based on the winning in the second operation port 39 during the normal game state, for example. , The relief mode, the special mode, and the normal mode are set so that the execution rate of the special notification increases. In this case, the effect control device 82 that has received the ending command sets the rescue mode if the value of the total round counter TRC included in the ending command is 1 to 50, and sets the normal mode if the value of the total round counter TRC is 51 to 150. If it is 151 to 285, the special mode is set.

  That is, in the opening / closing execution mode, if the generation timing of the V prize is early as the condition for continuation of the round is satisfied, the rescue mode is easily set, and if it is late, the special mode is easily set. If the timing of the V prize is early, it is highly likely that the maximum number of prizes has not been reached. Also, if the value of the total round counter TRC is small, it is highly possible that the open / close execution mode has ended with a short number of rounds. Therefore, in such a case, the display mode is set to a rescue mode in which special notification is easier to execute than usual. In this way, it is possible to rescue a player who has not obtained many benefits in the open / close execution mode.

  On the other hand, as described above, if the V prize occurs in the second half (RC2 = 11 to 16) or the end game (RC2 = 17 to 19) in each round, and the round continuation condition is satisfied, the player is treated favorably (next). May be set to a pattern with a high continuation rate in some cases), and the player attempts to operate so as to generate a V winning in the latter half or the end of the round as much as possible. As a result, the value of the total round counter TRC can also increase, so that the display mode is set to a special mode in which special notification is easier to execute than usual, according to the player's hard work. By doing so, the active participation of the player in the game can be more expected.

  It should be noted that the special mode is only for the purpose of anticipating the active participation of the player, and therefore the execution rate of the special notification is lower in the special mode than in the rescue mode. In this manner, the ball-out rate is not excessively increased, and the fairness of the game can be secured.

  The manner in which the special notification is performed will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 (a) and 41 (c). Here, the description will be made based on the special opening A result described in the modification of the second embodiment and the operation pattern of the second distribution member 310.

  As shown in FIG. 41A, it is assumed that a prize is generated in the operating ports 38 and 39 at the timing of t1, and the game result is a special opening A result. In this case, the first opening operation is started at the timing of t2 and ends at the timing of t3. Further, the second opening operation is started at the timing of t5, and ends at the timing of t6.

  Here, the game ball is fired at a predetermined firing cycle (0.6 sec, Pa) from the game ball firing mechanism 53 by operating the firing handle 60. For example, as a situation in which the operation of the firing handle 60 is continuously performed, a game ball is fired at a timing of P1, a next game ball is fired at a timing of P2 that is after Pa, and P3 that is further after Pa It is assumed that the game ball is fired at the timing of and the game ball is fired at the timing of P4, which is Pa after that.

  First, a case where the special notification is not performed will be described. In relation to the firing cycle Pa, for example, a game ball fired at the timing of P1 wins the special equipment device 150 in the first opening operation of the special opening A result. It is assumed that it has been performed (timing at t2). In this case, it is assumed that the game ball reached the second sorting member 310 at a timing t4, which is a period required for the winning game ball to reach the second sorting member 310 in the accessory device 150. Then, at this timing, the second distribution member 310 is not in the distribution state, and the V distribution by the second distribution member 310 is not performed.

  Further, for example, it is assumed that the game ball fired at the timing of P4 arrives at the accessory device 150 at the end of the second opening operation (timing of t6). In this case, although it reaches the second distribution member 310 at the timing of t7, the V distribution by the second distribution member 310 is not performed because the state has already been changed from the distribution state to the non-distribution state.

  Next, a case where special notification is performed will be described. When a prize is generated in the operation ports 38 and 39 at the timing of t8, for example, a display such as "Slightly wait !!" is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 as the first special notification. Based on this display, the player stops firing game balls. If the game result based on the winning at the timing t8 is the special opening A result, the first opening operation is started at the timing t9 and ends at the timing t10. Then, the second opening operation is started at a timing t12 and ends at a timing t14.

  In this case, when the game ball is fired at the timing of P5, which is the timing before the start of the second opening operation, the game ball wins to the accessory device 150 at the timing of t12, and the winning game ball is It reaches the second distribution member 310 at the timing of t13, and as a result, V distribution is performed and a V winning can occur. In this case, at the timing of t11 which is a timing (0.1 sec, period PC) slightly before the timing of the above P5, as the second special notification, for example, the message “Now, hitting” is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51. "!!!!" is displayed. Based on this display, the player starts the shooting operation, and as a result, the game ball is fired at the timing of P5, and the V prize may occur as described above. As a player, it means that the operation of firing the game ball has been stopped for a period of Pb longer than the firing cycle Pa.

  As described above, by performing the special notification that instructs the launch operation of the game ball in relation to the opening operation as the special notification, the V winning rate, that is, the transition rate to the open / close execution mode can be changed. And, by realizing it on the production side without changing the operation timing of the opening / closing role 168, the distribution members 300 and 310, and the rotating body 201, without changing the basic configuration as a gaming machine, It is possible to easily adjust the pitch and change the specifications of the gaming machine.

  In addition, by performing the first special notification as described above, a period in which the firing of the game ball is stopped may be lengthened. Therefore, for example, in the period from the first special notification to the second special notification, the firing of the game ball is not stopped, but the second special notification is calculated backward from the timing (P5 timing) and slightly calculated. Even when the firing is stopped and the game ball is subsequently fired, the timing of performing the second special notification may be adjusted so that the V winning can occur.

  In addition, in the opening / closing execution mode, in a situation where the number of winnings in the accessory device 150 will be small (TRC = 1 to 50), the state is shifted to a state that is advantageous to the player. It is possible to make up for the fact that the privilege obtained by the person is small.

  In the opening / closing execution mode, even in a situation where the winning number to the accessory device 150 may be large (TRC = 151 to 285), the state is shifted to an advantageous state for the player. In addition to the game in which the gaming device 150 wins a game ball, it is possible to draw attention to the winning timing (timing of occurrence of a V winning) and the like to further encourage the player to actively participate in the game. .

<Eighth embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the operation start timing of the distribution members 300 and 310 is changed as follows. That is, the operation start timing of the distribution members 300 and 310 is changed to the winning timing of the operation ports 38 and 39.

  In the present embodiment, the operation of the distribution members 300 and 310 is started based on the winning of the operation ports 38 and 39, and the operation pattern is uniformly set. Specifically, the first distribution member 300 distributes from the non-distribution state at the timing when a first period (1.5 sec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the timing when the winning in the first operating port 38 occurs. The state changes to the state, and when the second period (1.5 seconds in this embodiment) elapses from the timing, the state returns from the distribution state to the non-distribution state. Further, the second distribution member 310 is displaced from the non-distribution state to the distribution state at a timing when a third period (3.3 sec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the timing when the prize to the first operation port 38 occurs. Then, when a fourth period (0.1 sec in this embodiment) elapses from the timing, the state returns from the distribution state to the non-distribution state. In the case of the second operation port 39, the operation pattern is the same as the operation pattern at the time of winning the first operation port 38 up to a certain point, and specifically, the first period and the second period (third period) And the operation pattern until the lapse of the fourth period is the same, and thereafter (after the lapse of the second period or the fourth period), the operation of the first period and the second period (the third period and the fourth period) is performed again. The pattern repeats. This simplifies the control as compared with the configuration in which the opening / closing timing of the opening / closing accessory 168 is determined and then the operation patterns of the distribution members 300 and 310 are determined as in the above embodiments. .

  On the other hand, if the operation patterns of the distribution members 300 and 310 are uniformly set based on the winning timing of the operating ports 38 and 39 in this manner, for example, the second distributing member may be started from the winning timing of the operating ports 38 and 39. It is feared that a so-called stopping action is performed, which aims at the distribution to the V winning side by 310. Thus, in the present embodiment, while the operation patterns of the distribution members 300 and 310 are uniformly set from the winning of the operation ports 38 and 39 as described above, the opening and closing of the opening and closing members are performed as described in the first embodiment. By leaving a configuration in which the opening start timing of the accessory 168 is random, such a stopping action is suppressed. In addition, by adjusting the opening start timing while randomizing the opening start timing in this way, it is possible to intentionally change the V winning ratio on the gaming machine side. Hereinafter, the configuration for that will be described in detail.

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the opening / closing timing setting process in the present embodiment. As described above, the opening / closing timing setting process is a process executed in step S802 of the control start process (step S506, FIG. 17) in the game control process (FIG. 16) of the normal process. This is a process for setting the opening / closing timing of the opening / closing role object 168 when a prize is awarded to 38 or 39.

  In the present embodiment, first, in step S1601, a process of acquiring an opening timing table from the opening timing table storage area 113c of the ROM 113 is executed. As shown in FIG. 43, a first opening timing table and a second opening timing table are set as the opening timing table in the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 43 (a), the first opening timing table is the same as the opening timing table (FIG. 11 (c)) in each of the above embodiments, from the start timing of this processing to the opening of the opening / closing accessory 168. The opening standby time is set at random (0.5 sec to 2.4 sec) according to the opening type counter CS. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 43 (b), the second opening timing table indicates that the first sorting member 300 (out-of-sharing sorting) or the second sorting member in a state where the opening / closing accessory 168 is in the open state. The opening standby time is set according to the relationship with the operation 310 (V distribution). Then, the V prize is more likely to occur in the second release timing table than in the first release timing table. Although the second release timing table will be described in detail later, similarly to the first release timing table, the release standby time is set to be different depending on the release type counter CS.

  Which open timing table is selected has a different configuration depending on the game state at the time of activation of the present process (when a winning is made to the operating ports 38 and 39), for example. Specifically, the second opening timing table is selected or selected until a predetermined end condition is satisfied after the end of the predetermined opening / closing execution mode (for example, the opening / closing execution mode of the 16R continuation mode). After the end condition is satisfied, the first opening timing is selected or easily selected. As the end condition, for example, a configuration established when the winning in the operating ports 38 and 39 or the number of times of opening and closing the opening / closing accessory 168 (the number of operations) reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times), or a predetermined condition. (For example, an opening / closing execution mode that is a continuous fluctuation mode).

  After one of the opening timing tables is selected in step S1601, an opening type counter CS is acquired in step S1602, and in step S1603, a process of setting a corresponding opening timing (opening standby time) is performed. Then, the main opening / closing timing setting process ends.

  Details of each release timing table selected in step S1601 will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 44 in addition to FIG.

  First, the relationship between the operation patterns of the distribution members 300 and 310 and the opening standby time of the opening / closing accessory 168 will be described with reference to FIG.

  For example, when a prize is generated in the first operating port 38 at the timing of t1, the first distribution member 300 is after a lapse of the first period (after 1.5 sec) from the timing of the t1 when the prize is generated. At the timing of t3, the state is changed from the non-distributed state to the distributed state, and at the timing of t6 after the elapse of the second period (after 1.5 sec), the state is changed from the distributed state to the non-distributed state. Further, the second distribution member 310 is displaced from the non-distribution state to the distribution state at a timing t7, which is a lapse of a third period (after 3.3 sec) from the timing of t1 when the winning has occurred, and thereafter. At the timing of t8, which is after the elapse of the fourth period (after 0.1 sec), the state changes from the distribution state to the non-distribution state.

  An opening standby time is determined based on winning in the first operating port 38, and the opening standby time is, for example, a first standby time (for example, 0. 1) shorter than the first period up to the displacement timing of the first distribution member 300. When set to 5 sec), the opening / closing handpiece 168 is displaced to the open state at the timing of t2 after the elapse of the first standby time from the winning, and thereafter, the predetermined time period (2.0 sec, step S902) ), And is shifted to the closed state at the timing of t5. In this case, in the period in which the opening / closing handpiece 168 is in the open state, the period in which the first distribution member 300 is in the distribution state (out-of-range distribution period) overlaps, and the length of the period is 1.0 sec. Becomes Also, there is no overlap with the period in which the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state (V distribution period).

  On the other hand, the opening standby time determined based on the winning in the first operating port 38 is set to the second standby time (for example, 2.4 sec) longer than the first period until the displacement timing of the first distribution member 300. When set, the opening / closing handpiece 168 is displaced to the open state at the timing of t4 after the lapse of the second standby time from the winning, and thereafter, is opened for a predetermined period (2.0 sec). The state is maintained, and the state is changed to the closed state at the timing of t10. In this case, during the period in which the opening / closing handpiece 168 is in the open state, although the separation distribution period with the first distribution member 300 overlaps, it becomes shorter than the case where the first standby time is set, and the period Is 0.6 sec. In addition, the V distribution period with the second distribution member 310 overlaps, and the length of the period is 0.1 sec.

  The operation pattern of each of the distribution members 300 and 310 when a prize is generated in the second operating port 39 is repeated when a prize is generated in the first operating port 38. Although omitted, the first distribution member 300 is displaced to the non-distribution state at the timing of t6, and is displaced to the distribution state at the timing of t11 after the lapse of the first period. Then, at the timing of t14 after the elapse of the second period from the timing of the timing t11, the state is changed to the non-distributed state again. The second distributing member 310 is displaced to the non-distributed state at the timing of t8, and is displaced to the distributing state at the timing of t15 after the lapse of the third period. Then, at the timing of t16 after the elapse of the fourth period from the timing of t15, the state is changed to the non-distributed state.

  The opening standby time is determined based on the winning in the second operating port 39. For example, when the opening standby time is the first standby time, the off-allocation period or the V-allocation period for the first opening. Is the same as when the first operating port 38 is won. At a timing t5 when the first release is completed, a standby time between the first release and the second release is set, and this time is a predetermined period (1.0 sec, see step S909). ing. Then, at the timing t9 when the standby time elapses, the second open state is established, and the open state is maintained for a predetermined period (2.0 sec, see step S902). Then, at the timing of t13 when the period elapses, the state is changed to the closed state. As described above, when 0.5 sec is set as the first standby time, the off-state distribution period at the time of the second opening is 1.1 sec, which is longer than the case of the first opening. In addition, even at the time of the second opening, there is no overlap with the V distribution period.

  If the opening standby time determined based on the winning in the second operating port is the second standby time, the first operation is performed for the off-time distribution period and the V-time distribution period for the first opening. This is the same as when winning the mouth 38. At the timing of t10 when the first opening is completed, a waiting time between each opening is set (1.0 sec, see step S909), and the state is changed to the open state at the timing of t12 when the period elapses. Then, at the timing of t17 when the period during which the open state is maintained (see step S902 for 2.0 seconds), the state is changed to the closed state. In this manner, when 2.4 sec is set as the second standby time, the off-state distribution period at the time of the second opening is 0.6 sec, which is the same as the first time. Also at the time of the second opening, overlap with the V distribution period occurs, and the length of the period is 0.1 sec, which is the same as that of the first time.

  In this way, the lengths of the off-distribution period and the V-distribution period may differ depending on the set open standby time. Then, in the present embodiment, the second winning timing table is configured to change the V winning ratio by utilizing the overlapping relationship with the out-of-order distribution period or the V-distribution period.

  That is, when the release standby time is set from 0.5 sec (first timing) to 1.0 sec (second timing), the period overlapping with the off-distribution period gradually increases (1.0 sec → 1.5 sec). ). Therefore, the probability that the game ball that has won the bonus item device 150 will be distributed to the off side is higher when the opening standby time is set to 1.0 sec than when it is set to 0.5 sec. In other words, the V winning rate decreases. Therefore, in the second release timing table, as shown in FIG. 43B, the release type counter is set so that the probability that the release standby time is set to 1.0 sec is lower than the probability that the release standby time is set to 0.5 sec. The value of CS has been allocated.

  Further, when the release standby time is set from 1.0 sec (second timing) to 1.3 sec (third timing), the length of the period overlapping with the out-of-order distribution period does not change (the longest 1. 5 sec), and there is no overlap with the V distribution period. Therefore, the value of the release type counter CS is allocated so that the probability set for these open standby times is lower than the probability set for other times.

  If the open standby time is set after 1.4 sec (fourth timing), which is later than 1.3 sec (third timing), overlap with the V distribution period occurs. Therefore, although the length of the overlap period with the out-of-order distribution period is not different from the length when the longest overlap occurs, the opening standby time is 1.4 sec as the period in which the overlap with the V-distribution period occurs. From the (fourth timing) to 1.5 sec (fifth timing), the value of the open type counter CS is set to be higher than the probability set in the above 1.0 sec to 1.3 sec (second timing to third timing). Is allocated.

  If the release standby time is set from 1.5 sec (fifth timing) to 2.4 sec (sixth timing), which is later than 1.4 sec (fourth timing), the period overlapping with the off-distribution period gradually increases. (1.5 sec → 0.6 sec). In addition, if this period is set, any overlap with the V distribution period occurs, and the length does not change in 0.1 sec. Therefore, the probability that a game ball that has won the accessory device 150 is distributed to the off side is lower when the waiting time for opening is set to 2.4 seconds than when it is set to 1.5 seconds. In other words, the V winning rate increases. Therefore, in the second opening timing table, the value of the opening type counter CS is assigned such that the probability that the opening standby time is set to 2.4 seconds is higher than the probability that the opening waiting time is set to 1.5 seconds.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the operation of each of the distribution members 300 and 310 is set to be a constant operation from the timing at which a prize is generated in the operating ports 38 and 39, and then the prize is received in the operating ports 38 and 39. Since the opening standby time until the opening and closing of the opening and closing accessory 168 is changed, the probability of V winning in the accessory device 150 can be changed.

  In the present embodiment, in order to change the probability of winning a V, the operation pattern after the opening / closing accessory 168 is in the open state is a uniform pattern. That is, although the V winning probability is changed as described above, the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing accessory 168 does not require a large change, and only the standby time before opening (opening standby time) needs to be changed. It has become. By doing so, it is possible to vary the V winning ratio with a simple configuration.

  Although the first opening timing table and the second opening timing table are provided for the opening timing table, other tables may be provided, or only the second opening timing table may be provided. Further, in the second opening timing table, the configuration is such that the opening standby time at which the V winning percentage is high is easily selected, but the configuration may be such that the opening standby time at which the V winning percentage is low is easily selected.

  Which opening timing table to select may be determined by lottery or the like. In this case, the probability of winning the lottery (the probability of selecting the second opening timing table) may be changed according to the gaming state.

  The opening timing table selected according to the game state when the hold information is consumed based on the winning in the operating ports 38 and 39 is configured differently, but the open timing selected according to the game state when the hold information is acquired. Different tables may be used. For example, with respect to the hold information acquired during the opening / closing execution mode, if the second opening timing table is selected or is configured to be easily selected, as an advantage obtained by acquiring the hold information during the opening / closing execution mode, the hold It is possible to induce a series of cottages, and it is possible to improve the interest. In particular, for example, if a prize does not easily occur in the accessory device 150 during the opening / closing execution mode, the player easily feels dissatisfaction that it is difficult to obtain a prize ball even in the opening / closing execution mode. On the other hand, if the hold information acquired during the opening / closing execution mode is advantageously handled as described above, even if it is difficult for a prize to occur to the accessory device 150 during the opening / closing execution mode, the spilling ball is not spilled. Is expected to win the operating ports 38 and 39, and as a result, it is possible to realize not only the above-mentioned dissatisfaction but also a new game property such that the open / close execution mode itself is easily extended.

  Further, regarding the hold information acquired when the number of the hold information is equal to or more than a predetermined number (for example, two), if the second release timing table is configured to be selected or easily selected (advantageously handled), Can be obtained. In the first place, the prize to the operating device 38, 39 is more likely to be generated, the prize to the accessory device 150 is more likely to be generated, and as a result, the open / close execution mode is more likely to be generated. Further, if the table is configured to be more advantageous as the table where the hold information is easily stored as in the above-described configuration, the table that is more likely to generate a prize to the operating ports 38 and 39 is more likely to generate the open / close execution mode. As a result, it is possible to increase the range of increase and decrease in pitching, and it is possible to improve interest. In addition, for example, the operation of the accessory device 150 is set to be long, or the length of the game times (variable display time) when the hold information is consumed is set to be long. As the period from the digestion of information) to the end of the operation of the accessory device 150 is set longer, the hold information is more easily stored. In such a configuration, there is a possibility that a so-called hitting action of stopping the launch of the game ball until the operation of the accessory device 150 ends is likely to be performed. Therefore, if such a configuration is applied to a configuration that is more advantageous as the platform on which the hold information is easily stored as described above, it is possible to generate the significance of storing the hold information, and it is possible to suppress the stopping action described above. It becomes possible.

  Conversely, with respect to the hold information acquired when the number of the hold information is less than the predetermined number (for example, two), the second release timing table may be selected or may be easily selected (advantageously handled). . In this way, even if the prize does not easily occur in the operating ports 38 and 39, it can be relieved. However, with such a configuration, there is a possibility that an act of repeatedly firing and stopping the game ball to make it difficult to store the hold information may be easily performed. Therefore, when the above configuration is adopted, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which the firing of game balls is continued for a predetermined period or more and the number of pieces of hold information is less than the predetermined number, which is advantageously handled.

  Further, from the viewpoint of the rescue of the player (relief that the V winning is not easily generated), the number of winnings (the number of games) to the operating ports 38 and 39 after one opening / closing execution mode ends as the gaming state. In this configuration, the easiness of selection of the second opening timing table changes, specifically, the number of winnings (number of games) to the operating ports 38 and 39 after one open / close execution mode ends is equal to or more than a predetermined number. Then, the second opening timing table may be selected or may be easily selected. In this way, it is possible to rescue a so-called hang-up table in which the opening / closing execution mode does not easily occur, and it is possible to provide a meaning of continuing the game even with such a hang-up table.

  In addition, from the viewpoint of the rescue of the player, the advantage at the time of using the hold information is changed depending on the number of winnings (the number of games) to the operating ports 38 and 39 after the completion of one opening / closing execution mode as described above. In addition to the configuration, the advantage may be changed according to the rate of occurrence of the open / close execution mode per unit time, or the advantage may be changed according to the type of the previous open / close execution mode (for example, compared to the 16R continuation mode). The configuration may be such that the degree of advantage is increased in the case of an unfavorable continuous fluctuation mode), or whether or not a V winning has occurred at the time of digestion prior to the current suspension information (for example, the previous suspension information) or the accessory device 150 It is good also as a structure which changes an advantage according to the presence or absence of winning.

  Further, as the configuration for changing the advantage (changing the V prize rate) when the hold information is exhausted, the configuration may be such that the opening / closing standby time is changed as in the present embodiment, or as in the second embodiment. The advantage may be changed by making the special opening result easy or difficult to select.

<Ninth embodiment>
In the present embodiment, as in the eighth embodiment, while the operation pattern of each of the distribution members 300 and 310 is kept constant from the timing of digestion of the hold information, the change of the symbol on the main display unit 43 when the hold information is digested. The display is executed, and the opening of the opening / closing accessory 168 is started after the end of the variable display. Hereinafter, the configuration for that will be described.

  FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing a game control process in the present embodiment. As described above, the game control process is a process executed in step S403 of the regular process (FIG. 15) started periodically.

  In the present embodiment, first, in step S1701, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in effect. If it is in the open / close execution mode, the game control process is terminated as it is. If it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, it is determined in step S1702 whether or not it is in the accessory control state. If it is not in the accessory control state, the process advances to step S1703. The processing in steps S1701 and S1702 is the same as the processing in steps S501 and S502.

  In step S1703, it is determined whether one game round is being executed. Here, in the present embodiment, based on the fact that the hold information is subject to the determination of success / failure, the symbol display is started to be changed and displayed on the main display unit 43, and the stop result corresponding to the result of the success / failure determination of the hold information is determined. The end of the variable display is defined as one game time, and the variable display of the game times is sequentially executed for each hold information. In step S1703, if the counter corresponding to the variable display time set in the variable display time setting process (step S1706) described below is not a predetermined value (for example, “0”), one game time It is determined that it is being executed. At the start of execution of one game, flags corresponding to various flag storage areas 114e are stored, and at the end of one game, the flags are deleted. In step S1703, the presence or absence of the flag is checked. It may be configured to determine whether or not one game round is being executed.

  When one game round is being executed, the game control process is terminated. That is, in the present embodiment, the process for controlling the accessory is not executed when the game is in the open / close execution mode, when the accessory is being controlled, or when one game is being performed.

  If one game round is not being executed, the process advances to step S1704 to determine whether the common hold number CRN is “0”. If it is "0", the game control process is terminated as it is. This processing is the same as the processing in step S503.

  If the common hold number CRN is not “0” in step S1704 and there is (undigested) hold information that is not the target of the determination of success / failure, the process proceeds to step S1705. In step S1705, a data setting process is performed. This process is the same as the process in step S504 described above, and executes a process for sequentially setting the values of the various counters C1, C2, CS, and the like for the pending information that has not been digested as a target of the success / failure determination.

  In a succeeding step S1706, a variable display time setting process is executed. In the process of setting the variable display time, the current value of the common hold number CRN and the value of the release type counter CS for the current hold information are acquired, and these values are stored in the various table storage areas 113d of the ROM 113. By referring to the stored variable display time table, the variable display time of the current game is specified, and the variable display time counter provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 is used to determine the specified variable display time. Execute the process of inputting information.

  In the variable display time table according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 46A, the variable display time of each game is set to be different depending on the value of the common hold number CRN. The variable display time is set to be shorter as the value increases, that is, as the number of stored hold information increases. In the case where the value of the common hold number CRN is the same, which variable display time is set is randomly set at intervals of 0.1 sec according to the value of the opening type counter CS. For example, when the common hold number CRN is “0”, one of the variable display times of 1.0 sec to 2.4 sec is selected according to the value of the release type counter CS, and the average value is 1 0.7 sec. When the common hold number CRN is “1”, one of the variable display times of 0.7 sec to 1.5 sec is selected according to the value of the release type counter CS, and the average value is 1.1 sec. It is. When the common hold number CRN is “2”, one of the variable display times of 0.5 sec to 1.3 sec is selected according to the value of the release type counter CS, and the average value is 0.9 sec. It is. If the common hold number CRN is equal to or more than “3”, one of the variable display times of 0.1 sec to 0.5 sec is selected according to the value of the release type counter CS, and the average value is It is 0.3 sec.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the operation pattern of each of the distribution members 300 and 310 is set such that the shorter the period from the timing of digestion of the hold information as the occurrence of the predetermined event, the higher the V winning rate. Specifically, as an operation pattern of the second distribution member 310 among the distribution members 300 and 310, the non-distribution state is displaced from the non-distribution state to the distribution state in 0.3 sec as the third period from the timing of digestion of the hold information. Then, the state is maintained for 1.0 second as the fourth period. After that, the non-distributed state is maintained until the next hold information is consumed. The setting of the operation pattern is set in the distribution setting process (the second distribution setting process in step S804) in the control start process (FIG. 19) and the distribution process (FIG. 21) described above. In addition, the operation pattern of the first distribution member 300 is the same as that in each of the above embodiments, and thus the description is omitted.

  After executing the processing of step S1706, a hit / fail judgment processing (similar to step S505) is executed in step S1707, and a control start processing (similar to step S506) is executed in step S1708. finish. If it is determined in step S1702 that the character is being controlled, the in-control process (similar to step S507) is executed in step S1709, and the sorting process (similar to step S508) is performed in step S1710. Then, after executing the winning process (same as step S509) in step S1711, the game control process ends.

  The relationship between the length of the variable display time of the game times and the V distribution in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 46B, the average value of the variable display time that can be selected according to each common hold number CRN is shown as an example.

  When the hold information is consumed at the timing of t1, the second distribution member 310 is displaced from the non-distributed state to the distributed state at the timing of t2, which is 0.3 seconds after the third period, as described above. Then, the distribution state is maintained for 1.0 sec, which is the fourth period, and returns to the non-distribution state at the timing of t5.

  For example, when 1.7 seconds is selected as the variable display time when the common hold number CRN is “0”, the variable display of the main display unit 43 is performed from the timing of t1 to the timing of t6, which is 1.7 seconds after. Then, the game result is displayed as the stop result at the same timing t6. For example, when the game result is a (one time) opening result, the opening / closing handing object 168 is displaced to the open state at the timing of t6, and is maintained for 1.0 second at the timing of t9. Displaced into a closed state. In other words, as the predetermined event, the opening / closing handover 168 is set to the open standby period for 1.7 seconds from the time when the hold information is digested at the timing of t1 until the timing of t6, and is displaced to the open state. . In this case, since there is no overlap with the period in which the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state, the V distribution by the second distribution member 310 is not performed.

  For example, when 1.1 seconds is selected as the variable display time when the common hold number CRN is “1”, the variable display of the main display unit 43 is performed from the timing of t1 to the timing of t4, which is 1.1 seconds later. Then, the game result is displayed as the stop result at the timing of t4. For example, when the game result is the (one time) opening result, the opening / closing handing object 168 is displaced to the opening state at the timing of t4, and is kept open for 1.0 sec, and at the timing of t8. Displaced into a closed state. In other words, as the predetermined event, the opening / closing role 168 is set to the open standby period of 1.1 sec from the time when the hold information is digested at the timing of t1 to the timing of t4, and is shifted to the open state. . In this case, since the overlap with the period in which the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state occurs in the period (0.2 sec) from the timing of t4 to the timing of t5, the accessory device 150 is generated at that timing. When the player wins, the V distribution by the second distribution member 310 is performed. In other words, even if a prize is won in the accessory device 150 at a timing other than the timing (a timing that does not overlap with a period during which the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state), the V distribution by the second distribution member 310 is not performed. I can't.

  If, for example, 0.9 sec is selected as the fluctuating display time when the common hold number CRN is “2”, the fluctuating display of the main display unit 43 is performed from the timing of t1 to the timing of t3 which is 0.9 sec later. Then, the game result is displayed as a stop result at the same time t3. For example, when the game result is the (one time) opening result, the opening / closing handing object 168 is displaced to the opening state at the timing of t3, and is kept open for 1.0 sec, and at the timing of t7. Displaced into a closed state. In other words, as the predetermined event, the opening / closing handset 168 is set to the opening standby period for 0.9 sec from the time when the hold information is digested at the timing of t1 until the timing of t3, and is displaced to the open state. . In this case, since the overlap with the period in which the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state occurs in the period (0.4 sec) from the timing of t3 to the timing of t5, the accessory device 150 at that timing. If the player wins, the V distribution by the second distribution member 310 is performed. In other words, even if a prize is won in the accessory device 150 at a timing other than the timing (a timing that does not overlap with a period during which the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state), the V distribution by the second distribution member 310 is not performed. I can't. The period during which the prize can be awarded to the accessory device 150 and the period during which the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state overlap with “2” as compared with the case where the common reservation number CRN is “1”. The case is longer. That is, the possibility of V distribution is higher when the common hold number CRN is “2” than when it is “1”.

  When, for example, 0.3 sec is selected as the variable display time when the common hold number CRN is “3” or more, the variable display of the main display unit 43 is performed from the timing of t1 to the timing of t2 which is 0.3 sec later. The game is executed (a game round is executed), and the game result is displayed as a stop result at the same timing t2. For example, when the game result is the (one time) opening result, the opening / closing handing object 168 is displaced to the opening state at the timing of t2, and is kept open for 1.0 sec, and at the timing of t5. Displaced into a closed state. In other words, as the predetermined event, the opening / closing handover 168 is set to the open standby period for 0.3 sec from the time when the hold information is digested at the timing of t1 until the timing of t2, and is displaced to the open state. . In this case, since the overlap with the period in which the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state occurs in the period (1.0 sec) from the timing of t2 to the timing of t5, the accessory device 150 at that timing. If the player wins, the V distribution by the second distribution member 310 is performed. The period during which the prize can be awarded to the accessory device 150 and the period during which the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state are overlapped with each other when the common hold number CRN is “1” or “2”. Is also longer in the case of “3” or more. That is, the possibility of V distribution is higher when the common hold number CRN is “3” or more than when “1” or “2”.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the variable display time of the game times is likely to be shorter as the number of common hold numbers CRN is larger, and the distribution members 300 are configured such that the shorter the variable display time, the higher the V winning rate. , 310 are set, the probability that the V prize will occur increases as the amount of hold information is more stored. With such a configuration, in a situation where the hold information is likely to be accumulated, for example, in the opening / closing execution mode, a V prize is generated later (after the opening / closing execution mode), and the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode again. It is possible to adopt a configuration in which a cottage is easily generated. In addition, the gaming table from which the hold information is easily acquired becomes a gaming table in which the V prize is more likely to occur (the transition to the opening / closing execution mode is easier), and the rate of increase or decrease in the pitching rate is increased. Become.

  Further, in the case of a configuration having a high-frequency support mode in which the frequency of opening the electric accessory 39a becomes high, a prize to the second operating port 39 is generated by setting the high-frequency support mode. Therefore, the common reservation number CRN is easily accumulated. That is, it is easy to shift to the open / close execution mode. This makes it possible to substantially change the transition rate to the open / close execution mode without changing the operation pattern of each of the distribution members 300 and 310, and diversify the game.

  In the above-described embodiment, the configuration in which the V winning rate is changed by changing the variable display time of each game time has been described. However, the period from the timing of using the hold information to the timing of opening the opening / closing accessory 168 is changed. The structure for changing the opening wait time is the same as the structure for changing the opening standby time as in the second and third embodiments. The effect of changing the period can be expected.

<Tenth embodiment>
In the present embodiment, as an operation pattern of the distribution members 300 and 310, the end of the open / close execution mode is set to the occurrence of a predetermined event, and the distribution members 300 and 310 periodically operate after the end of the open / close execution mode. I do.

  Specifically, in the transition process (Step S1214) at the end of the open / close execution mode in the game state transition process (FIG. 23), a period (first period and a period during which the distribution members 300 and 310 are maintained in the non-distribution state). The third period is set (a process of inputting numerical information corresponding to the first distribution counter and the second distribution counter). Then, as shown in FIG. 47, in the normal processing according to the present embodiment, the distribution processing (step S508 in FIG. 16) is executed as one of the normal processing. That is, in steps S1801 to S1804, the same processing as the processing in steps S401 to S404 is performed, and in step S1805, the distribution processing is performed. Steps S1806 to S1810 are the same as steps S405 to S409.

  Although a detailed description with reference to the drawings is omitted, in the game control process (step S1803) in the present embodiment, since the above-described distribution process is performed as a normal process, after the process during control in step S507 is executed, In step S509, a winning process is executed, and the game control process is terminated.

  In the distribution process according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 48, it is determined in step S1901 whether or not the open / close execution mode is in effect. To end. This is because the setting of the operation of the distribution members 300 and 310 during the open / close execution mode is performed in the game state transition process (FIG. 23). If it is determined in step S1901 that it is not in the open / close execution mode, the process advances to step S1902. In step S1902, similarly to step S1001, it is determined whether it is the first distribution control timing. That is, the numerical information of the first distribution counter is grasped, and the first period (a period during which the first distribution member 300 is maintained in the non-distribution state) or the second period (the first distribution member 300 is distributed). It is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the period during which the state is maintained. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1902, in step S1903, as in step S1002, the first distribution member 300 is displaced from the non-distribution state to the distribution state, or the first distribution member 300 is displaced from the distribution state. The driving of the first distribution drive unit 300a is controlled so as to be displaced to the minute state. In step S1903, a process of setting numerical information corresponding to a period for maintaining the displaced state in the first distribution counter is executed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1902, or after the processing of step S1903 has been performed, the process advances to step S1904. In step S1904, similarly to step S1003, it is determined whether it is the second distribution control timing. That is, the numerical information of the second distribution counter is grasped, and the third period (a period during which the second distribution member 310 is maintained in the non-distribution state) or the fourth period (the second distribution member 310 is distributed). It is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the period during which the state is maintained. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1904, in step S1905, similarly to step S1004, the second distributing member 310 is displaced from the non-distribution state to the distribution state, or the second distribution member 310 is displaced from the distribution state to non-distribution. The driving of the second distribution driving unit 310a is controlled so as to be displaced to the minute state. In step S1905, a process of setting numerical information corresponding to a period during which the displaced state is maintained in the second distribution counter is executed. If a negative determination is made in step S1904, or after the process of step S1905 is performed, the main distribution process ends.

  Next, a control start process (step S506) in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the control start process is a process started when opening / closing control of the opening / closing accessory 168 of the accessory device 150 is started in the game control process (FIG. 16).

  First, in step S2001, processing for grasping the number of times of opening and closing is executed. This processing is the same as the processing in step S801. In a succeeding step S2002, a process for grasping the distribution state of the first distribution member 300 is executed. Specifically, by grasping the driving state of the first distribution driving unit 300a and the numerical information of the first distribution counter, the current state of the first distribution member 300 is determined to be the distribution state. A process is executed for ascertaining information about which of the distribution states, and information about the remaining period in which the state continues. In a succeeding step S2003, a process for grasping the distribution status of the second distribution member 310 is executed. Specifically, by grasping the drive state of the second distribution drive unit 310a and the numerical information of the second distribution counter, the current state of the second distribution member 310 is determined to be the distribution state. A process is executed for ascertaining information about which of the distribution states, and information about the remaining period in which the state continues.

  In the subsequent step S2004, based on the processing results of steps S2001 to S2003, an opening / closing timing setting process for setting the opening / closing timing of the opening / closing accessory 168 is executed, and then this control start process is ended.

  Specifically, in the process of step S2004, based on the processing results of steps S2001 to S2003, the probabilities that the first distribution member 300 performs the off-state distribution and the second distribution member 310 performs the V distribution are different. , Set the opening standby time. The manner in which the opening standby time is set will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 50, for example, after the open / close execution mode ends at the timing of t1, the drive control of the first distribution member 300 is periodically performed every time the first period or the second period elapses. A configuration is shown in which the drive control of the second distribution member 310 is periodically performed every time the period or the fourth period elapses.

  A prize is generated at the timing of t2, and it is determined that the number of releases is one in step S2001, and that the first distribution member 300 is in the non-distributed state in step S2002, and thereafter (at the timing of t3). Assume that it is determined that the second distributing member 310 is displaced to the distributing state, and that the second distributing member 310 is displaced to the distributing state (at the timing of t6) in step S2003. . In this case, the first distribution member 300 makes it easy to perform the off-distribution, and the second distribution member 310 makes the V-distribution difficult to perform, that is, the V winning ratio is reduced. , A first waiting time is set as the opening waiting time. Specifically, for example, the opening and closing accessory 168 is set to be in the open state at the timing of t4 during the period in which the first distribution member 300 is in the distribution state, and the state is maintained until the timing of t6. Set to When set as described above, the first distributing member 300 disengages during the period during which the prize can be won in the accessory device 150 (the period from the timing of t4 to the timing of t6) and the timing of the timing from t4 to t5. The period during which the distribution is performed overlaps, and the period during which the V distribution is performed by the second distribution member 310 does not overlap.

  On the other hand, a prize is generated at the timing of t8, it is determined that the number of times of opening is one in step S2001, and that the first distribution member 300 is in the non-distributed state in step S2002. In step S2003, it is determined that the second distributing member 310 is in the non-distributed state, and that the second distributing member 310 is in the non-distributed state in step S2003. After that, it is assumed that it is determined (at the timing of t11) that the state is changed to the distribution state. In this case, for example, unlike the case of the timing of the above-mentioned t2, it is difficult for the first distribution member 300 to perform the off-distribution by the game state (the number of the common reservation number CRN) or a predetermined lottery, and The second standby time is set as the opening standby time so that the V allocation by the second allocation member 310 is easily performed, that is, the V winning rate is increased. For example, the opening and closing accessory 168 is set to be in the open state at the timing of t11, which is a period after the first distribution member 300 is displaced from the distribution state to the non-distribution state, and the state is set to the timing of t15. Set to be maintained until. When set as described above, the first distribution member 300 disengages in the period during which the prize can be awarded to the accessory device 150 (the period from the timing t11 to the timing t15) and the timing from the timing t14 to the timing t15. Although the period during which the distribution is performed overlaps, the rate of overlap with the period during which the out-of-order distribution is performed is smaller than when the first standby time is set. Further, the period during which the winning in the character device 150 is possible and the period during which the V distribution is performed by the second distribution member 310 from the timing t12 to the timing t13 overlap, and the first standby time is set. The rate of overlap with the period during which the V distribution is performed is greater than in the case where the V distribution is performed. That is, the V winning ratio is higher when the second standby time is set than when the first standby time is set.

  As described above, even in the configuration in which the distribution members 300 and 310 operate periodically, the V prize rate can be changed by changing the waiting time for opening the hold information from the timing of releasing the hold information as the occurrence of the predetermined event. Becomes possible.

  In the above configuration, the opening wait time is varied according to the operating state of each of the distribution members 300 and 310 that is grasped, and the V winning ratio is set to be different. However, the opening time is set so that the V winning ratio is the same or substantially the same. A configuration in which the standby time is set may be adopted. Specifically, the operation status of each of the distribution members 300 and 310 at the time of digestion of the hold information is grasped, and a period during which a prize can be awarded to the accessory device 150 and a period that overlaps with the out-of-position distribution are determined in advance. The opening standby time is set such that the first overlap period (first specific period) is set or a period overlapping with the V distribution is a predetermined second overlap period (second specific period). Is also good. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the act of aiming at a game ball and increasing the V winning rate in accordance with the operation state of the distribution members 300 and 310 that operate periodically.

  Further, in the above configuration, the game state at the time when the operating state of each of the distribution members 300 and 310 is grasped (for example, the number of the hold information stored as in the fourth embodiment, the game after the open / close execution mode, The opening wait time may be changed so that the V winning rate differs depending on the number of times, the number of winnings on the operation ports 38 and 39, the time using the RTC, or the like.

  In the above-described configuration, not only the opening standby time but also the V winning ratio may be changed by changing the period during which the open state is maintained or the number of times of opening as in the second embodiment.

<Eleventh embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the rotational position of the rotating body 201 at the time of occurrence of the predetermined event is grasped, and the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing handpiece 168 is set based on the grasped result. Hereinafter, as an example of the occurrence of the predetermined event, a case where the hold information is consumed during the normal game state will be described as the predetermined event.

  FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the opening / closing timing setting processing in the present embodiment. As described above, the opening / closing timing setting process is a process (step S802 in FIG. 19) performed as a control start process (step S506) when the hold information is consumed in the game control process (FIG. 16).

  In the present embodiment, first, in steps S2101 to S2104, the same processes as those in steps S801 to S804 are performed to determine the number of times of opening / closing, set the opening / closing timing, and set the operations of the distribution members 300 and 310. . In step S2102 in this embodiment, the opening / closing timing is set in the same manner as in step S802. However, as will be described later, the opening / closing timing may be changed later. It can also be called processing.

  In a succeeding step S2104, a process of grasping the current position of the rotating body 201 is executed. More specifically, based on a detection signal from the rotation position detection sensor 196, a process of grasping the position of the V winning opening guide unit 204 in the rotating body 201 is executed. Then, in step S2105, based on the opening / closing timing provisionally set in step S2102, a period during which a game ball can be awarded to the accessory device 150 is grasped. The timing of reaching the deriving unit 186 is grasped, and based on the grasped result, a process of calculating the position of the rotating body 201 when the game ball that has won the accessory device 150 reaches the deriving unit 186 is executed. More specifically, it is assumed that it takes about 1.0 second for the game ball that has won the bonus item device 150 to reach the derivation unit 186 (note that during this period, the winning game device 150 wins). It shows the period of the route in which the game balls reach the derivation unit 186 without being distributed to the distribution members 300 and 310, and this route is also referred to as a normal route in the following description. Is possible, that is, in a period in which the timing is delayed by 1.0 sec from the period temporarily set so that the opening and closing accessory 168 is in the open state, the V winning opening guide unit 204 of the rotating body 201 is in any position. Whether it is arranged is calculated from the detection signal of the rotation position detection sensor 196.

  In a succeeding step S2107, a process of determining whether or not the V winning is possible in the normal route is executed based on the processing result of the step S2106. That is, assuming that the game ball that has won the accessory device 150 reaches the derivation unit 186 as a normal route, the V winning port guide unit 204 of the rotating body 201 can receive the game ball that has reached the derivation unit 186 at that timing. It is determined whether or not it is arranged in. If a negative determination is made in step S2107, that is, if the V prize is not possible on the normal route, the process advances to step S2108 to execute a change lottery process as to whether or not to change the opening / closing timing. In this process, a lottery counter is obtained from the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114, and a lottery table is obtained from the various table storage areas 113d of the ROM 113, and a change lottery of the opening / closing timing is executed based on these. Incidentally, the winning probability of this lottery is set to 10% in the present embodiment.

  In step S2109, it is determined based on the processing result in step S2108 whether or not the change lottery has been won. If the change lottery has not been won, the main opening / closing timing setting process ends. That is, in this case, the opening / closing timing provisionally set in step S2102 is adopted as it is, and the opening / closing of the opening / closing accessory 168 is controlled.

  If it is determined in step S2109 that the change lottery has been won, a first opening / closing timing change process is executed in step S2110. In this process, a process of changing the opening / closing standby time is performed so that the V prize can be made on the normal route. More specifically, the V winning opening guide unit 204 of the rotating body 201 at the present time grasped in step S2105, the period required for the game ball to reach the derivation unit 186 on the normal route (about 1.0 sec), From this, it is calculated at what timing the opening and closing accessory 168 is in the open state, and it is possible to win the bonus to the accessory device 150 at the timing at which the V winning is possible on the normal route. The opening / closing standby time is changed so that the opening / closing accessory 168 is in the open state. Thereafter, the main opening / closing timing setting process ends.

  If it is determined in step S2107 that the V prize is possible on the normal route, the process advances to step S2111. In step S2111, it is determined whether or not there is a possibility that distribution (V distribution) by the second distribution member 310 will be performed by opening the opening and closing accessory 168 at the timing provisionally set in step S2102. . Specifically, if the period in which the opening / closing handpiece 168 is in the open state and the period in which the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state overlap, the second distribution member It is determined that V distribution by 310 may be performed. When it is determined that there is no possibility that V distribution will be performed, that is, when there is a possibility that a V winning will occur on the normal route and there is no possibility that V distribution by the second distribution member 310 will be performed. Ends the main open / close timing setting process. In this case, the opening / closing timing temporarily set in step S2102 is adopted as it is, and the opening / closing of the opening / closing accessory 168 is controlled.

  If it is determined in step S2111 that there is a possibility that V distribution by the second distribution member 310 will be performed, that is, if it is determined that there is a possibility of winning a V in either the normal route or the V distribution. Then, the process proceeds to step S2112. In step S2112, a process of temporarily changing the opening / closing timing (opening / closing standby time) provisionally set in step S2102 is executed. More specifically, for example, the opening / closing timing is temporarily changed such that the opening / closing control is started at a timing delayed by a predetermined period (0.5 sec) from the opening / closing timing provisionally set in step S2102. In a succeeding step S2113, it is determined whether or not the V prize is possible on the normal route when the opening / closing pattern at the opening / closing timing temporarily changed in the step S2112 is set. If it is determined in step S2112 that V prize is not possible on the normal route, that is, even if there is a possibility of V prize in the normal route, V distribution, or V prize at the opening / closing timing provisionally set in step S2102, the process proceeds to step S2113. If the V prize disappears on the normal route at the temporarily changed opening / closing timing, the opening / closing timing setting process is terminated. In this case, the opening / closing timing temporarily changed in step S2112 is not used, and the opening / closing timing provisionally set in step S2102 is adopted as it is, and the opening / closing control of the opening / closing accessory 168 is performed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2113 that the V prize is possible on the normal route even with the opening / closing timing temporarily changed in step S2112, the second opening / closing timing changing process is executed in step S2114. Then, the main opening / closing timing setting process ends. In the second opening / closing timing change process, the opening / closing standby time is set so that the opening / closing pattern temporarily changed in step S2112 is applied (that is, the process of re-inputting the numerical information corresponding to the standby period counter).

  The manner in which the opening / closing timing is changed will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 and 53.

  As shown in FIG. 52 (a), the hold information is digested at the timing of t1, and the opening / closing accessory 168 is displaced to the open state at the timing of t2 and is displaced to the closed state at the timing of t4. It is assumed that the temporary setting has been performed (the process of step S2102). FIG. 52 (a) shows a case where the V distribution by the second distribution member 310 is performed from the timing of t5 to the timing of t6, and there is no overlap with the period when the opening / closing handpiece 168 is in the open state. ing. That is, in this case, there is no possibility of V distribution by the second distribution member 310. However, as a result of the rotation of the rotating body 201 until the game ball that has won the bonus item device 150 reaches the derivation unit 186, the game ball can be led out to the V winning opening guide unit 204 by the derivation unit 186. There is. That is, this is a case where an affirmative determination is made in step S2107 and a negative determination is made in step S2111. In this case, the opening / closing control of the opening / closing accessory 168 is executed at the same opening / closing timing without changing the opening / closing timing provisionally set in step S2102.

  In FIG. 51B, there is no possibility of V distribution by the second distribution member 310 as in the case of FIG. 51A, but unlike in the case of FIG. The case where there is a possibility of winning is shown. That is, this is a case where a negative determination is made in step S2107. In this case, after the change lottery process in step S2108, if the change lottery is won, the first opening / closing timing change process is performed in step S2110.

  In the opening / closing pattern after the change, in the pattern 1, the opening / closing standby time is changed (retarded) from the timing of t2 to the timing of t2.1. Note that the timing of t2.1 is a timing earlier than the overlapping timing with the V winning (the timing from 5 to t6). Then, without changing the period during which the open / close role of the opening / closing accessory 168 is maintained, the timing is later than the timing of t4 and later than the overlapping timing with the V distribution (slower than the timing of t5 to t6). Is displaced to the closed state at the timing of. As a result, the time during which the opening / closing handpiece 168 is in the open state and the time during which the second distribution member 310 can perform V distribution are overlapped.

  The open / close pattern after the change is not limited to the above example, and may be changed as follows.

  In the pattern 2 as the changed opening / closing pattern, the period during which the opening / closing role object 168 is kept open is changed (lengthened) without changing the opening / closing standby time from the timing of t2. Then, the timing at which the opening / closing handpiece 168 is displaced to the open state remains at t2, but the timing to be displaced to the closed state is later than the timing of t4 and later than the overlap timing with the V distribution (from t5 to t6). (Slower than the timing) at the timing of t4.2.

  As the open / close pattern after the change, Pattern 3 shows an example in which both the open / close standby time and the time during which the open / close accessory 168 is kept open are changed. That is, in the pattern 3, the opening / closing standby time is changed to the timing of t2.2 which is later than the timing of t2, and the timing of shifting to the closed state is changed to the timing of t4.2 which is later than the timing of t4. Note that the timing of t2.2 is earlier than the overlapping timing with the V winning (the timing from 5 to t6).

  In pattern 4, as the changed opening / closing pattern, the time during which the opening / closing accessory 168 is opened by changing the number of times of opening / closing overlaps the time during which V distribution by the second distribution member 310 can be performed. Of changing the opening / closing pattern as described above. In this example, the normal release result, which is one open count, is changed to the special open result, which is two open counts described in the second embodiment, so that overlap with the V distribution occurs. An example is shown, in which the opening / closing handpiece 168 that has been displaced to the open state at the timing of t2 is temporarily closed at the timing of t2.3, and is then displaced to the open state again at the timing of t2.4. The timing of t2.4 is earlier than the overlapping timing with the V winning (the timing from 5 to t6). Then, at the timing of t4.2, the opening / closing accessory 168 is displaced to the closed state.

  As the open / close pattern after the change, Pattern 5 shows an example in which the open / close pattern is changed from the positional relationship of the rotating body 201 so that the V prize can be made on the normal route. More specifically, while grasping the position of the V winning opening guide unit 204 of the rotating body 201 at the present time, the V winning opening guide unit 204 of the rotating body 201 reaches the deriving unit 186 from the rotation speed of the rotating body 201. The period is calculated, and based on the calculation result and the time required for the game ball that has won the bonus item device 150 to reach the deriving unit 186, the opening / closing timing at which the V winning is possible on the normal route is calculated backward. For example, the open / close timing is changed so as to be displaced to the open state at the timing of t2.5 as the inversely calculated open / close timing, and then to the closed state at the subsequent timing of t4.3.

  It should be noted that each of the above change patterns is merely an example, and may be changed to another open / close pattern. The point is that any configuration that changes to an opening / closing pattern that increases the possibility of V winning when it is determined that V winning does not occur on the normal route may be used.

  In FIG. 53, when there is a possibility that a V prize may occur in both the normal route and the V distribution by the second distribution member 310, that is, an affirmative determination is made in step S2107 and an affirmative determination is made in step S2111. Shows the case. For example, it is assumed that the temporary setting of the opening / closing timing is performed such that the hold information is digested at the timing of t1, and the opening / closing accessory 168 is displaced to the open state at the timing of t2 and to the closed state at the timing of t6 ( Step S2102). Further, the V distribution by the second distribution member 310 is performed from the timing of t3 to the timing of t4, and overlap with the period in which the opening and closing accessory 168 is in the open state occurs. Further, the V prize port guide section 204 of the rotating body 201 is also arranged at a position where V prize can be performed on the normal route according to the currently provisionally set opening / closing pattern.

  In this case, in step S2112, as the temporary change process, for example, a process of temporarily changing the open / close standby time to the open state at the timing of t2.1 which is delayed by a predetermined time (0.5 sec) is executed. In this example, the timing of t2.1 is later than the timing at which the V distribution is performed (the timing from t3 to t4), and there is no possibility of a V winning due to the V distribution in the opening / closing pattern after the temporary change. Further, after the opening / closing role object 168 is displaced to the open state at the timing of t2.1, it is displaced to the closed state at the timing of t6 in the same manner as described above. That is, in this example, the period during which the open state is maintained is shortened. Then, in step S2113, a process is performed to determine whether or not a V winning in the normal route is possible in the temporarily changed opening / closing pattern based on the position of the V winning opening guide unit 204 of the rotating body 201, and the temporarily changed opening and closing pattern is changed. If it is determined that the V prize is possible with the normal route also in the opening / closing pattern, a second opening / closing timing changing process of setting the temporarily changed opening / closing pattern as the current opening / closing pattern is executed in step S2114. As a result, the opening / closing timing is changed so that only the possibility of V winning on the normal route remains.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the opening / closing timing of the opening / closing accessory 168 is set based on the relationship with the position of the rotating body 201 when the hold information as a predetermined event is consumed. The V winning rate can be changed in consideration of not only the operation patterns of 300 and 310 but also the operation pattern of the rotating body 201, and the opening and closing patterns to be set can be diversified. In this case, only the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing role object 168 is changed without changing the operation pattern of each of the distribution members 300 and 310 and the operation pattern of the rotating body 201, thereby giving an unfair feeling to the player. This makes it possible to ensure fairness of the game.

  Based on the result of grasping the position of the rotator 201, it is determined whether or not the V prize is possible on the normal route, and if not possible, the opening / closing pattern may be changed (the first opening / closing timing change processing is performed). (Can be implemented). This makes it possible to improve the V prize rate by changing the opening / closing pattern, and to make the player expect the opening / closing execution mode.

  In the first opening / closing timing change process, a change lottery process is performed, and when the change lottery is won, the change process is performed. For the change lottery, for example, the winning probability differs depending on a game state or the like. It may be configured. Specifically, the number of storages of the hold information, the number of games played after the opening / closing execution mode (the number of times the holding information is consumed), the number of winnings in the operating ports 38 and 39 after the opening / closing execution mode, and the number of times per unit time The winning probability differs depending on the occurrence rate of the V winning (the occurrence rate of the open / close execution mode), the throwing rate per unit time (the rate of the number of game balls fired and the number of paid prize balls), and the like. It may be.

  If the provisionally set opening / closing pattern is an opening / closing pattern in which V distribution can be performed even if the V winning can be achieved on the normal route, a provisional change process is performed, and after the provisional change by the provisional change process. Even if the V prize is possible on the normal route, the second opening / closing timing changing process for changing to the opening / closing pattern after the provisional change is executed. As a result, when a V prize occurs, it is possible to increase the rate of occurrence on a normal route instead of V distribution. Here, when the game ball reaches the ball distribution unit 185 of the guidance passage 183 after the game ball enters the accessory device 150 and is then distributed to the warp passage 250, if the game ball cannot be distributed to the warp passage 250 (that is, the normal route is not used). The visibility of the game ball is lower than in the case of passing. In other words, when the game balls are distributed to the warp passage 250, the operation mode of the game balls is less visible from the front of the gaming machine than when the game balls are not distributed to the warp passage 250. Further, the game balls distributed to the warp passage 250 are derived so as to win the V prize as they are, while the game balls not distributed to the warp passage 250 are subsequently distributed by the first distribution member 300. Minutes and the distribution by the rotating body 201, a V prize is won. Therefore, from the viewpoint of focusing on the operation mode of the game ball, it is easier to increase the effect of noticing to the warp path 250 than to the warp path 250 rather than to the warp path 250. Therefore, as described above, when both the normal route and the V distribution are possible, the opening / closing timing is changed on condition that V winning can occur on the normal route even after the change. If this is the case, the rate of occurrence of the V prize on the normal route side can be increased, and the interest in the operation mode of the game ball can be increased.

  In the above configuration, after the temporary change, it is determined whether or not the V distribution can occur, that is, whether the time during which the opening / closing handpiece 168 is in the open state and the time during which the V distribution can be performed overlaps. May be determined, and the opening / closing pattern may be changed so that a V prize is possible on the normal route and V distribution is not generated. By doing so, the effect of generating the V prize on the normal route side can be more reliably achieved. However, in this case, there is a concern that the processing load may increase extremely. On the other hand, as in the above configuration, if only the normal route side is to be determined regardless of whether or not the V distribution occurs after the temporary change, it is possible to suppress an increase in the processing load and to increase the normal route. It is possible to obtain the effect of the V prize occurring on the side.

  It should be noted that by performing the second opening / closing timing changing process as described above, the total V winning rate may be reduced. Specifically, since the opening / closing pattern in which the V prize was possible in both the normal route and the V distribution can be changed to the opening / closing pattern in which the V prize can be achieved only in the normal route, the V distribution is performed. , The V winning rate may be lower. Therefore, for example, when such a second opening / closing timing changing process is performed, a configuration may be adopted in which a privilege is given accordingly. Specifically, the opening / closing execution mode generated in the situation where the second opening / closing timing change processing is performed has a configuration in which the 16R continuation mode is easily selected, or when the second opening / closing timing change processing is performed, Thereafter, a configuration in which the probability of performing the first opening / closing timing change process increases (the probability of winning in the change lottery process in step S2108 increases) can be considered. By doing so, the effect of performing the second opening / closing timing change process can be achieved, but the decrease in the V winning rate can be suitably compensated for.

  In the above-described embodiment, an example has been described in which the hold information is digested as the occurrence of the predetermined event in which the operation pattern of each of the distribution members 300 and 310 is set. However, the start of the round game in the open / close execution mode is determined by the predetermined event. May occur. In this case, for example, the opening / closing patterns (A to C) set in each round are set as tentatively set opening / closing patterns, and the possibility of occurrence of a V prize on the normal route in the tentatively set opening / closing pattern is grasped. Alternatively, the provisionally set total closing pattern may be changed.

  In this case, for example, in the change lottery process, the winning probability may be different depending on the number of rounds in the opening / closing execution mode, or the winning probability may be different depending on the opening / closing count (RC2) in one round. For example, if the number of times of opening and closing in one round is set so that the winning probability is lower when the number of times of opening and closing is small than in the case where the number of times of opening and closing is large, a V prize is generated with a small number of times of opening and closing in one round, and It is possible to suppress the occurrence of an event that the round is completed when the number is less than the predetermined value.

  In addition, as a privilege for compensating for a decrease in the V winning rate due to the execution of the second opening / closing timing changing process, the number of times the second opening / closing timing changing process is performed during one round may be changed to a subsequent change lottery process. A configuration that increases the probability of winning may be adopted. That is, the more the second opening / closing timing changing process is performed, the easier the first opening / closing timing changing process is performed, and it is assumed that the V prize rate decreases at the time of opening and closing when the second opening / closing timing changing process is performed. In addition, it is possible to raise the interest in the operation mode of the game ball while increasing the subsequent V winning rate and keeping the round continuation rate from lowering (while increasing the round continuation rate).

  As described above, in the configuration in which the round continuation rate is changed according to the number of times the second opening / closing timing changing process is performed, the change lottery in the one round is determined based on the number of times the second opening / closing timing changing process is performed during one round. With a configuration in which the winning probability of the process is increased, the probability that a V prize (continuation of the round) will occur when the rear side is opened and closed in one round can be made higher than when the front side is opened and closed. This not only prevents the inconvenience that the number of rounds is updated due to the continuation of the rounds early in each round, but also the expectation of V prize of the normal route at the stage where the number of times of opening and closing in one round is small. In this way, a novel game can be realized in which the operation mode of the game ball is enjoyed, and the number of times of opening and closing increases and the V distribution is likely to occur as the round approaches the end.

  In a configuration in which the round continuation rate is changed according to the number of times the second opening / closing timing change process is performed, the number of times the second opening / closing timing change process is performed is reflected in the winning probability of the change lottery process in the next and subsequent rounds. With this configuration, when the player wins the V on the normal route (continues the round), it is more advantageously handled afterward than when the player wins the V by the V distribution (continues the round). It is possible to bring more interest. For example, based on the fact that the number of times the second opening / closing timing change process has been performed is equal to or more than a predetermined number, the winning probability of the change lottery process may be increased in a subsequent round, or the high probability of continuous change in the subsequent round may be adopted. A configuration may be adopted in which the probability of selecting the opening / closing pattern A that becomes the ratio increases.

  In addition, not only the number of times the second opening / closing timing change process is performed, but also the number of times that a V winning (continuation of round) occurs after the second opening / closing timing change process is performed is reflected in the subsequent round continuation rate. It may be.

<Other embodiments>
Note that the present invention is not limited to the content described in each of the above-described embodiments, and may be implemented as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above embodiments, or some or all of them may be combined and applied to each of the above embodiments. Further, all or some of the various configurations described in the above embodiments can be arbitrarily combined. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effect to be exhibited) of each component to be combined is ensured. The following configurations may be individually applied to a new configuration formed by a combination of the embodiments, or some or all of them may be applied in combination.

  (1) In each of the above-described embodiments, the winning in the accessory device 150 can be performed based on the winning in the operating ports 38 and 39, and the opening and closing execution mode is performed when the winning game ball further wins in the V winning opening 182a. In the gaming machine which shifts to, the operation of the game ball in the accessory device 150 is configured to be changed by each of the distribution members 300 and 310 and the rotating body 201, but the operation of the game ball in the accessory device 150 is changed. The configuration to be changed is not limited to the above. For example, a configuration that does not include at least one of the distribution members 300 and 310 or a configuration that does not include the rotating body 201 may be used. In short, in a configuration in which the gaming balls won in the accessory device 150 are distributed to the V winning opening 182a or the outgoing opening 182b, it is sufficient that the distribution is distributed by the distribution unit where a predetermined operation is performed. .

  (2) In each of the above-described embodiments, the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing accessory 168 is changed to change the winning timing to the accessory device 150, but the point is that the winning timing to the accessory device 150 is changed. It is only necessary that the V prize rate can be changed by changing the V prize rate. The V prize rate is changed not by the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing accessory 168 but by the operation pattern of another accessory. It may be configured. However, assuming that the other accessory is an accessory in the accessory device 150, an event occurs in which the player does not win V due to a change in the operation pattern of the other accessory even though the player has won the inside of the accessory device 150. May give the player a sense of inequity. Therefore, it is preferable that the other accessory is an item outside the accessory device 150 that changes a winning timing to the accessory device 150.

  (3) The start of the operation of the distribution members 300 and 310 is set to the opening timing of the opening / closing accessory 168. However, another timing may be used as long as a predetermined specific event (predetermined event) occurs. . That is, the timing may be the start timing of a round game, or the timing at which a predetermined period has elapsed since the opening and closing of the opening / closing accessory 168 or the start of the round game.

  (4) In the first embodiment, in the opening / closing execution mode of the continuation rate variation mode, the eighth round is the opening / closing pattern B, and the eleventh round is the opening / closing pattern C, and the continuation rate is reduced in these rounds. The configuration of the opening and closing pattern in each round is not limited to the above. For example, all rounds after a predetermined round such as the eighth round may be low-continuation rounds such as the opening / closing pattern B, or all rounds up to the predetermined round may be low-continuation rounds and high-continuation rounds after the predetermined round may be performed. A round (opening / closing pattern A) may be used. Further, an opening / closing pattern that is easier to continue than the opening / closing pattern A (higher V winning probability) or an opening / closing pattern that is harder to continue than B and C (low V winning probability) may be set. By including these rounds of the opening and closing patterns in the opening and closing patterns of each round, the opening and closing patterns can be diversified.

  Further, the opening and closing patterns of all rounds may be configured to be the opening and closing patterns (opening and closing patterns B and C) that are difficult to continue. In this case, all rounds may be set as the opening / closing pattern B, all rounds may be set as the opening / closing pattern C, or may be set as the opening / closing patterns that are harder to continue than the opening / closing patterns B and C, or may be a combination of these. Good.

  Further, conversely, the opening / closing pattern of all rounds may be an opening / closing pattern (opening / closing pattern A) that is easy to continue.

  Note that the opening / closing execution mode configured by each of the above opening / closing patterns may be changed from the opening / closing execution mode of the opening / closing execution mode of the continuation rate variation mode in the first embodiment, or all or any of the opening / closing execution modes may be changed. May be added, or the respective open / close execution modes may be combined and added to the first embodiment.

  (5) In the above-described second embodiment, the V winning probability is changed by changing the opening / closing pattern (opening / closing based on winning in the second operating port 39) twice. The pattern may be changed, or the number of times of opening and closing may be changed. For example, in a configuration in which a single opening / closing pattern is changed, the opening time is set so that an operation pattern is not easily distributed to the V winning side by the distribution members 300 and 310 in a normal release result, and a predetermined result is obtained. In this case, the opening time of the opening / closing accessory may be changed without changing the operation pattern of the distribution members 300 and 310 so as to facilitate the distribution to the V winning side.

  (6) As in the second embodiment, as a configuration in which the V winning probability is changed (the opening / closing pattern is changed) depending on the game result, the result of the change (special opening A result or special opening B result) depending on the game state. May be different.

  (7) The configuration for improving the V winning probability has been described in detail as a configuration for changing the V winning probability by changing the opening / closing pattern. However, a configuration for decreasing the V winning probability may be employed.

  (8) Even if the distribution members 300 and 310 are not provided, by making the opening / closing patterns different, even if an opening / closing pattern that almost wins a V when the player wins the character device 150 (is distributed to the V winning side) is provided. Good. In this case, the rotation position of the rotating body 201 may be grasped, and the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing accessory 168 may be determined. Also in this configuration, the V winning probability can be changed without changing the operation pattern of the rotating body 201.

  (9) The following configuration is also conceivable as a configuration for changing the opening / closing pattern by grasping the rotational position of the rotating body 201 to change the V winning probability.

  As a game result (result table) based on winning in the operating ports 38 and 39, a special opening C result capable of changing an opening / closing pattern is provided. When the special opening C result is obtained, the position of the rotating body 201 is grasped based on the detection result of the rotation position detection sensor 196. For example, when the game ball that has won the bonus item device 150 is not distributed to the distribution members 300 and 310, a period from the derivation unit 186 to the concave portion 182 (the ball guide unit 202) is defined as an arrival period. Then, the opening / closing timing of the opening / closing accessory 168 is set based on the relationship between the arrival period and the period during which the V winning opening guide unit 204 rotates to the position corresponding to the deriving unit 186. In this way, a pattern in which the V winning is likely to occur when the opening / closing role object 168 is opened can be set without changing the operation pattern of the rotating body 201.

  (10) In each of the above embodiments, the game ball that has won the accessory device 150 requires about 0.3 seconds to reach the position to be distributed by the second distribution member 310, and the first distribution member The passage length is set so that it takes about 0.2 sec from the position on the second distribution member 310 side to reach the position to be distributed by 300, but this configuration may be changed. As described above, depending on the relationship between the period in which the opening / closing accessory 168 is in the open / closed state and the period in which each of the distribution members 300 and 310 is in the distribution state, the probability of being distributed to the off side. It is also possible to change the probability of being assigned to the V winning side.

  (11) In the above embodiment, the mode of support by the electric accessory 39a is set so as not to be different, but a plurality of types of support modes may be set so that the mode of support is different. More specifically, for example, as a support mode, when compared in a situation where the launch of game balls is continued in the same manner with respect to the game area, the electric accessory 39a of the second operating port 39 is opened per unit period. The low-frequency support mode (or the low-frequency guide state) and the high-frequency support mode (or the high-frequency guide state) are set so that the frequency of the state becomes relatively high and low.

  In the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning in the electric-power-opening state in the motor-powered object opening lottery using the electric-powered object opening counter C4 is the same (for example, both are 4/5). In the high frequency support mode, the number of times the electric accessory 39a is opened when the electrification is released is set to be greater than in the low frequency support mode, and one open period is set longer. ing. In this case, in the high-frequency support mode, when the open state of the electric role is elected in the high frequency support mode and the open state of the electric accessory 39a occurs a plurality of times, the close from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state is performed. The period is set shorter than one open period. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the securing period (ie, the minimum securing period after the one electric-power-item opening lottery is performed and then the next electric-power-object opening lottery is performed than in the low-frequency support mode) One display continuation period in the accessory display unit 44) is set short.

  As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability that a winning in the second operating port 39 will occur is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. Therefore, the probability that the accessory device 150 will be in the open state is increased, and the probability of V winning (the occurrence of a big hit) is also increased. Further, as in the above-described second embodiment, in the configuration in which the first operation port 38 and the second operation port 39 differ not only in the number of times of opening and closing of the opening and closing accessory 168 but also in the game result (big hit type), In a mode in which the winning probability of the second operating port 39 is increased (high-frequency support mode), the game result set for the second operating port 39 (big hit type, special opening A and B in the second embodiment). The probability increases. Furthermore, if a prize is frequently generated in the second operating port 39, a prize ball accompanying the frequent prize can be frequently obtained, and the player does not decrease the number of balls in the high-frequency support mode. You can play while playing. As described above, the advantage can be changed by utilizing the level of the support mode, and diversification of the game can be achieved.

  Note that the configuration for increasing the frequency of the electric utility opening state per unit period in the high-frequency support mode more than the low-frequency support mode is not limited to the above-described configuration. It is good also as a structure which makes the probability of electrification open state winning high in. In addition, a securing period (for example, based on a prize in the through gate 41, the display for the accessory) is secured after one electric accessory opening lottery is performed and then the next electric accessory opening lottery is performed. In a configuration in which a plurality of types of variable display are executed, a shorter securing period is more easily selected in the high frequency support mode than in the low frequency support mode, or the average securing period is set shorter. It may be. Further, increasing the number of times of opening, lengthening the opening period, and shortening the securing period secured after the next electric accessory opening lottery is performed after one electric accessory opening lottery is performed. The advantage of the high frequency support mode over the low frequency support mode may be enhanced by applying any one of the conditions for shortening the average period of the securing period and increasing the winning probability, or any combination of the conditions. .

  (12) In the second embodiment, the first operation port 38 and the second operation port 39 are configured such that the result tables of the game results are different from each other, so that the degree of advantage is increased or decreased. As in the embodiment, the same result table may be used. Specifically, a special opening A result or a special opening B result may be provided in the result table for the first working port. In this case, despite the fact that the first operating port 38 is awarded, the opening is substantially performed twice, so that the player feels good, and in the special opening A result and the special opening B result, Since the probability of winning a V is increased, even if it is difficult to win the second operating port 39, it is expected that a special opening A result or the like will be obtained by winning on the first operating port 38 side. It becomes possible.

  (13) In the above embodiments, the description is given on the premise that the hold information is acquired based on the winning of each of the operating ports 38 and 39, and the hold information is stored up to a predetermined number (four each). However, a configuration in which the hold information is not stored may be adopted. In this way, the configuration can be simplified. However, in the configuration in which the hold information is not stored as described above, for example, when the winning of the operating ports 38 and 39 occurs again during the control of the accessory device 150 based on the winning of the operating ports 38 and 39, and the like. , Because the opening and closing role 168 is not opened for the prize in the operating ports 38 and 39, the player may feel lost, and the interest in the game decreases. It could be. In the above-described embodiment, not only the accessory device 150 but also the operating ports 38 and 39 can be awarded during the opening / closing execution mode. Therefore, in the configuration on the side where the hold information is stored, the corresponding hold information is consumed after the open / close execution mode, and if a V prize is generated by opening / closing of the opening / closing accessory 168 accompanying the consumption of the hold information, the open / close operation is performed. The execution mode will be extended. As a result, the game can be premised on the occurrence of the extended villa, and the interest of the game can be improved. However, as the predetermined state, for example, when the winning operation to the operating ports 38, 39 occurs during the control of the accessory device 150 or during the opening / closing execution mode, the hold information is acquired, and in other cases, May not be configured to acquire the hold information. By doing so, it is possible to suppress giving a sense of loss to the player when a prize occurs in the operating ports 38 and 39 during the control of the accessory device 150 or the opening / closing execution mode as described above. .

  Further, a configuration may be adopted in which a special opening A result or a special opening B result is easily obtained as a game result of the hold information acquired during the above-described predetermined state. Generally, the player expects a prize to the opening and closing accessory 168 while the opening and closing accessory 168 is open. Then, if the opening / closing role 168 is not opened and the winning combination does not win, the holding information is acquired as described above. However, it can be expected that a prize will be made to the working ports 38 and 39. Further, if the game result based on the winning is a special opening A result or a special opening B result (a result of an opening / closing pattern in which a V winning is likely to occur) as described above, the opening / closing role is opened while the opening / closing role object 168 is open. It is possible to achieve a novel game in which a prize is expected not only on the object 168 side but also on the operating ports 38 and 39. By doing so, it is possible to further improve the interest.

  (14) In the above embodiment, the opening and closing patterns of the opening and closing accessory 168 are made different, such as the opening and closing patterns A1 to A2, B1 to B3, C1 to C2, and the special opening A result and the special opening B result. Although the V winning probability is changed without changing the operation pattern of each of the driving units 300, 310, and 201 in the device 150, the opening / closing pattern and the operation pattern of each of the driving units 300, 310, and 201 are examples. Therefore, a configuration in which the V winning probability is changed by a combination of other patterns may be adopted.

  (15) In the second embodiment, the first winning start timing of the opening / closing accessory 168 in the special opening A result or the special opening B result does not differ from other cases (normal opening result), and the V winning probability is obtained. Is changed, the V opening probability may be changed by changing the first opening start timing. In this case, for example, in the case of the special opening A result or the special opening B result, regardless of the opening type counter CS, the opening timing according to the operation pattern of each of the driving units 300, 310, and 201 in the accessory device 150 is determined. It may be configured to be set. If this opening timing is notified, for example, by the symbol display device 51 or the like (character display such as “Please win after XX seconds!”), The degree of attention to the game can be further increased. On the other hand, if the opening timing is not notified (notifying only that the result is a special opening A or B result such as "Chance if winning"!), It is possible to suppress aiming and shooting, and to win V based on the skill of the player. Eliminating high and low rates can ensure the fairness of the game.

  (16) In each of the above embodiments, the main control device 81 detects a fraudulent activity by a detecting means (sensor) and a means for executing a corresponding process based on the detection result (for example, a normally activated (Added as one of the processes). In particular, in the above-described embodiment, the opening / closing execution mode is started by the V prize on the accessory device 150, and the round game can be continued by the V prize, so that the act of illegally generating the V prize on the accessory device 150 is performed. is assumed. For example, this action may be based on magnetism, radio waves, or vibrations. A detection sensor that detects these (magnetism, radio waves, vibrations, etc.) is provided, and the progress of the game is stopped based on the detection results of the detection sensors. And a notification, and further a notification (external output) to the game hall. Further, in the second embodiment, since the opening / closing pattern in which the V winning probability is increased is set, the opening / closing pattern, that is, the winning in the second operating port 39 (detection of the sensor 39c) is illegal. The winning at the second operating port 39 (detection of the sensor 39c) at a timing when the special opening A result or the special opening B result is likely to occur by reading the update cycle of the jackpot random number counter C1 by some method or by reading the updating cycle of the jackpot random number counter C1 by some method. It is also supposed that the action that occurs in the event is generated. That is, by providing a configuration that suppresses an act of illegally generating an opening / closing pattern that increases the probability of V winning as described above (detection sensors for magnetism, radio waves, vibration, and the like, and means for performing processing based on the detection results), It is possible to suppress the act of illegally generating the prize while raising the winning probability and improving the interest.

  (17) In the case of the configuration in which the height of the support state by the electric accessory 39a is not provided as in each of the above embodiments, the configuration may be such that the electric accessory 39a and the through gate 41 are not provided. In this way, the configuration can be simplified.

  (18) In each of the above embodiments, when a V prize occurs in the opening / closing control during the normal gaming state, a V winning flag is set (step S1104), the opening / closing control ends, and the opening / closing execution mode is continued. Is started, but the opening / closing control may be continued even if a V winning occurs. With this configuration, a winning in the accessory device 150 can occur even after the V winning during the opening / closing control, and even if the winning is likely to occur in the accessory device 150 (that is, a privilege based on the bonus, a prize ball). Is likely to be obtained), it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an event that makes it impossible to win a prize to the accessory device 150 due to the occurrence of a V prize and makes the player feel lost. On the other hand, when the V prize is generated, the occurrence timing of the V prize and the generation timing of the opening / closing execution mode are closer to each other in the configuration in which the notification is immediately made and the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode. It becomes clear whether or not the ball has generated a V winning and the mode has shifted to the open / close execution mode, and as a result, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the operation mode of the game ball. Therefore, in order to solve these conflicting problems, for example, the operation pattern of the rotating body 201 and the distribution members 300 and 310 is grasped, and in the opening / closing control based on one hold information, a prize to the accessory device 150 is obtained. The opening / closing pattern may be set such that the V winning rate is higher when the event occurs at a later timing (second timing) than when it occurs at the earlier timing (first timing). In this way, the V prize is more likely to occur at a later timing in one opening / closing control in the first place, and after the V prize has occurred, the prize may further occur to the accessory device 150. It can be made less likely to occur itself.

  (19) The timing at which the V winning occurs may be set in relation to the firing cycle of the game balls. More specifically, for example, assuming a configuration in which the opening and closing accessory 168 in the accessory device 150 is maintained over a period (for example, 0.3 sec) shorter than the firing cycle (0.6 sec) of the game ball, During the period in which the open state is maintained, winning in the accessory device 150 is less likely to occur. However, for example, even if a period shorter than the launch cycle of the game ball is set as a period for maintaining the open state, depending on the timing of launch of the game ball, the ball arrives at the accessory device 150 in a situation where it is just in the open state. In some cases, they may get (win). As described above, when a prize is won in the accessory device 150, the V winning rate changes depending on the operation patterns of the distribution members 300 and 310 and the rotating body 201 in the accessory device 150. Therefore, in the opening / closing timing setting process, the firing cycle of the game ball is grasped, and based on the firing cycle, the possibility of winning in the accessory device 150 is grasped, and the V winning rate is changed based on the grasp. The opening and closing pattern may be set so as to cause the opening and closing.

  (20) The entrance sensors 179 may be provided in correspondence with the left and right opening and closing objects 168, respectively. That is, in each of the above-described embodiments, the same entrance sensor 179 is used to detect a winning combination from any of the opening / closing auditoriums 168 to the accessory device 150. However, separate entrance sensors are provided. It is good also as composition which detects winning of a game ball with a separate entrance sensor. In this way, when a prize has occurred in the accessory device 150, the prize can be detected more quickly, and in a configuration in which the V prize rate differs depending on the left and right prize paths, the corresponding notification ( For example, when a prize is won from the prize path on the side where the V prize is easy to be won, the effect can be notified. More specifically, in the above-described embodiment, the first distribution member 300 is provided on the left side in the guidance passage 183. For example, the rate of distribution to the left guidance passage 183 differs depending on the left and right winning paths. In such a case, it is considered that a player who wins a prize from a prize route with a high rate of distribution to the right guiding passage 183 is more interested in the player. Therefore, if the winning is announced after the winning, the player does not need to always pay attention to the operation of the game ball, and can enjoy the game at ease. In such a configuration in which the V prize rate differs depending on the left and right prize paths, the opening / closing timing of the opening / closing role object 168 and the opening / closing timing of the opening / closing accessory 168 can be changed without changing the operation patterns of the distribution members 300 and 310 and the rotating body 201 as in the above embodiment. By applying the invention of changing the V prize rate by making the opening / closing pattern different, the V prize rate can be changed more strictly, and the game can be diversified.

  (21) In each of the above embodiments, the game ball to which the second distribution member 310 has performed the distribution (V distribution) always wins the V, but a part of the game ball wins on the off side. Is also good.

  (22) As a result of the success / failure determination (game result), a special opening result, a special opening result, and a special opening B result having the same opening frequency but different opening / closing patterns are provided in addition to a normal opening result, a departure result, and a direct hit result. However, other results may be provided. For example, the number of times of opening is different (the result of opening twice in the result table for the first working port, the result of opening once in the result table for the second working port), or the same number of times of opening but opening A result in which the state is maintained for a different period (a result longer than usual or a result shorter) may be provided. Even if these results are used, the V winning rate can be adjusted based on the relationship between the period during which the open state is maintained in the results and the operation patterns of the distribution members 300 and 310 and the rotating body 201.

  (23) In the normal gaming state, the opening / closing pattern is configured to be different using the result (game result) of the hit / fail determination, but the following configuration may be applied. For example, a counter for determining whether or not the game is accepted and a counter for determining the type of the game result are provided. Then, in the determination using the counter for performing the hit / fail determination, it is determined only whether or not to open the game, and in the determination using the counter for determining the type of the game result, the type of the opening / closing pattern (that is, the second implementation Whether it is normal opening or special opening as in the form). With this configuration, the processing configuration of each determination process can be simplified. For example, in a configuration in which the prefetch notification is performed using the hold information, only the release result is used as the prefetch notification. With the configuration for performing the notification, it is sufficient to read only the counter for determining whether or not the suspension information is valid, and the configuration related to the pre-reading notification can be simplified.

  (24) As the hold information, the jackpot type counter C2 is acquired at the time of winning the operating ports 38 and 39, and the type of the open / close execution mode (the jackpot type) is determined using the jackpot type counter C2. A configuration may be adopted in which a counter for determining the type of the open / close execution mode at the time of winning a V is obtained, and the type of the open / close execution mode is determined based on the counter. In this way, it is possible to omit the process of acquiring the counter to be used at the time of winning a prize at the time of winning at the operating ports 38 and 39 even if no V prize has occurred, thereby simplifying the processing configuration. Can be achieved. However, for example, when the open / close pattern is determined, the type of the open / close execution mode at the time of the V prize is reflected. For example, in the 16R continuation mode, the V prize rate is increased / lowered. If the V winning rate is increased / decreased if present, a configuration in which a jackpot type counter C2 for determining the type of the open / close execution mode is preferably acquired as the hold information. In addition, a configuration for notifying the type of the opening / closing execution mode when a V-prize is won at the time of execution of the opening / closing control or at the time of the opening / closing control corresponding to the hold information in the pre-reading notification (for example, “Get 16R continuous mode if hit here! ), It is more preferable that the jackpot type counter C2 for determining the type of the open / close execution mode is acquired as the hold information.

  (25) In each of the above embodiments, the opening / closing execution mode is started by detecting the V winning in the winning process in the game control process. However, the following may be changed. That is, the first round in the opening / closing execution mode is started based on the winning in the operating ports 38 and 39, and in the game control process, the continuation of the first round is determined based on the occurrence of the V winning. I do. In this case, in the first round (RC1) of the opening / closing execution mode based on the winning in the first operating port 38, a round game in which the number of times of opening (RC2) is one is easy to be executed, and the winning in the second operating port 39 is achieved. In the first round (RC1) of the opening / closing execution mode based on, a round game with two opening times (RC2) is easily executed. Then, in each of the opening and closing times of the first round of the opening and closing execution mode based on winning in each of the operating ports 38 and 39, the opening and closing role object 168 without changing the operation patterns of the distribution members 300 and 310 and the rotating body 201. By changing the opening / closing pattern of the game, the V winning ratio is changed and the continuation rate of the round game is changed. Even in this case, it is possible to achieve unique effects due to the above-described characteristic configurations.

  (26) In each of the above-described embodiments, the order in which the hold information based on winning in the first operating port 38 and the hold information based on winning in the second operating port 39 (the order in which the success / failure determination is performed) is determined. Although the hold information based on the winning in the second operating port 39 has a higher priority, the acquisition order of the hold information may be adopted. For example, it is more advantageous to determine whether or not the hold information is based on winning in the second operating port 39 than to determine whether or not the hold information is based on winning in the first operating port 38 (an open / close pattern in which a V winning is likely to occur is more advantageous). In the configuration in which (can be set) is performed, there is a feeling that the player wants to execute the determination as to whether or not the hold information based on the winning in the second operating port 39 first as in the above embodiment, There is also a desire to postpone this (after setting the opening / closing pattern in which the V winning is likely to occur), and to first determine whether or not the hold information is valid based on winning in the first operating port 38. By leaving such a swinging feeling of the player in a random order that the player does not intend, such as a winning order to the first operating port 38 or the second operating port 39, the game is made more diverse. It becomes possible.

  In addition, when a configuration in which the winning rate to the second operating port 39 is made different by using the level of the support mode of the electric accessory 39a is applied, the holding based on the winning to the second operating port 39 as in each of the above-described embodiments. In the configuration in which the determination of the success or failure of the information is prioritized, since the winning in the second operating port 39 frequently occurs, the order of the determination of the success or failure of the hold information based on the winning in the first operating port 38 can be continued to be reduced. The difference between the timing of winning the first operation port 38 and the timing of determining whether or not the hold information is based on the winning can be large. If the difference between the winning timing and the timing of the winning or losing judgment becomes large, for example, even if an illegal act such as performing a winning or losing judgment is performed even though no prize has occurred, the administrator of the gaming hall may notify the player. It can be difficult to spot it. Then, there is an inconvenience that the detection of the wrongdoing is delayed, so that the wrongdoing can be easily performed. Therefore, if the winning / non-winning determination is made in the winning order as described above, it is possible to minimize the difference between the winning timing and the winning / non-winning determination timing, and consequently it is possible to prevent improper behavior. Become.

  (27) As an example, a description has been given of a configuration in which the number of pending information based on winning in each of the operating ports 38, 39 is stored with an upper limit of four, but may be less than three or five. Or more, and the upper limit storage number of the hold information based on winning in each of the operating ports 38 and 39 may be different from each other. For example, each of the operating ports 38 and 39 may be configured to be able to store one piece of hold information. In this way, for example, the possibility that a rendezvous after the opening and closing execution mode is induced due to excessive storage of the hold information during the opening and closing execution mode is reduced, and the range of increase and decrease in the number of pitches is reduced to provide a mild playability. It becomes possible.

  (28) The reserved light emitting units 54 to 56 may be displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51. Although the symbol display device 51 is configured to be provided on the upper part of the accessory device 150, the player operates the game ball centering on the accessory device 150 such as a prize in the accessory device 150 and a subsequent V prize. It is considered that the user has a high interest in the aspect, and if the number of the pending information is displayed at a location close to the location of the interest (that is, the display screen G), it naturally enters the field of view. it is conceivable that. In this way, it is possible to consolidate the information and to make the game easier to understand, as compared with a configuration in which different notifications are made using various places. However, in each of the above embodiments, when the mode is shifted to the open / close execution mode, the type (15R continuous mode, continuous fluctuation mode) is notified on the display screen G, and the display screen G notifies the held number. With this configuration, when notifying the type of the opening / closing execution mode, the display of the information of the number of held units is erased, or the type of the opening / closing execution mode is notified while the information of the number of held units is left. In the former case, when the type of the opening / closing execution mode is being notified, it may be inconvenient that it is not possible to check the number of the hold information, and in the latter case, the effect area is reduced. Thus, there is a possibility that the notification of the type of the opening / closing execution mode itself may be plain. Thus, for example, if the display screen G is configured to display the number of the hold information while having the hold light emitting units 54 to 56, even if the display of the number of the hold information is deleted on the display screen G, Can be confirmed by the reserved light emitting units 54 to 56, and various kinds of information can be suitably displayed according to the timing.

  (29) In the above embodiments, in the game control process, the subsequent hold information is not digested when the accessory is in the control state, but may be changed as follows. In other words, during the accessory control state, it is determined whether or not a prize of a game ball to the accessory device 150 has occurred, and whether or not the game ball has been detected by the V winning sensor 192 or the sensor 193 for detachment, That is, it is determined whether or not the game ball that has won the accessory device 150 is still present in the accessory device 150. If the game ball exists in the accessory device 150, the opening / closing accessory 168 is closed and the accessory is opened. Even if the control state is completed, the following suspension information is not digested. By doing so, a consciousness of watching the winning of each of the accessory devices 150 more carefully is created, and as a result, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

  (30) In each of the above-described embodiments, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode based on the occurrence of the V prize in the accessory device 150. In the opening / closing execution mode, the prize to the accessory device 150 is easily generated. However, the opening and closing execution mode may be executed by another prize device. For example, a variable ball-entering device capable of displacing a game ball flowing down the game area between an open state in which the ball can enter and a closed state in which ball entry is impossible or difficult to enter is provided, and V to the accessory device 150 is provided. The main control device 81 is configured to control the variable ball-in device to be in an open state based on the occurrence of a prize or the like. The opening and closing execution mode of the 16R continuation mode may be executed by the variable winning device, or the opening and closing execution mode of the continuous fluctuation mode may be executed by the variable winning device. In the former case, in the continuous fluctuation mode, the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing accessory 168 is made different in the same manner as in the above-described embodiments, so that the V winning rate in the accessory device 150 is made different, and the continuation rate of the round game is adjusted. It is possible. In the latter case, the variable winning device is provided with a V winning opening and a winning winning opening, and an upstream portion of each winning opening is provided with a distribution unit for distributing the winning to each winning opening. The allocating unit is operated in a predetermined operation pattern to distribute the gaming balls that have won the variable prize device to the V winning opening and the off winning opening. Then, as the continuous fluctuation mode, the switching timing between the open state and the closed state is changed so as to change the prize timing to the variable prize device without changing the operation pattern of the distribution unit, and the V prize opening is performed. Adjust the winning rate of. In this way, instead of or in addition to the configuration in which the continuation rate of the round game is changed in the accessory device 150, it is also possible to realize this by using another winning device.

  (31) The game ball to which the V distribution is performed by the second distribution member 310 is led out to the warp passage 250 as an area where the visibility from the front of the gaming machine is lower than that, but the gaming machine A configuration in which a V prize is generated by passing through a region where the visibility from the front does not change, or a configuration in which a V prize is generated by passing through a region in which the visibility from the front of the gaming machine is improved may be employed. In this way, it is possible not only to reduce the visibility of the game ball but also to easily confirm that the V-allocation has been performed by the subsequent operation mode of the game ball. In particular, in a configuration such as the pachinko machine 10 in which the greatest attention is paid to whether or not a V prize is generated, it is easier to enhance the degree of attention by making the V distribution more prominent. It is considered to be. Therefore, if the configuration is such that the visibility from the front of the gaming machine does not decrease (does not change / improves) at the time of V distribution as in the above configuration, the subsequent operation of the game ball can be fully recognized, It is preferable for increasing the degree of attention.

  However, from the viewpoint of suppressing the action of aiming and shooting so that the V distribution is intentionally generated, the visibility of the game ball after the V distribution is performed, and the location where the V distribution is performed ( It is preferable that the visibility of the region (where the second distribution member 310 is provided) is not excessively enhanced.

  In that regard, in each of the above embodiments, the V distribution by the second distribution member 310 having relatively low visibility from the front of the gaming machine and the first distribution member 300 having relatively high visibility from the front of the gaming machine. Since the V winning rate is changed by the combination of the off-allocation and the operation patterns of the both allocation members 300 and 310, the first allocation member 300 prevents inconvenience due to a decrease in visibility from the front of the gaming machine. It is possible to cover the inconvenience due to the improved visibility from the front of the gaming machine with the second distribution member 310 while covering the two, and to coexist with both, thereby compensating for the inconvenience of high and low visibility. Has become.

  (32) The game balls that have won the accessory device 150 are discharged to the outside of the accessory device 150 through the V winning passage 191a or the release passage 191b, and the discharged game balls are passed through a discharge passage (not shown) to the pachinko machine. Although it is configured to be discharged to the outside of the game device 10, it may be configured to be discharged to the game area as the outside of the accessory device 150.

  (33) By changing the opening / closing standby time or the fluctuation display time of the game times, the distribution members 300 and 310 and the rotating body 201 of the rotator 201 from the time when the hold information is exhausted or the opening / closing execution mode ends as the occurrence of the predetermined event. The V winning rate in the accessory device 150 is changed without changing the operation pattern. However, as in the second embodiment, the opening and closing pattern of the double opening is the first and second opening states. The configuration in which the period during which is maintained is different, and the configuration in which the standby time between the first and second open states and the open state is changed is applied individually or in combination, so that the V winning rate can be increased. The configuration may be changed.

  (34) In the ninth embodiment, the variable display time is shortened as the number of common reservations CRN increases, and as a result, the overlap with the V distribution is likely to occur. However, the timing at which the V distribution is performed May be set to be late, and the longer the variable display time, the more likely it is that the overlap with the V distribution occurs. In this case, the variable display time may be configured to be longer as the number of common reservations CRN is greater, or the period during which the open / close accessory 168 is maintained in the open state is set to be longer as the number of common reservations CRN is greater. A configuration in which the overlap with the minute easily occurs may be adopted.

  (35) In the ninth embodiment, the variable display time is set according to the common hold number CRN regardless of the game state. Other modes may be set.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 54 (a), as the jackpot type, a jackpot result for shifting to the open / close execution mode of the 2R continuation mode is set in addition to the 16R continuation mode and the continuous fluctuation mode in each of the above embodiments. . The open / close execution mode of the 2R continuation mode is an open / close execution mode in which a round game is performed only twice (or only once). For example, even if a continuation condition is satisfied after a V prize in the second round, the open / close execution mode is not changed. Shall end. Therefore, it is assumed that the open / close execution mode of the 2R continuation mode obtains less prize balls than the other open / close execution modes.

  FIG. 54B is a flowchart showing a process of setting the variable display time according to this modification. The variable display time setting process is a process executed in step S1706 of the game control process (FIG. 45).

  First, in step S2201, it is determined whether the current game state is the special mode. The special mode is a mode that is set when the previous opening / closing execution mode is the above-described 2R continuation mode, and is set in the end processing (step S1215) of the opening / closing execution mode in the game state transition processing (FIG. 23). Is done. If the current game state is not the special mode, a process of setting a predetermined time (for example, 0.7 sec) as a variable display time in step S2202 is executed, and the setting process ends. In this case, if a winning in the accessory device 150 occurs immediately after the opening operation of the opening and closing accessory 168 starts, a V distribution can occur, but otherwise, no V distribution occurs.

  On the other hand, if the current gaming state is the special mode, the variable display time (see FIG. 46A) according to the common hold number CRN is set in step S2203, and then the setting processing ends. As described above, the variable display time in which the V distribution is likely to occur can be selected as the number of common reservations CRN increases. During the opening / closing execution mode, the common hold number CRN tends to increase (suspension information is easily accumulated). Therefore, by setting the special mode, the occurrence rate of the opening / closing execution mode increases.

  In this way, even after the opening / closing execution mode of the 2R continuation mode, which is not advantageous for the player, it is easier to shift to the opening / closing execution mode thereafter, and the inconvenient compensation can be performed.

  In the above configuration, in the 2R continuation mode, even if a V prize occurs during the round game, the round game may be continued until the maximum number of prizes is reached. By doing so, the common hold number CRN tends to increase during the opening / closing execution mode, and it is possible to expect a connected home after the opening / closing execution mode.

  In addition, in the above configuration, a distribution table for each mode may be provided so that the 2R continuation mode is easily selected in the V winning (the occurrence of a big hit) in the special mode. By doing in this way, a new game in which the 2R continuation mode with a small number of pitches is extended in a row for a long time, and as a result, a large number of pitches can be obtained, can be created.

  Furthermore, in the above configuration, during the special mode, for example, if the support state of the electric accessory 39a is performed, the common reservation number CRN becomes easy to accumulate, and as a result, it is possible to anticipate the extended opening and closing execution mode.

  (36) The jackpot types described in the above embodiments and the like are merely examples, and other jackpot types may be provided. For example, even in the 2R continuation mode, the upper limit of the number of rounds may be set in the continuous fluctuation mode so that the game ends in one round if no V prize occurs in the first round. A configuration in which the selectivity of the opening / closing pattern differs in a round may be adopted. For example, a 5R continuous variation mode jackpot in which the upper limit of the number of rounds of the continuous variation mode is 5 rounds is provided, and an opening / closing pattern A having a high round continuation rate is easily selected in each round. And a 5R continuous fluctuation mode B in which the open / close pattern B having a low round continuation rate is easily selected.

  (37) In each of the above-described embodiments, the game state shifts from the previous game state to the predetermined game state because the game state shifts to the accessory control state or the game starts when the hold information is exhausted. It can be said that the game state is changed from the previous game state to the predetermined game state based on the fact that the hold information is exhausted and the opening / closing control of the opening / closing handpiece 168 is started as a result of the determination as to whether or not the holding information is exhausted. It can be said that the game state has shifted, and based on the end of the open / close execution mode, the game state has shifted from the previous game state to a predetermined game state.

  (38) In each of the above embodiments, the opening / closing accessory 168 may perform a predetermined operation based on the fact that the hold information is consumed, that is, at the start of the opening standby time or at the start of the game round. . The predetermined operation is, for example, an operation that suggests that a game ball cannot enter the accessory device 150, but moves slightly from the closed state to the open state side to be in the open state. Conceivable.

  (39) Each of the above inventions can also be applied to the following configurations. That is, in the game board 24, a unit switching control (a so-called round) in which a switching is performed between an open state in which game balls can enter and a closed state in which game balls are more difficult or impossible to enter than the open state. A variable ball entry device capable of executing a game is provided. Then, based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition (for example, that the lottery result based on the winning of one of the operating ports 38 and 39 is a jackpot result, and that the predetermined notification unit notifies the result). As a state that is advantageous to the player, the state is shifted to a special game state (a so-called big hit state) in which unit switching control of the variable ball-entering device is performed a plurality of times. In addition, in the variable ball-in device, the game ball that has entered the device is distributed to a first passage portion (for example, a V zone) or a second passage portion (normal zone) different from the first passage portion. Equipment is provided. In the special game state, it is possible to make a transition to the next unit switching control on condition that the vehicle has passed through the first passage section during one unit switching control. Even in such a configuration, if the switching timing in the unit switching control is changed, the passage rate to the first passage unit (that is, the continuation of the unit switching control) can be achieved without changing the distribution timing on the distribution device side. Rate) can be changed. By doing so, for example, while notifying the upper limit of the number of times unit switching control is performed (the number of rounds) in one special game state, and changing the continuation rate, the number of times unit switching control is actually performed (Passing to the first passing portion) can be realized. That is, not only a simple game such as simply entering the variable ball-entering device, but also the timing of ball entry into the variable ball-entering device, the opening timing of the variable ball-entering device, and the flow-down mode of the game ball. It is possible to realize a game such as attracting attention, and it is possible to appropriately increase the degree of attention to the game.

  (40) In the configuration of the above (39), the passing condition of the game ball on the first passing portion side is set as the continuation condition in the unit switching control, but may be changed as follows. For example, based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, that a lottery result based on winning of one of the operating ports 38 and 39 is a jackpot result, and that a predetermined notification unit notifies the result). The variable ball-entering device is configured to be controlled to be switched to the open state, and by passing the game ball to the first passage portion during the open state, the variable ball-entering device or the variable ball-entering device as an advantageous state for the player. Is configured to shift to a special game state (a so-called big hit state) in which unit switching control of different variable ball entry devices is performed. Even in such a configuration, if the timing of opening (or closing) is changed, the passing rate to the first passing portion (special game) can be changed without changing the distribution timing of the distribution device. (Transition rate to the state). That is, the occurrence rate of the special game state is changed not only by the winning probability of the lottery based on the ball entry into the operating ports 38 and 39, the ball entry rate into the variable ball entry device, but also by the opening / closing pattern of the variable ball entry device. It is possible to diversify the game.

  (41) Another type of pachinko machine different from the above-described embodiment, such as a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory opens a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific region of a special device, or a game ball in a specific region of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine that becomes a jackpot when a right enters and a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine equipped with another accessory, an arrangement ball machine, a sparrow ball and the like.

  In addition, a game machine that is not a ball-and-ball type, for example, includes a plurality of reels on which a plurality of types of symbols are provided in a circumferential direction, starts rotation of the reels by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and a stop switch is operated. Therefore, the present invention is also applied to a slot machine that provides a player with a privilege such as payout of medals when a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on an effective line visible from the display window after the reel stops. Can be applied.

  Furthermore, the game machine main body supported to be openable and closable on the outer frame includes a storage unit and a capture device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are captured by the capture device. Accordingly, the present invention can be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, in which the rotation of a reel is started.

<About the invention group extracted from the above embodiment>
Hereinafter, features of the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiment will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for easy understanding, the corresponding configuration in the above-described embodiment is appropriately shown in parentheses and the like, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses and the like.

  The following feature group is known as a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine having a variable ball-in device provided in a gaming area (for example, see Patent Document 1). The game state shifts to the specific control state when the game ball passes through the operating port provided in the variable ball input device, in which case the variable ball input device is opened for a predetermined period. As a specific event (predetermined event), for example, a game ball enters the variable ball-in device, and the game ball is placed in the variable ball-in device, such as a V winning opening. On the basis of the fact that the ball has entered the mouth, the variable ball-entering device or another variable ball-entering device is thereafter continuously opened and closed in a predetermined manner. " In gaming machines, attention to gaming is high For example, in the case of the above-mentioned pachinko machines, it is desired to devise ways to diversify the manner of entering the ball into the V winning hole and the like. " is there.

<Feature A group>
Feature A1. Launching means (gaming ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation of a player;
Variable receiving means (role) provided in the game area and capable of switching between a first state (open state) in which game balls can be received and a second state (closed state) in which game balls are harder to receive than the first state. Object device 150),
Variable reception control means for executing a state switching control between the first state and the second state of the variable reception means based on occurrence of a predetermined event (ball entry into the operating ports 38, 39 or start of a round game). (The function of executing the opening / closing processing and the function of executing the game control processing by the main control device 81);
A first passage portion (V winning passage 191a) and a second passage portion (exit passage 191b) through which the game ball received by the variable receiving means can pass;
Privilege granting means (a function of performing an opening / closing process by the main control device 81) for granting a privilege (continuation of a round game or occurrence of an opening / closing execution mode) to the player based on the passing of the game ball through the first passing portion. And a function to execute winning processing)
A first mode in which the game balls received by the variable receiving means are easily distributed to the first passage portion side (for example, the first distribution member 300 is in a non-distributed state, and the second distribution member 310 (If there is a distribution state), and a second mode (for example, if the first distribution member 300 is in the distribution state, the second distribution member 310 is less likely to be distributed to the first passage portion side than the first mode). And a distributing means (distributing members 300 and 310 and the rotating body 201) that can be switched at a predetermined timing.
With
The variable reception control means,
When the predetermined event occurs, the first condition is satisfied (it is the opening / closing pattern A, the result is the special opening A result or the special opening B result, the second opening timing table is selected, That the number of pending information is equal to or more than a predetermined number, that the result of grasping the operation status of the distribution members 300 and 310 is a predetermined result, and that the number of times of playing from the open / close execution mode is equal to or less than the predetermined number; At the first timing on the basis of the fact that a condition in which the V prize is likely to be established, such as the fact that the player has won the change lottery by the change lottery process or that the V prize is possible on the normal route even after the temporary change has been established). The first switching executing means for executing the state switching control (a function for executing the processing for the opening / closing pattern A in the setting processing for each round by the main controller 81, the processing for setting the opening and closing, and the control starting processing, The function of executing the processing for the special opening A result or the special opening B result in the in-process, the function of executing the processing for setting the opening / closing timing based on the second opening timing table, and the number of the hold information being equal to or more than a predetermined number To set the opening / closing timing on the basis of the opening / closing timing, a function to set the opening / closing timing based on the operating state or the game state of the distribution members 300 and 310, the first opening / closing timing changing process, or the second opening / closing A function of executing a timing change process, etc., a function of executing opening / closing control of the opening / closing accessory 168 so that a V prize is likely to occur);
When the predetermined event occurs, a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied (opening / closing patterns B and C, a normal opening result, and a first opening timing table is selected. That the number of hold information is less than a predetermined number, that the result of grasping the operation status of the distribution members 300 and 310 is not the predetermined result, and that the number of times of playing from the open / close execution mode exceeds the predetermined number, Conditions that are unlikely to cause a V prize have been met, such as not being won in the change lottery by the change lottery process, not being able to win V on the normal route after the temporary change, or being able to win V on the normal route only. Based on the above, the second switching execution means (the setting processing for each round by the main controller 81, which executes the state switching control at a second timing different from the first timing, A function for executing processing for opening / closing patterns B and C in the setting processing for opening and a function for executing processing for a normal opening result in processing during control, and setting of opening / closing timing based on a first opening timing table. A function of executing a process, a function of executing a process of setting an opening / closing timing based on the fact that the number of hold information is less than a predetermined number, and setting of an opening / closing timing based on an operation state and a game state of the distribution members 300 and 310 A function of executing the opening / closing control of the opening / closing role object 168 so that a V winning is hardly generated, such as a function of executing a process of performing a process of performing the process, a function of executing a process of directly using the temporarily set opening / closing timing, and the like.
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to receive the game ball to the variable receiving means based on the occurrence of the predetermined event, and in the configuration in which the privilege is given when the game ball passes through the first passing portion, , A switching means is provided which switches at a predetermined timing between modes in which the first passage portion is easily / difficultly passed. Then, in such a gaming machine, when a predetermined event occurs, when the first condition is satisfied, state switching control that affects the reception to the variable receiving means is performed at the first timing, and a state switching control different from the first condition is performed. When the two conditions are satisfied, the state switching control is performed at a second timing different from the first timing. By doing so, it is possible to vary the ease of passage to the first passage portion / difficulty of passage (passage rate) without changing the distribution mode on the distribution means side.

  In particular, when an event occurs in which the game ball does not pass through the first passage portion side by the distribution unit (frequently occurs) despite the game ball being received by the variable receiving means, it is quite difficult for the player. Not only can the benefits not be obtained and interest in the game is reduced, but also the player can feel unfair. Therefore, as described above, the distribution timing on the distribution unit side is not changed, and the state switching timing is varied, so that the reception timing to the variable reception unit is varied. By adopting a configuration in which the passing rate to the side is changed, occurrence of the above-described inconvenience can be avoided.

  In addition, as the timing of switching between the first mode and the second mode in the distribution means, “predetermined timing” may be rephrased as “timing when a predetermined period has elapsed since the occurrence of the specific event”. Good.

Feature A2. Launching means (gaming ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation of a player;
A variable provided in the game area and capable of switching between a first state (open state) where game balls can enter and a second state (closed state) where game balls are less likely to enter than the first state. Ball entry means (gears device 150),
A variable ball-in which executes a state switching control between the first state and the second state of the variable ball-in means based on occurrence of a predetermined event (ball-in to the operating ports 38, 39 or start of a round game). Control means (a function of executing an opening / closing process by the main control device 81 and a function of executing a game control process);
A first passage portion (V winning passage 191a) and a second passage portion (exit passage 191b) through which a game ball entering the variable ball entry means can pass;
Privilege granting means (a function of performing an opening / closing process by the main control device 81) for granting a privilege (continuation of a round game or occurrence of an opening / closing execution mode) to the player based on the passing of the game ball through the first passing portion. And a function to execute winning processing)
A first mode (for example, the first sorting member 300 is in a non-sorting state, and the second sorting member 310 is a state in which a game ball that has entered the variable ball-in means is easily sorted to the first passage portion side. If it is a distribution state), and a second mode (for example, if the first distribution member 300 is the distribution state, the second distribution member is less likely to be distributed to the first passage portion side than the first mode). And a distributing means (distributing members 300 and 310 and a rotating body 201) that can be switched at a predetermined timing.
With
The variable ball entry control means,
When the predetermined event occurs, the first condition is satisfied (it is the opening / closing pattern A, the result is the special opening A result or the special opening B result, the second opening timing table is selected, That the number of pending information is equal to or more than a predetermined number, that the result of grasping the operation status of the distribution members 300 and 310 is a predetermined result, and that the number of times of playing from the open / close execution mode is equal to or less than the predetermined number; The first timing is based on the fact that a condition in which the V prize is likely to occur, such as the fact that the player has won the change lottery by the change lottery process or that the V prize is possible on the normal route even after the temporary change has been established). The first switching execution means (the function of executing the processing for the opening / closing pattern A in the setting processing for each round and the setting processing for each opening by the main control device 81, and the main control device 1, a function for executing a process for a special open A result or a special open B result in a control start process or a process during control, a function for executing a process for setting opening / closing timing based on a second open timing table, A function of executing a process of setting the opening / closing timing based on the number of pieces being equal to or more than a predetermined number, a function of executing a process of setting the opening / closing timing based on the operating state or the game state of the distribution members 300 and 310, A function of executing the first opening / closing timing changing process or the second opening / closing timing changing process, and a function of executing the opening / closing control of the opening / closing role object 168 so that the V prize easily occurs).
When the predetermined event occurs, the second condition different from the first condition is satisfied (opening / closing patterns B and C, normal opening result, first opening timing table is selected). That the number of hold information is less than a predetermined number, that the result of grasping the operation status of the distribution members 300 and 310 is not the predetermined result, and that the number of game times from the open / close execution mode is a predetermined number V prize has occurred, for example, that the prize has not been won by the change lottery process, that the prize cannot be won on the normal route after the temporary change, or that the V prize is only possible on the normal route. A second switching execution means (the main control device 81 performs the state switching control at a second timing different from the first timing, based on the fact that a difficult condition is satisfied). A function for executing the processing for the opening and closing patterns B and C in the setting processing for each of the opening and closing, and a function for executing the processing for the normal opening result in the control start processing and the processing during the control by the main controller 81; (1) a function of executing a process of setting the opening / closing timing based on the opening timing table, a function of executing a process of setting the opening / closing timing based on the number of hold information being less than a predetermined number, An opening / closing role object 168 such as a function of executing a process of setting the opening / closing timing based on the operation status and the game state of the player 310 or a process of adopting the temporarily set opening / closing timing as it is, so that a V winning is hardly generated. Function to execute opening and closing control of the
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to enter a game ball into the variable ball entry means based on the occurrence of a predetermined event, and a bonus is provided when the game ball passes through the first passage portion. The means is provided with a distributing means, and switching is performed at a predetermined timing so as to easily / difficultly pass through the first passage portion side. In such a gaming machine, when a predetermined event occurs, when the first condition is satisfied, a state switching control for controlling the entering of the variable entering means at the first timing is performed. When a different second condition is satisfied, the state switching control is performed at a second timing different from the first timing. By doing so, it is possible to vary the ease of passage to the first passage portion / difficulty of passage (passage rate) without changing the distribution mode on the distribution means side.

  In particular, if an event occurs in which the game ball does not pass through the first passage portion side by the distribution means (frequently occurs) even though the game ball has entered the variable ball entry means, it is quite difficult for the player. Not only can the benefits not be obtained and interest in the game is reduced, but also the player can feel unfair. Therefore, as described above, the distribution timing on the allocating means side is changed without changing the state switching timing, so that the ball entry timing to the variable ball entry means is made different. By adopting a configuration in which the passage ratio to the passage section is changed, occurrence of the above-described inconvenience can be avoided.

  In addition, as the timing of switching between the first mode and the second mode in the distribution means, “predetermined timing” may be rephrased as “timing when a predetermined period has elapsed since the occurrence of the specific event”. Good.

Feature A3. Launching means (gaming ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation of a player;
A variable provided in the game area and capable of switching between a first state (open state) where game balls can enter and a second state (closed state) where game balls are less likely to enter than the first state. Ball entry means (gears device 150),
Variable ball entry control means (opening / closing processing by the main control device 81) for executing a state switching control of the variable ball entry means between the first state and the second state based on the occurrence of a predetermined event (start of a round game). Function to execute)
A first passage portion (V winning passage 191a) and a second passage portion (exit passage 191b) through which a game ball entering the variable ball entry means can pass;
Privilege granting means (a function of performing an opening / closing process by the main control device 81) for granting a privilege (continuation of the round game) to the player based on the passing of the game ball through the first passing portion;
A first mode (for example, the first sorting member 300 is in a non-sorting state, and the second sorting member 310 is a state in which a game ball that has entered the variable ball-in means is easily sorted to the first passage portion side. If it is a distribution state), and a second mode (for example, if the first distribution member 300 is the distribution state, the second distribution member is less likely to be distributed to the first passage portion side than the first mode). And a distributing means (distributing members 300 and 310 and a rotating body 201) that can be switched at a predetermined timing.
Based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition (determination of the continuation rate variation mode in the processing of step S1204 by main controller 81), the state switching control of the variable ball entry means is performed a plurality of times. A game state transition unit (a function of executing a game state transition process by the main control device 81) capable of transitioning to a specific state that can be executed a number of times (opening / closing execution mode of a continuation rate variation mode)
With
The specific state is a configuration in which, in one state switching control, the next state switching control is performed based on a game ball having passed through the first passing unit,
The variable ball entry control means,
When the predetermined event occurs, a first switching execution unit (main unit) that executes the state switching control at the first timing in the specific state based on the first condition being satisfied (opening / closing pattern A). A function of executing the processing for the opening and closing pattern A in the setting processing for each round and the setting processing for each opening by the control device 81);
When the predetermined event occurs, a second condition different from the first timing in the specific state is determined based on a second condition different from the first condition being satisfied (opening and closing patterns B and C). Second switching executing means for executing the state switching control at a timing (a function of executing processing for opening and closing patterns B and C in setting processing for each round by main controller 81 and setting processing for each opening);
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to enter a game ball into the variable ball entry means based on the occurrence of a predetermined event, and a bonus is provided when the game ball passes through the first passage portion. The means is provided with a distributing means, and switching is performed at a predetermined timing so as to easily / difficultly pass through the first passage portion side. In such a gaming machine, when a predetermined event occurs, when the first condition is satisfied, a state switching control for controlling the entering of the variable entering means at the first timing is performed. When a different second condition is satisfied, the state switching control is performed at a second timing different from the first timing. By doing so, it is possible to vary the ease of passage to the first passage portion / difficulty of passage (passage rate) without changing the distribution mode on the distribution means side.

  Further, the above-described configuration is a configuration in which when the game ball passes through the first passing portion during one state switching control in the specific state, the next state switching control is performed. In the specific state, the first passing portion is controlled. The player is very interested in whether or not the game ball passes through.

  In particular, if an event occurs in which the game ball does not pass through the first passage portion side by the distribution means (frequently occurs) even though the game ball has entered the variable ball entry means, it is quite difficult for the player. Not only does the next state switching control not be performed, so that interest in the game is reduced, but also the player may feel unfair. Therefore, as described above, by changing the state switching timing without changing the distribution timing on the allocating means side, the ball entry timing to the variable ball entry means is made different, and the subsequent first passage is performed. By adopting a configuration in which the passage ratio to the unit side is changed, occurrence of the above-described inconvenience can be avoided.

  In addition, as the timing of switching between the first mode and the second mode in the distribution means, “predetermined timing” may be rephrased as “timing when a predetermined period has elapsed since the occurrence of the specific event”. Good.

Feature A4. Launching means (gaming ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation of a player;
A variable provided in the game area and capable of switching between a first state (open state) where game balls can enter and a second state (closed state) where game balls are less likely to enter than the first state. Ball entry means (gears device 150),
Variable ball entry control means (main control) for executing a state switching control between the first state and the second state of the variable ball entry means based on occurrence of a predetermined event (ball entry to the operation ports 38 and 39). A function of executing a game control process by the device 81),
A first passage portion (V winning passage 191a) and a second passage portion (exit passage 191b) through which a game ball entering the variable ball entry means can pass;
A privilege granting means (a function of executing a winning process by the main control device 81) for granting a privilege (occurrence of the opening / closing execution mode) to the player based on the passing of the game ball through the first passing portion;
A first mode (for example, the first sorting member 300 is in a non-sorting state, and the second sorting member 310 is a state in which a game ball that has entered the variable ball-in means is easily sorted to the first passage portion side. If it is a distribution state), and a second mode (for example, if the first distribution member 300 is the distribution state, the second distribution member is less likely to be distributed to the first passage portion side than the first mode). And a distributing means (distributing members 300 and 310 and a rotating body 201) that can be switched at a predetermined timing.
The state switching control of the variable ball entry means can be executed a predetermined number of times based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition (determination that the result is not a departure result or a direct hit result in the hit determination processing by the main control device 81). A game state transition unit (executing a game control process by the main control device 81) capable of shifting to a specific state (a state in which processing during control is performed based on a normal release result, a special release A result, or a special release B result). Function), and
With
The variable ball entry control means,
When the predetermined event occurs, the first condition is satisfied (the result is the special release A result or the special release B result, the second release timing table is selected, and the number of hold information is a predetermined number). That is, the result of grasping the operation status of the distribution members 300 and 310 is a predetermined result, the number of times of playing from the open / close execution mode is less than or equal to the predetermined number, At the first timing in the specific state on the basis of the fact that conditions that easily cause a V winning, such as being able to win a V on a normal route, have been established even after the lottery has been won or even after the temporary change. A first switching executing means for executing a state switching control (a function for executing a process for a special opening A result or a special opening B result in a control start process or a process during control by the main controller 81, a second opening timing Table, a function of executing a process of setting the opening / closing timing based on the table, a function of executing a process of setting the opening / closing timing based on the number of the hold information being a predetermined number or more, and the operation of the distribution members 300 and 310. An opening / closing role object 168 such as a function of executing a process of setting opening / closing timing based on a situation or a game state, a function of executing a first opening / closing timing changing process or a second opening / closing timing changing process, etc. Function to execute opening and closing control of the
When the predetermined event occurs, the second condition different from the first condition is satisfied (the normal release result, the first release timing table is selected, and the number of hold information The number is less than the number, the result of grasping the operation status of the distribution members 300 and 310 is not the predetermined result, the number of times of the game from the open / close execution mode exceeds the predetermined number, or the change is performed by the change lottery process. Conditions such as not winning the lottery, not being able to win V on the normal route after the temporary change, and being able to win V on the normal route only, etc.). A second timing that executes the state switching control at a second timing different from the first timing without making the start timing of the specific state different from that of the first switching execution unit. Switching execution means (a function of executing a process for a normal opening result in a control start process or a process during control by the main controller 81, a function of executing a process of setting opening / closing timing based on a first opening timing table, A function of executing a process of setting the opening / closing timing based on the fact that the number of information is less than a predetermined number, and a function of executing a process of setting the opening / closing timing based on the operation state or the game state of the distribution members 300 and 310. And a function of executing a process for directly adopting the opening / closing timing that has been temporarily set, such as a function of executing opening / closing control of the opening / closing role object 168 so that a V winning is unlikely to occur).
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to enter a game ball into the variable ball entry means based on the occurrence of a predetermined event, and a bonus is provided when the game ball passes through the first passage portion. The means is provided with a distributing means, and switching is performed at a predetermined timing so as to easily / difficultly pass through the first passage portion side. In such a gaming machine, when a predetermined event occurs, when the first condition is satisfied, a state switching control for controlling the entering of the variable entering means at the first timing is performed. When a different second condition is satisfied, the state switching control is performed at a second timing different from the first timing. By doing so, it is possible to vary the ease of passage to the first passage portion / difficulty of passage (passage rate) without changing the distribution mode on the distribution means side.

  In particular, if an event occurs in which the game ball does not pass through the first passage portion side by the distribution means (frequently occurs) even though the game ball has entered the variable ball entry means, it is quite difficult for the player. Not only will the interest be reduced without the benefit being given, but also the player may feel unfair. Therefore, as described above, by changing the state switching timing without changing the distribution timing on the allocating means side, the ball entry timing to the variable ball entry means is made different, and the subsequent first passage is performed. By adopting a configuration in which the passage ratio to the unit side is changed, occurrence of the above-described inconvenience can be avoided.

  In addition, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, a specific state in which the ball can enter the variable ball entry means is set. And according to the said structure, the timing of state switching control can be made different, without changing the start timing of a specific state. In this way, not only does the ball entry rate into the variable ball entry means vary in the specific state, but also if the timing of the state switching control is set in relation to the switching timing of the mode of the distributing means, the specific state can be changed It is possible to make the passage of the game ball to the first passage portion difficult, and to make the passage ratio to the first passage portion different.

  In addition, as the timing of switching between the first mode and the second mode in the distribution means, “predetermined timing” may be rephrased as “timing when a predetermined period has elapsed since the occurrence of the specific event”. Good.

  Feature A5. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4, wherein the first timing is set to a timing at which a game ball easily passes through the first passage portion side than the second timing.

  According to the above configuration, when the state switching control is performed by the first switching execution means, that is, when the first condition is satisfied, the game ball is more likely to pass through the first passage portion, and therefore, a privilege based on the passage. Is easily provided. Therefore, it is considered that the player has great interest in whether the first condition is satisfied or the second condition is satisfied, and as a result, the degree of attention to the game can be appropriately increased.

  In particular, when the present configuration is applied to the configuration of the feature A3, the passing of the game ball through the first passing portion in the specific state is a condition for shifting to the next state switching control, and thus the first condition is satisfied. In this case, it is easy to shift to the next state switching control, and conversely, when the second condition is satisfied, it is difficult to shift to the next state switching control. Therefore, not only which condition is satisfied in each state switching control but also the continuation rate of the state switching control can be changed, and a novel game can be achieved.

  In addition, when this configuration is applied to the configuration of the feature A4, the pass rate to the first pass section can be changed without changing the start timing of the specific state. The giving rate (passing rate to the first passing section) can be changed, and a novel game can be provided.

<Characteristic B group>
Feature B1. Launching means (gaming ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation of a player;
Variable receiving means (role) provided in the game area and capable of switching between a first state (open state) in which game balls can be received and a second state (closed state) in which game balls are harder to receive than the first state. Object device 150),
Variable reception control means for executing a state switching control between the first state and the second state of the variable reception means based on occurrence of a predetermined event (start of a round game) (open / close processing by the main control device 81 Function), and
A first passage portion (V winning passage 191a) and a second passage portion (exit passage 191b) through which the game ball received by the variable receiving means can pass;
Privilege granting means (a function of performing an opening / closing process by the main control device 81) for granting a privilege (continuation of a round game or occurrence of an opening / closing execution mode) to the player based on the passing of the game ball through the first passing portion. )When,
A first mode in which the game balls received by the variable receiving means are easily distributed to the first passage portion side (for example, the first distribution member 300 is in a non-distributed state, and the second distribution member 310 (If there is a distribution state), and a second mode (for example, if the first distribution member 300 is in the distribution state, the second distribution member 310 is less likely to be distributed to the first passage portion side than the first mode). And a distributing means (distributing members 300 and 310 and the rotating body 201) that can be switched at a predetermined timing.
The specific control (round game) in which the state switching control of the variable receiving means is performed a plurality of times (for example, 19 times, RC2) based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition is performed a plurality of times (for example, 16 times, RC1). ), A game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process by the main control unit 81) capable of transitioning to a special game state (open / close execution mode of the continuation rate fluctuation mode) that can be executed over a period of time.
With
In the special game state, in one of the specific controls, based on the fact that a game ball has passed through the first passing portion, it is possible to perform the next specific control,
The variable reception control means,
During the specific control, the state switching control is performed at a first timing based on the first condition being satisfied (for example, a condition that is likely to generate a V winning such as the opening / closing pattern A is satisfied). The first switching execution means to be executed (the timing at which V distribution by the main control device 81 such as the setting process for each round by the main control device 81, the process for the opening / closing pattern A in the setting process for each opening, etc. A function for executing processing for controlling the opening and closing of the opening and closing accessory 168).
During the specific control, based on the fact that a second condition different from the first condition has been satisfied (for example, a condition that is unlikely to generate a V winning, such as open / close patterns B and C, has been satisfied) Second switching executing means for executing the state switching control at a second timing different from the first timing (a setting process for each round by the main controller 81, and a setting process for the opening and closing patterns B and C in the setting process for each opening). A function of executing processing for controlling the opening and closing of the opening and closing accessory 168 such that processing is performed at a timing at which V distribution is difficult to perform, and
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the game ball received in a state in which the game ball can be received by the variable receiving means passes through the first passing portion, a privilege is given. Distributing means is provided, and switching is performed at a predetermined timing so as to easily / difficultly pass the first passage portion side. In such a gaming machine, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the specific control in which the state switching control can be executed a plurality of times is shifted to a special gaming state in which the state switching control can be executed a plurality of times. This special game state is configured so that the next specific control can be performed based on passing through the first passing section in one specific control, and therefore, only the number of receptions to the variable reception means is performed. Instead, the player is interested in whether or not the game balls received by the variable receiving means pass through the first passing portion.

  In such a configuration, during one specific control, if the first condition is satisfied, the state switching control is performed at the first timing, and if the second condition is satisfied, the state switching control is performed at the second timing. In the variable receiving unit, the distribution mode on the distribution unit side is a predetermined timing, and the distribution mode does not change. Therefore, the timing of the state switching control on the variable reception unit side should be changed as described above. Thus, it is possible to vary the ease / difficulty of passing to the first passage portion side (passage rate) without changing the distribution mode on the distribution means side.

  As a result, the continuation rate of the specific control during the special game state can be designed without changing the distribution mode on the distribution means side, and the game can be diversified. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately increase the degree of attention to the game.

  In addition, as the timing of switching between the first mode and the second mode in the distribution means, “predetermined timing” may be rephrased as “timing when a predetermined period has elapsed since the occurrence of the specific event”. Good.

  Feature B2. The gaming machine according to Feature B1, wherein the first timing is set to a timing at which a game ball easily passes through the first passage portion side than the second timing.

  According to the above configuration, when the state switching control is performed by the first switching execution means, that is, when the first condition is satisfied, the game ball easily passes through the first passing portion. It is easy to shift to the next specific control. Therefore, it is considered that the player has great interest in whether the first condition is satisfied or the second condition is satisfied, and as a result, the degree of attention to the game can be appropriately increased.

  Feature B3. The game according to Feature B1 or B2, wherein, in the special game state, a switching timing of the distribution unit is set as a predetermined timing from the start of the specific control. Machine.

  According to the above configuration, the switching timing of the first mode and the second mode in the distribution unit is fixed from the start of one specific control, while the first condition is satisfied or the second condition is satisfied. The acceptance timing to the variable acceptance means differs depending on whether it is performed, and therefore, the passage rate to the first passage unit changes. Thus, the continuation rate of the specific control can be changed without changing the operation pattern of the distribution unit.

  Feature B4. In each of the specific controls in the special game state, there is provided a means for setting which of the first condition and the second condition is satisfied at the time of transition to the special game state. The gaming machine according to any one of B3.

  According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the continuation rate of the specific control in the special game state changes depending on whether the first condition is satisfied or the second condition is satisfied, it is determined whether the condition is satisfied in the special game state. Is set at the time of transition, for example, at the start of the special game state (at the time of transition), notification about the continuation rate (notification of special game state with high continuation rate or specific state with low continuation rate Etc.) can be executed. Therefore, attention can be paid to which condition is satisfied at the time of transition to the special game state, and interest in the game can be increased.

  Note that “at the time of transition to the special game state” can be rephrased as “based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition”.

  Feature B5. In each of the specific controls in the special game state, there is provided a means for setting which of the first condition and the second condition is satisfied at the start of the specific control. Features B1 to B4 A gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims.

  According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the continuation rate of the specific control in the special game state changes depending on whether the first condition is satisfied or the second condition is satisfied, which condition is satisfied is determined in the special game state. Since this is set at the start of the specific control, it is possible to always pay attention to which condition is satisfied (whether the continuation rate is high or low) in each specific control.

  Feature B6. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B5, wherein a plurality of the distributing means are provided on a flow path of one game ball.

  According to the above configuration, the passing ratio to the subsequent first passing portion changes depending on the combination of the first mode and the second mode in each distribution unit. Since the execution timing of the state switching control is set to be different depending on which of the first condition and the second condition is satisfied, the passage rate of the first passage section can be set more variously. Therefore, it is possible to improve interest.

  In addition, "the game ball received by the variable receiving means is provided separately from the distributing means and performs a periodic operation to the first passing portion side or the second passing portion side. If the periodic operation means (rotary body 201) that can be derived is provided, the distribution means that switches between the first mode and the second mode at a predetermined timing and the periodic operation is performed. It is possible to clarify the distinction from the periodic operation means.

  Feature B7. The plurality of distributing means include first distributing means (first distributing member 300, rotating body 201) which can be visually recognized from the front of the gaming machine, and visibility from the front of the gaming machine is the first distributing means. The gaming machine according to Feature B6, further comprising a second distribution unit (second distribution member 310) lower than the distribution unit.

  According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the specific control is continued when the game ball passes through the first passage portion in the special game state, if the distribution means for distributing the pass rate to the first passage portion can be visually recognized, It is preferable from the viewpoint that a game can be performed in which the user enjoys watching the game as if the minutes are being played, and the level of attention to the game is increased. On the other hand, if the distribution means is visually recognizable, there is a possibility that an action aimed at the distribution of the distribution means may be performed, which may cause a problem that it is difficult to detect an improper act. Therefore, by providing a plurality of distributing means and providing a level difference in visibility, it is possible to solve a conflicting problem caused by the level of visibility.

  Feature B8. The second distributing means having the first aspect has a higher possibility that a game ball passes through the first passage portion than the first distributing means having the first aspect. The gaming machine according to Feature B7.

  According to the above configuration, it is more likely that the distribution by the second distribution unit on the lower visibility side is performed, so that the target is more likely to pass through the first passage unit, so that the aiming is suppressed more appropriately. be able to. As described above, even if it is a contradictory issue due to the high and low visibility, if fraudulent acts are performed, it is disadvantageous not only for gaming halls and gaming machine manufacturers, but also for other players who play legitimate games Could give. Therefore, countermeasures against fraud are considered to be a top priority.

  Feature B9. When the game ball received by the variable receiving means reaches the distributing means, even if the distributing means is in the second mode, thereafter, the game ball can be led out to the first passage portion. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B8, wherein the gaming machine has a configuration.

  According to the above configuration, the possibility of passing through the first passage section can be left even if the state switching control of the variable receiving unit is performed by either the first switching execution unit or the second switching execution unit. In this way, the continuation rate of the specific control is varied depending on the timing of the state switching control, but the continuation rate is not determined by itself. Even in this case, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from dropping extremely.

  Feature B10. In the special game state, when a game ball passes through the first passage portion during one of the specific controls, a transition is made to the next specific control even if a period in which the specific control is performed remains. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B9, characterized in that:

  According to the above configuration, the number of game balls that can be received by the variable receiving means in the one specific control differs depending on the timing of passing through the first passage section during the one specific control. Therefore, it is considered that the player is highly interested in when the game ball passes through the first passage section, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

  The “period in which the specific control is performed” can be paraphrased more specifically as “the number of state switching controls in the specific control”.

Feature B11. The first timing is set to a timing at which the game ball easily passes through the first passage portion side than the second timing,
The gaming machine according to Feature B10, wherein in the one specific control, the first condition is set so as to be more easily satisfied at a timing later than the second condition.

  According to the configuration described above, during the period in which one specific control is performed, the control is easily performed so that the game ball can easily pass through the first passage portion side as the position becomes rearward. By doing so, the number of game balls that can be received by the variable receiving means during one specific control increases, and the period of interest in whether or not the game balls pass through the first passing portion increases. Therefore, the degree of attention to the game can be appropriately increased.

  Feature B12. Whatever the first condition or the second condition is, the period during which one state switching control is performed during the specific control is set to the same period. The gaming machine according to any one of B11 to B11.

  According to the above configuration, while changing the pass rate of the first pass section, that is, the continuation rate of the specific control, the period required for each state switching control in the specific control is the same period, so that the fairness of the game is ensured. Is done. If the period required for each state switching control is made different, not only the continuation rate of the specific control but also the number of game balls accepted by the variable accepting means will be different.

Feature B13. The first timing is set to a timing at which the game ball easily passes through the first passage portion side than the second timing,
In each of the specific controls in the special game state, a setting unit that sets which of the first condition and the second condition is satisfied at the start of the specific control,
The setting means is characterized in that the first condition can be more easily satisfied than the second condition in the state switching control at the first predetermined number of times in each of the specific controls. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B12.

  According to the above configuration, in the first predetermined number of times of the specific control, the first condition is easily satisfied, so that the game ball easily passes through the first passing portion. That is, the continuation rate of the specific control of the first predetermined number of times is high. Therefore, in the specific control of the first predetermined number of times, it is possible to enjoy the special game state with an elegant feeling assuming that the specific control is continued. Therefore, the interest can be improved.

Feature B14. The first timing is set to a timing at which the game ball easily passes through the first passage portion side than the second timing,
In each of the specific controls in the special game state, a setting unit that sets which of the first condition and the second condition is satisfied at the start of the specific control,
The setting means can make the second condition easier to be satisfied than the first condition in the second predetermined number of times of the specific control in each of the specific controls. The gaming machine according to any one of B1 to B13.

  According to the above configuration, in the second predetermined number of times of the specific control, the second condition is easily satisfied, so that the game ball does not easily pass through the first passing portion. That is, the specific control of the second predetermined number of times has a low continuation rate. Therefore, in the second predetermined number of times of the specific control, whether or not the specific control is continued, that is, whether or not the game ball passes through the first passing portion, is focused on the whereabouts of the game ball, and the special game is performed. Inflection can be given to the degree of attention in the state. Therefore, the interest can be improved.

  Note that, in relation to the feature B13, the “second predetermined number of times” may be expressed as “the second predetermined number of times that is different from the first predetermined number of times”.

  Feature B15. The feature B14 is characterized in that, in the specific control next to the second predetermined number of times, the setting means can make the first condition more easily satisfied than the second condition. The gaming machine described.

  According to the above configuration, the continuation rate is set to be higher in the next specific control if the continuation rate is continued at the second predetermined number of times where the continuation rate is low. Is an important factor, and the degree of attention to the second predetermined number of times of the specific control can be increased.

  Feature B16. The special game state shifted by the game state shifting means includes a first special game state (16R continuous mode) in which the first condition is more easily satisfied than the second condition, and a second special game state in which the second condition is more than the first condition. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B15, wherein a second special gaming state (continuous fluctuation mode) in which a condition is easily satisfied is provided.

  According to the above configuration, the continuation rate of the specific control in the special game state is different depending on which one of the first special game state and the second special game state is set. Therefore, the type of the special game state can be attracted, and the degree of attention to the game can be improved.

Feature B17. The game state transition unit is configured to be capable of transitioning to the special game state based on a game ball received by the variable receiving unit passing through the first passage unit,
A predetermined notifying means (symbol display device) for determining whether to shift to the first special game state or the second special game state after passing through the first passing portion and at least to shifting to the special game state. 51) notification control means (a function of executing an effect for the opening / closing execution mode based on a control end command from the main control device 81 by the effect control device 82) capable of notifying at 51).
The gaming machine according to Feature B16, wherein the predetermined notification means is provided near the variable receiving means.

  According to the above configuration, before the transition to the special game state, the player pays attention to whether or not the game ball is accepted by the variable accepting means and whether or not the accepted game ball passes through the first passage portion. After that, attention is paid to which special game state is to be entered. In addition, since the predetermined notification means is provided near the variable receiving means, even if the target of the player's attention is different, each notification is naturally performed within the range of the eyes. In addition, it is possible to prevent the interests of the players from being dispersed.

In addition, "the predetermined notification means is in the vicinity of the variable receiving means" is, for example,
`` The variable receiving means and the predetermined notifying means are provided in a unit for effect having each, and the unit for effect is installed in a game area where a game ball flows down '',
"The variable receiving means and the predetermined notifying means are provided with a fixed unit for fixing to a game board, in the fixed unit, the predetermined notifying means is fixed to a surrounding portion covering the variable receiving means. It is also possible to express such a configuration.

<Characteristic C group>
Feature C1. Launching means (gaming ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation of a player;
A variable receiving means provided in the game area and capable of switching between a first state (open state) in which game balls can be received and a second state (closed state) in which game balls cannot be received more than the first state ( Character device 150),
Variable reception control means (a function of executing a game control process by the main control device 81) for performing a state switching control of the variable reception means between the first state and the second state;
A first passage portion (V winning passage 191a) and a second passage portion (exit passage 191b) through which the game balls received by the variable receiving means can pass;
A game state transition process (main mode) capable of shifting the game state to a special game state (opening / closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the passage of the game ball through the first passage section. A function of executing the game state transition process by the control device 81),
A first mode in which the game balls received by the variable receiving means are easily distributed to the first passage portion side (for example, the first distribution member 300 is in a non-distribution state, and the second distribution member 310 (If there is a distribution state), and a second mode (for example, if the first distribution member 300 is in the distribution state, the second distribution member 310 is less likely to be distributed to the first passage portion side than the first mode). And a distributing means (distributing members 300 and 310 and the rotating body 201) that can be switched at a predetermined timing.
The state switching of the variable receiving means is performed based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition (the occurrence of a ball entering the operating ports 38, 39, the end of the opening standby time, the end of the variable display time, etc.). Game state transition means (a function of executing a game control process by the main control device 81) capable of shifting to a specific state in which control can be executed a predetermined number of times (a state in which processing during control is performed based on a normal release result or the like) )When,
With
The variable reception control means,
When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the state is determined at a first timing based on the first condition being satisfied (for example, a condition for easily generating a V winning such as a special opening result is satisfied). First switching execution means for executing switching control (a function of executing processing for opening and closing control of the opening and closing accessory 168 at a timing at which V distribution is easily generated);
When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the predetermined condition is determined based on that a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied (a condition that hardly generates a V winning such as a normal opening result is satisfied). A second switching execution unit (the V switching is less likely to generate V distribution) that executes the state switching control at a second timing different from the first timing without making the condition satisfaction timing different from that of the first switching execution unit. A function of executing the opening / closing control processing of the opening / closing accessory 168 at a timing)
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the above configuration, when the game ball is received by the variable receiving means and the game ball passes through the first passage portion, the game state shifts to the special game state, and the variable receiving means is provided with the distribution means. Thus, switching is performed in such a manner that it is easy or difficult to pass the first passage portion side at a predetermined timing. In such a gaming machine, the state switching control of the variable receiving means is performed based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition. In this case, when the first condition is satisfied, the reception to the variable receiving means is performed at the first timing. Is performed, and when a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied, the state switching control is performed at a second timing different from the first timing. By doing so, it is possible to vary the ease of passage to the first passage portion / difficulty of passage (passage rate) without changing the distribution mode on the distribution means side.

  In particular, if an event occurs in which the game ball does not pass through the first passage portion due to the distribution device even though the game ball is received by the variable receiving means (frequently occurs), it is quite special for the player. Not only the interest in the game is reduced without shifting to the gaming state, but also the player may feel unfair. Therefore, as described above, the distribution timing on the distribution unit side is not changed, and the state switching timing is varied, so that the reception timing to the variable reception unit is varied. By changing the passage rate to the above, it is possible to avoid the above-described inconvenience.

  In addition, as the timing of switching between the first mode and the second mode in the distribution means, “predetermined timing” may be rephrased as “timing when a predetermined period has elapsed since the occurrence of the specific event”. Good.

  Feature C2. The gaming machine according to feature C1, wherein the first timing is set to a timing at which the game ball easily passes through the first passage portion side than the second timing.

  According to the above configuration, when the state switching control is performed by the first switching execution means, that is, when the first condition is satisfied, the game ball is more likely to pass through the first passage portion, and therefore, a privilege based on the passage. Is easily provided. Therefore, it is considered that the player has great interest in whether the first condition is satisfied or the second condition is satisfied, and as a result, the degree of attention to the game can be appropriately increased.

  In particular, in the feature C1, since the passage rate to the first passage section can be changed without changing the timing at which the predetermined condition is satisfied, the transition rate to the special game state (the (Pass rate to one passing section) can be changed, and a novel game can be achieved.

  Feature C3. The distributing means is characterized in that the switching timing between the first aspect and the second aspect is set as a predetermined timing after the predetermined condition is satisfied. C1 Or the gaming machine according to Feature C2.

  According to the above configuration, the distribution unit switches between the first mode and the second mode at a predetermined timing after the predetermined condition is satisfied. This makes it easier to give the player a sense of fairness in the game as compared to a configuration in which the distribution means switches at random timing. On the other hand, as described in the feature C1, the first switching execution means and the second switching execution means have different timings of the state switching control during the specific state. Therefore, it is possible to make the pass rate to the first pass section different by performing the state switching control by each switching execution means while ensuring the fairness of the game.

  Feature C4. The first switching execution unit and the second switching execution unit execute the state switching control at the first timing and the second timing without changing the number of times the state switching control is performed in the specific state. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C3, wherein the timing is different.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to vary the rate of passage to the first passage section without varying the number of times the state switching control is performed in one specific state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player feels unfair due to the increase or decrease in the number of state switching controls.

  Feature C5. The first switching execution unit and the second switching execution unit may be configured to perform the first timing and the second timing without changing the length of the period in which the variable receiving unit is in the first state in one specific state. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4, wherein the execution timing of the state switching control can be made different from the timing.

  According to the above configuration, since the length of the period in which the variable receiving means is in the first state and the game ball can be received is the same, even if the state switching control is performed by any of the switching executing means, the variable receiving means is switched to the variable receiving means. The acceptance rate (ball entry rate) itself does not change. Therefore, the fairness of the game can be further ensured.

  In addition, a configuration including a “means (payout device 96) for giving a privilege (a prize ball based on a prize to the accessory device 150) to a player based on a game ball being received by the variable receiving device”. Then, the fairness due to the fact that the reception rate to the variable reception means does not change can be further improved. By the way, in view of the game property of how the game ball is passed to the first passing section, the privilege given based on the reception of the game ball by the variable receiving means is that the game passed through the first passing section. It is preferable that the privilege is different from the privilege (transition to the special game state) given based on the passage of the ball.

Feature C6. The first timing is set to a timing at which the game ball easily passes through the first passage portion side than the second timing,
When the state switching control is performed a plurality of times in the specific state, the state switching control on the rear side is more easily performed by the first switching execution unit than the state switching control on the front side. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C5, wherein

  According to the above configuration, when the state switching control is performed a plurality of times in the specific state, the passing ratio to the first passage unit is higher in the rear state switching control than in the front state switching control. Thereby, it becomes possible to entertain the specific state to the end, and the degree of attention to the game can be appropriately increased.

Feature C7. The first timing is set to a timing at which the game ball easily passes through the first passage portion side than the second timing,
In one of the state switching controls in the specific state, the state switching control between the long-term mode and the short-term mode is performed such that the length of the period in which the variable receiving unit is in the first state is relatively long or short. Is set,
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C6, wherein the first switching execution means is configured to easily select the state switching control in the long-term mode.

  According to the above configuration, the pass rate to the first pass section increases in the state switching control in a long-term mode, so that the pass rate to the variable pass section and the pass rate to the first pass section are linked. Therefore, the points to which the player should pay attention are clarified, and the degree of attention to the game can be appropriately increased.

Feature C8. The launching means launches a game ball at a predetermined launch cycle (0.6 sec),
The first switching execution unit and the second switching execution unit may be configured to perform the first timing and the second timing without changing the length of the period in which the variable receiving unit is in the first state in one specific state. It is a configuration that can make the execution timing of the state switching control different from the timing,
When the state switching control is performed a plurality of times in the specific state, in the state switching control in the short-term mode, the period in which the variable receiving unit is in the first state is shorter than the firing cycle. The gaming machine according to Feature C7, wherein the gaming machine is set.

  According to the above configuration, although the reception of game balls cannot be expected in the state switching control in the short-term mode, the maximum reception of game balls can be expected in the state switching control in the long-term mode. Therefore, the timing at which the player should pay attention becomes clearer, and the degree of attention to the game can be appropriately increased.

Feature C9. The first timing is set to a timing at which the game ball easily passes through the first passage portion side than the second timing,
When the state switching control is performed by the first switching execution unit and when the state switching control is performed by the second switching execution unit, the specific state ends earlier by the first switching execution unit. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C8, which can be set as follows.

  According to the above configuration, when the state switching control is performed by the first switching execution unit that increases the pass ratio to the first passage unit, the specific state ends earlier. For example, the next specific state is refrained. In this case, it is possible to shift to the next specific state at an early stage, and when a passage to the first passing portion occurs, it is possible to shift to the special game state early after the end of the specific state. Therefore, the smooth progress of the game is realized, and even if the passage to the first passage section does not occur, the feeling can be quickly switched without giving the player time to be discouraged. Can be encouraged.

Feature C10. The distributing means sets a switching timing between the first aspect and the second aspect as a predetermined timing after the predetermined condition is satisfied,
The predetermined condition is satisfied when the variable receiving means switches from the second state to the first state as the state switching control. A gaming machine according to claim 1.

  According to the above configuration, the switching of the distribution unit is performed at a predetermined timing after the switching of the variable receiving unit from the second state to the first state is started. By doing so, the operation start timing of the variable receiving means and the operation start timing of the distribution means become constant, and the fairness of the game is further ensured.

Feature C11. The distributing means sets a switching timing between the first aspect and the second aspect as a predetermined timing after the predetermined condition is satisfied,
The game area is provided with a ball entry portion (operating ports 38, 39) into which a game ball can enter,
The predetermined condition is satisfied based on the fact that a ball has entered the ball entry section or based on that the ball entry information based on the ball entry into the ball entry section has become a predetermined determination target. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C9, wherein

  According to the above configuration, the specific state is started based on the entering of the game ball into the entering part, or the specific state is started based on the fact that the entering ball information based on the entering ball becomes a predetermined determination target. Is done. Then, switching of the distribution means is performed at a predetermined timing from the start of the specific state. By doing so, the timing at which the entry or entry information to the entry section becomes a determination target and the operation start timing of the distribution means become constant, and the fairness of the game is further ensured.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. Launching means (gaming ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation of a player;
Variable receiving means (role) provided in the game area and capable of switching between a first state (open state) in which game balls can be received and a second state (closed state) in which game balls are harder to receive than the first state. Object device 150),
Variable reception control means for executing a state switching control between the first state and the second state of the variable reception means based on occurrence of a predetermined event (start of a round game) (open / close processing by the main control device 81 Function), and
A specific passage portion (V winning prize passage 191a) through which a game ball received by the variable receiving means can pass;
The specific control (round game) in which the state switching control of the variable receiving means is performed a plurality of times (for example, 19 times, RC2) based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition is performed a plurality of times (for example, 16 times, RC1). ), A game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process by the main control unit 81) capable of transitioning to a special game state (open / close execution mode of the continuation rate fluctuation mode) that can be executed over a period of time.
With
In the special game state, in one of the specific controls, the continuation condition is that the game ball has passed through the specific passage portion, and the next specific control can be performed based on the continuation condition being satisfied. Configuration,
In the specific control, a high continuation specific control in which the easiness of the continuation condition is relatively high and a low continuation specific control are set,
As a period in which each of the state switching controls of the specific control is performed, a first predetermined period in which the state switching control is performed at the first timing on the assumption that the control timing of the state switching control is different, and a second period different from the first timing. And a second predetermined period in which the state switching control is performed at two timings.
In the specific control in the special game state, the next specific control is set as the high continuation specific control based on the continuation condition being satisfied in the first predetermined period, and the second specific control is performed in the second predetermined period. Setting means (a function of executing the process of step S1408 by the main control device 81) capable of setting the next specific control as the low continuation specific control based on the satisfaction of the continuation condition. A gaming machine characterized by:

  According to the above configuration, the continuation rate of the next specific control differs depending on whether the continuation condition is satisfied in the first predetermined period or the continuation condition is satisfied in the second predetermined period. Accordingly, it is considered that the player is highly interested in the timing at which the continuation condition is satisfied in the predetermined specific control. Then, such an effect can be realized only by changing the timing of the state switching control of the variable receiving means, and the degree of attention to the game can be suitably increased with a simple configuration.

  Feature D2. The gaming machine according to feature D1, wherein, in the predetermined specific control, the first predetermined period is set at a rear side of the second predetermined period.

  According to the above configuration, if the continuation condition is satisfied in the first predetermined period on the rear side in the specific control, the next specific control becomes the high continuation specific control, which is advantageous to the player. Therefore, each specific control in the special game state can be enjoyed longer, which is preferable for the player. Further, for example, in the specific control, it is possible to perform a game such as adjusting the timing of receiving a game ball to the variable receiving means so that the continuation condition is satisfied not in the second predetermined period but in the first predetermined period. Thus, it is possible to create a new game in which the continuation condition fulfillment timing during the specific control is adjusted.

  Feature D3. The gaming machine according to Feature D2, wherein the first timing is set to a timing at which a game ball easily passes through the specific passage portion than the second timing.

  According to the above configuration, since the state switching control is performed at a timing during which the rear side first predetermined period is easier to pass through the specific passage portion, the continuation condition is more easily satisfied during the rear first predetermined period. . Therefore, for example, during the second predetermined period in which the continuation condition is difficult to be satisfied, a novel game is realized in which the user does not want to pass through the specific passing section and waits for the first predetermined period thereafter to pass through the specific passing section. be able to.

  Feature D4. In any of the first predetermined period and the second predetermined period, the length of the period of the first state is set so as to be a period in which the variable receiving means can receive the game ball. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3.

  According to the above configuration, in the specific control, the game ball is received by the variable receiving means in the first predetermined period and the second predetermined period, so that it is possible to generate the significance of continuing to launch the game ball. As a result, the so-called hitting for stopping the launch of the game ball can be suppressed.

  Feature D5. Any one of the features D1 to D3, wherein the second predetermined period is set so that the length of the period in which the variable receiving unit is in the first state is longer than the first predetermined period. 2. The gaming machine according to 1.

  According to the above configuration, if the continuation condition is satisfied, the significance of continuing the launch of the game ball occurs even in the second predetermined period in which the next specific control can be the low continuation specific control. For example, in the special game state, the number of times of the specific control is limited, and in the specific control of the upper limit number of times, the next continuation rate is irrelevant. Therefore, with the above-described configuration, it is possible to make the variable receiving means accept the game ball even in the second predetermined period, thereby allowing the game to be desired.

  Feature D6. In the special game state, when the number of times of the state switching control reaches a predetermined number of times (RC2 = 19) in one specific control, the special game state is set unless the continuation condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D5, wherein the game is ended.

  According to the above configuration, it is considered that the player tries to satisfy the continuation condition before the number of state switching controls reaches the predetermined number. However, if the first predetermined period set for the high continuation specific control is set on the rear side of the specific control, for example, as in the feature D2, it is considered that it is desired that the continuation condition be satisfied on the rear side as much as possible. . Therefore, such a sense of balance that the end condition of the special game state (the predetermined number of times is reached without the continuation condition being satisfied) and the attempt to satisfy the continuation condition during the first predetermined period is enjoyed. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Feature D7. In the special game state, when the number of receptions to the variable reception means reaches a predetermined number (for example, nine) in one of the specific controls, if the continuation condition is not satisfied, the special The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D6, wherein the gaming state ends.

  According to the above configuration, it is considered that the player tries to satisfy the continuation condition before the number of pieces received by the variable receiving means reaches the predetermined number. However, if the first predetermined period set in the high continuation specific control is set on the rear side of the specific control, for example, as in the feature D2, it is considered that it is desired that the continuation condition be satisfied on the rear side as much as possible. . Therefore, such a sense of balance that the end condition of the special game state (the predetermined number is reached without the continuation condition being satisfied) and the attempt to satisfy the continuation condition during the first predetermined period can be enjoyed. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Feature D8. The setting means, when the specific control at this time is set to the high continuation specific control, the next specific control is also easy to set to the high continuation specific control. 2. The gaming machine according to item 1.

  According to the above configuration, if the continuation condition is satisfied in the first predetermined period in the predetermined specific control in the special game state, the high continuation specific control is likely to be set in the next and subsequent times. Therefore, the degree of attention in the predetermined specific control is further increased, and the interest in the game can be improved.

  Feature D9. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D8, wherein the predetermined specific control is the low continuous specific control.

  According to the above configuration, even if the continuation condition is hardly satisfied in the low continuation specifying control, if the continuation condition is satisfied in the first predetermined period, the next specific control is set to the high continuation specifying control. Therefore, even during the low continuation specific control in which the continuation condition is difficult to be satisfied, the degree of attention can be increased.

  Feature D10. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D9, wherein a specific control next to the predetermined specific control can also be set to the predetermined specific control.

  According to the above-described configuration, since the specific control having different continuation conditions can be continued depending on the timing of establishment, a high level of interest is generated in each of the specific controls in the special game state (so that the timing of establishment of the continuation condition is not overlooked). ).

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. Launching means (gaming ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation of a player;
A variable receiving means provided in the game area and capable of switching between a first state (open state) in which game balls can be received and a second state (closed state) in which game balls cannot be received more than the first state ( Character device 150),
Variable reception control means (a function of executing a game control process by the main control device 81) for performing a state switching control of the variable reception means between the first state and the second state;
A first passage portion (V winning passage 191a) and a second passage portion (exit passage 191b) through which the game balls received by the variable receiving means can pass;
Privilege granting means (for example, a game performed by the main control device 81) that grants a privilege (transition to the open / close execution mode, establishment of a round continuation condition) to the player based on the passing of the game ball through the first passing portion. Function to execute state transition processing),
A first mode in which the game balls received by the variable receiving means are easily distributed to the first passage portion side (for example, the first distribution member 300 is in a non-distribution state, and the second distribution member 310 (If there is a distribution state), and a second mode (for example, if the first distribution member 300 is in the distribution state, the second distribution member 310 is less likely to be distributed to the first passage portion side than the first mode). And a distributing means (distributing members 300 and 310 and the rotating body 201) that can be switched at a predetermined timing.
With
In the control mode of the state switching control of the variable acceptance control means,
The first timing (timing at which V distribution can be performed) in which the game ball received by the variable receiving unit easily reaches the distribution unit in the situation where the distribution unit is the one mode is included. A first state switching control mode for setting the variable receiving means to the first state (opening / closing control of the opening / closing role object 168 such that the timing is such that V distribution is easily performed);
A second timing (a timing at which V distribution is difficult to be performed) in which the game ball received by the variable receiving unit does not easily reach the distribution unit in the situation where the distribution unit is in the first mode is included. A second state switching control mode in which the variable receiving unit sets the first state to the first state (opening / closing control of the opening / closing role object 168 so that the timing becomes difficult to perform the V distribution);
Is set,
The variable acceptance control means, when executing the state switching control, a switching means for switching between the first state switching control mode and the second state switching control mode (for example, each of the main control device 81 The control timing of the opening / closing accessory 168 such as the round setting process, the opening / closing setting process, the control process, and the like is controlled so that the opening / closing mode of the timing at which the V distribution is easily performed and the opening / closing mode of the timing that is not so. Gaming machine).

  According to the above configuration, when the game balls received by the variable receiving means are distributed by the distribution means whose distribution destination is changed at a predetermined timing, the game balls are distributed to the first passage portion side. Are given a benefit. In such a configuration, the variable reception control means for performing the state switching control of the variable reception means includes: a first switching control mode capable of executing the variable reception control including the first timing at which the variable reception means easily passes through the first passage unit; Since there is provided a switching means capable of performing switching between the second variable reception control mode including a second timing that is difficult to pass through the first passage unit, and a switching means that can perform switching at a predetermined timing, Without changing the distribution mode, it is possible to vary the ease of passage to the first passage portion / difficulty of passage (passage rate). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest while maintaining the fairness of the game.

  Feature E2. The first timing is set so that a game ball received by the variable receiving means at the first timing includes a timing at which it is difficult to pass through the first passing portion. The gaming machine according to E1.

  According to the above configuration, even if the data is accepted by the distributing means at the first timing at the variable receiving means, it is not necessarily distributed to the first passage portion side. Without doing so, the interest in the destination of the received game ball will not be lost. Therefore, interest in the game can be appropriately maintained.

  Feature E3. The gaming machine according to the feature E1 or E2, wherein said second timing is set to a timing at which a game ball received by said variable receiving means can pass through said first passing portion.

  According to the above configuration, even if the distribution means accepts the variable reception means at the second timing, the possibility of passing through the first passage portion is left, the player is not discouraged, and the interest in the game is extremely high. Can be suppressed.

  Feature E4. The first state switching control mode is configured by a plurality of times of the state switching control, and the state switching control of one of the plurality of state switching controls is performed by the distributing unit in the first mode. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3, wherein the state switching control is set as the first timing at which the first timing easily reaches the distribution means in a certain situation.

  According to the above configuration, for example, even if there is a situation that needs to be executed at a predetermined timing, at least one state switching control is not the state switching control, but another state switching control. Accordingly, if the state switching control is performed at the first timing at which the vehicle easily reaches the first passage portion side, the excellent effect described in the feature E1 can be exerted in consideration of the above situation.

  Feature E5. In the state switching control of the plurality of times, the state switching control different from the state switching control that is the first timing is performed such that the state switching control is performed earlier than the state switching control that is the first timing. The gaming machine according to Feature E4, wherein a one-state switching control mode is set.

  According to the above configuration, since the state switching control which is not the state switching control which is the first timing is performed first, at that timing, the player determines whether or not the state switching control is the first state switching control mode. Can not do. By doing so, interest in each state switching control mode can be increased, and the user can be immersed in the game.

  Feature E6. The gaming machine according to Feature E5, wherein said distribution means is configured to be able to switch at said predetermined timing from a timing at which said different said state switching control is performed.

  According to the above configuration, the distribution timing of the distribution unit can be defined regardless of the first timing. That is, since the distribution timing of the distribution means can be set in accordance with the state switching control on the side different from the first timing, for example, with respect to one state switching control, in accordance with the rules of the gaming machine, By changing the state switching control other than the above (state switching control at the first timing), the excellent effect described in the feature E1 can be obtained.

  Feature E7. The second state switching control mode includes a plurality of the state switching controls, and one of the plurality of the state switching controls is the state switching control, and the allocating means is the first mode. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E6, wherein the state switching control is set to be the second timing at which it is difficult to reach the distribution means in the following circumstances.

  According to the above configuration, for example, even if there is a situation that needs to be executed at a predetermined timing, at least one state switching control is not the state switching control, but another state switching control. Accordingly, if the state switching control is performed at the second timing at which it is difficult to reach the first passage portion side, the excellent effect described in the feature E1 can be exerted in view of the above situation.

  If the configuration is applied to a gaming machine having the feature E4, both state switching control modes become a plurality of state switching controls, and the effect of making it difficult for a player to understand which switching control mode can be enhanced. .

  Feature E8. In the plurality of state switching controls, the state switching control different from the state switching control at the second timing is performed such that the state switching control is performed earlier than the state switching control at the second timing. The gaming machine according to Feature E7, wherein a two-state switching control mode is set.

  According to the above configuration, since the state switching control which is not the state switching control at the second timing is performed first, at that timing, the player determines whether or not the state is the second state switching control mode. Can not do. By doing so, interest in each state switching control mode can be increased, and the user can be immersed in the game.

  Feature E9. The gaming machine according to Feature E8, wherein said distributing means is configured to be able to switch at said predetermined timing from a timing at which said different state switching control is performed.

  According to the above configuration, the distribution timing of the distribution unit can be defined regardless of the second timing. That is, since the distribution timing of the distribution means can be set in accordance with the state switching control on the side different from the second timing, for example, one state switching control can be set in accordance with the rules of the gaming machine. By changing the state switching control other than the above (state switching control at the second timing), the excellent effect described in the feature E1 can be obtained.

Feature E10. The first state switching control mode is configured by a plurality of times of the state switching control, and the state switching control of one of the plurality of state switching controls is performed by the distributing unit in the first mode. It is set as the state switching control, which is the first timing that easily reaches the distribution means in a certain situation,
The second state switching control mode includes a plurality of the state switching controls, and one of the plurality of the state switching controls is the state switching control, and the allocating means is the first mode. Is set as the state switching control that is the second timing that is difficult to reach the distribution means in the situation
The state switching control different from the state switching control serving as the first timing and the state switching control different from the state switching control serving as the second timing are set to be executed at the same timing. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E9.

  According to the above configuration, for example, even if there is a situation that needs to be executed at a predetermined timing, at least one state switching control is not the state switching control, but another state switching control. Accordingly, if the state switching control is performed at the first timing that easily reaches the first passage portion side or at the second timing that is difficult to reach the first passage portion, the excellent effect described in the feature E1 is exhibited in consideration of the above-described situation. can do. If the state switching control on the side different from the first timing and the second timing is executed at the same timing, it is possible to enhance the effect that it is difficult for the player to understand which switching control mode.

Feature E11. In the state switching control of the plurality of times, the state switching control different from the state switching control that is the first timing is performed such that the state switching control is performed earlier than the state switching control that is the first timing. One state switching control mode is set,
In the plurality of state switching controls, the state switching control different from the state switching control at the second timing is performed such that the state switching control is performed earlier than the state switching control at the second timing. A two-state switching control mode is set,
The gaming machine according to Feature E10, wherein said distribution means is configured to be able to switch at the predetermined timing from the timing at which each of said different state switching controls is performed.

  According to the above configuration, the switching timing of the distribution unit can be set in accordance with the timing at which the state switching control is performed on a side different from the first timing and the second timing. As in the above feature E10, it is difficult for the player to determine which switching control mode, and the state switching control on the different side is earlier than the state switching control at the first timing or the second timing. The effect of obfuscation is also enhanced. Therefore, for example, it is possible to suppress an act of aiming at the first state switching control mode.

Feature E12. The variable reception control means performs a specific control (round game) in which the state switching control of the variable reception means is performed a plurality of times (for example, 19 times, RC2) based on a predetermined condition being satisfied. Game state transition means (main control device 81 executes game state transition processing) capable of transitioning to a special game state (opening / closing execution mode of continuation rate variation mode) executable over 16 times (for example, RC1). Function),
In the special game state, in one of the specific controls, it is possible to perform the next specific control based on a game ball passing through the first passing portion. The gaming machine according to any one of E1 to E11.

  According to the above configuration, the present invention is applied to the control mode of the variable reception control during the special game state, and the excellent effect of the feature E1 can be obtained.

Feature E13. The privilege granting means is configured to be able to shift, as the privilege, a game state to a special game state (opening / closing execution mode) more advantageous to the player than the normal game state,
The variable reception control means is configured to determine whether the predetermined condition has been satisfied (e.g., that a ball has entered the operating ports 38, 39, that the opening standby time has ended, that the variable display time has ended, and so on). A game state transition unit (by the main control unit 81) capable of transitioning to a specific state in which the state switching control of the variable receiving unit can be executed a predetermined number of times (a state in which processing during control is performed based on a normal release result or the like). The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E12, further comprising: a function of executing a game control process.

  According to the above configuration, in particular, the present invention is applied to the control mode of the variable reception control during the normal gaming state, and the excellent effect of the feature E1 can be obtained.

<Characteristic F group>
Feature F1. Launching means (gaming ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation of a player;
A ball entry portion (first operation port 38, second operation port 39) provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball;
Information acquisition means (a function of executing a winning process for an operating port by the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on a game ball having entered the ball entry portion;
An information storage means (reserved ball storage area 114b) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a specific number which is a plurality of predetermined numbers;
A transition determination unit (a function for executing a success / failure determination process by the main control device 81) for sequentially performing a transition determination as to whether or not the special information stored in the information storage unit corresponds to predetermined transition information; )When,
In a gaming machine equipped with
In the game area,
A specific passing portion (V winning opening 182a) through which a game ball can pass;
A first mode (open state or distribution state) in which a game ball is provided on the upstream side of the specific passing section and in which the game ball is easily led to the specific passing section, and a game ball is led to the specific passing section more than the first mode. Distributing means (opening / closing role 168, first distributing members 300 and 310) that can be switched to a difficult second mode (closed state or non-distributed state);
Is provided,
Game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process by the main control device 81) capable of shifting a game state to an advantageous state advantageous to a player based on a game ball passing through the specific passage section. )When,
A variable distribution control unit (a function of executing a game control process by the main control device 81) for performing a mode switching control between the first mode and the second mode of the distribution unit;
With
The variable distribution control means,
When the transition determination is performed by the transition determination unit, the mode switching control is executed at a first timing based on the number of the special information stored in the information storage unit being a first predetermined number. First switching execution means (for example, a function of executing a game control process by the main control device 81 when the common hold number CRN is 0);
When the transition determination is performed by the transition determination unit, the number of the special information stored in the information storage unit is based on a second predetermined number different from the first predetermined number. Second switching execution means for executing the mode switching control at a second timing different from one timing (for example, a function of executing a game control process by the main control device 81 when the common hold number CRN is 3);
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the above configuration, special information is acquired based on the ball entry into the ball entry unit, the special information is stored in the information storage unit up to a specific number, and the stored special information is sequentially used for the transition determination. In the target gaming machine, a specific passing section is provided in the gaming area, and a distribution means is provided on the upstream side of the specific passing section. It is performed at different timings depending on the number of stored special information. This makes it possible to correlate the number of stored special information with the pass rate to the specific passing section. For example, when the number of stored special information is large, the mode switching control is performed at a timing that allows easy passage to the specific passing section. If the number of pieces of special information is small, the mode switching control may be performed at a timing that facilitates passage to the specific passage section, or a novel game in which the transition rate to the advantageous state may be changed in relation to the number of pieces of memory. can do.

  Here, for example, as a configuration for changing the transition rate to the advantageous state in relation to the number of storages, assuming that it is determined whether or not the advantageous state is shifted through a lottery based on numerical information, the lottery probability is determined. Can be changed according to the number of storage numbers. However, with such a configuration, the transition to the advantageous state is determined only by exchanging the numerical information, and not only does it deviate from the original pleasure of the gaming machine, that is, the enjoyment of the falling form of the game ball, but also the numerical information only There is an increased likelihood of an illegal act taking advantage of the playability that progresses in the exchange of information. Therefore, as in the above configuration, in the configuration in which the game ball shifts to the advantageous state by passing through the specific passing portion, the mode switching control of the distribution means on the upstream side of the specific passing portion is controlled by the storage number of the special information and By associating, it is possible to entertain the downflow mode of the game ball, and also to make it difficult for an illegal act to be performed. Therefore, the degree of attention of the game can be appropriately increased.

Feature F2. The first timing is set to a timing at which the game ball easily passes through the specific passage portion than the second timing,
The gaming machine according to Feature F1, wherein the first predetermined number is set to be larger than the second predetermined number.

  According to the above configuration, as the number of special information stored in the information storage unit increases, the mode switching control is executed at a timing at which the specific information easily passes through the specific passage unit. Thereby, a new game that expects a large amount of special information to be stored in the information storage means can be created, and the interest can be improved.

  Feature F3. In the gaming state, a predetermined state (opening / closing execution mode) in which a transition determination is not performed by the transition determination unit even when the special information is stored in the information storage unit is set. A gaming machine according to claim 1.

  According to the above configuration, in the gaming machine of the characteristic F2, the transition determination is not performed in the predetermined state, so that special information is easily stored. Thereby, a game such as how to store special information during the predetermined state can be created.

  Note that the predetermined state can be expressed as a state in which "the acquisition of the special information by the information acquisition unit is performed, but the transition determination by the transition determination unit is not performed".

  Feature F4. The gaming machine according to Feature F3, wherein the predetermined state is the advantageous state.

  According to the above configuration, when the game ball passes through the specific passage portion and shifts to the advantageous state, the shift determination for the special information is not performed, and as a result, the special information is easily stored during the advantageous state. For example, when the termination condition of the advantageous state is satisfied and the process is terminated, and a transition determination is made for the stored special information, the mode switching control is performed at a timing at which the game ball easily passes through the specific passing portion as described above. . As a result, the advantageous state is extended. In this way, instead of realizing the change in the transition probability to the advantageous state or the series of the advantageous state by lottery using numerical information, the player visually understands the game state and the mode switching control of the distribution means. By realizing as much as possible, it is possible to create a new game in which the fairness of the game is ensured.

Feature F5. As the distribution means,
A first distribution unit (opening / closing accessory 168) in which the mode switching control is executed by the first switching execution unit or the second switching execution unit according to the number of the special information stored in the information storage unit; ,
Regardless of the number of the special information stored in the information storage unit, the second distribution unit (the rotating body 201, the first distribution member 300, the second distribution unit) in which the mode switching control is executed at a predetermined timing. 2 distribution member 310),
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F4, wherein

  According to the above configuration, the first distributing means having different timings of the mode switching control according to the number of stored special information and the second distributing means having no different timing are provided. Since the first distribution means is provided, it is easy to give the player a sense of fairness in the game.

  Feature F6. The gaming machine according to Feature F5, wherein the first distribution unit is disposed upstream of the second distribution unit in a flow-down path to the specific passage unit.

  According to the above configuration, the timing at which the mode switching control of the first distributing means on the upstream side of the second distributing means is performed in accordance with the number of special information is changed, so that the timing is determined at a predetermined timing. Also for the second distribution unit for which the mode switching control is performed, it is possible to vary the distribution ratio to the specific passing unit by setting the first distribution unit. Therefore, the effect of the feature F5 can be more suitably achieved.

Feature F7. In the game area, a predetermined receiving device (accessory device 150) capable of receiving a game ball is provided,
The specific passing portion is arranged at a position where the game ball received by the predetermined receiving device can pass,
The first sorting means is provided at a position where it is difficult to sort the game balls received in the predetermined receiving device, while the second sorting means is received in the predetermined receiving device. The gaming machine according to Feature F5 or Feature F6, wherein the gaming machine is provided at a position where game balls can be distributed.

  According to the above configuration, it is determined whether or not the game balls received in the receiving device are sorted by the second sorting means toward the specific passing portion. For example, when a gaming ball received in the receiving device is distributed to a side different from the specific passing portion by the first distribution means, as a player, some operation was performed in the gaming hall or the gaming machine side. Then, you may have distrust. On the other hand, with the above-described configuration, the game ball received in the receiving device is not distributed by the first distribution unit, but is distributed by the second distribution unit that operates at a constant timing. Is performed, it is easy to give a sense of fairness.

  Feature F8. The first distributing means becomes a mode in which a game ball can be received in the predetermined receiving device by being in the first mode, and is a game ball in the predetermined receiving device by being in the second mode. The gaming machine according to Feature F7, wherein the gaming machine is in a form that is difficult to accept.

  According to the above configuration, the first distribution unit and the second distribution unit can be suitably arranged in relation to the predetermined receiving device. Further, even if a game ball is received by a predetermined receiving device, all of the game balls are not necessarily passed through the specific passing section because the sorting is performed by the second sorting means. For this reason, even if the timing of the mode switching control by the first distribution unit is changed to change the acceptance ratio to the predetermined receiving device, it is difficult to directly understand that the passage ratio of the specific passage unit changes. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel unfair in a configuration in which the pass rate of the specific pass section is changed.

Feature F9. The first switching execution unit controls the first distribution unit so that a period in which the state of the first mode is maintained is a first period,
The second switching execution means controls the first distributing means to control the period in which the state in the first mode is maintained to be the first period, wherein the second switching execution means is the first period. Gaming machine.

  According to the above configuration, whether the mode switching control is performed by the first switching execution unit or the mode switching control is performed by the second switching execution unit, the reception rate to the predetermined receiving device is controlled. Does not change. Therefore, it is difficult to give a sense of unfairness in the game.

  It should be noted that if the configuration is provided with "a privilege providing means (payout device 96) capable of providing a bonus (prize ball) to a player based on the reception of a game ball to a predetermined receiving device", The effect of not changing the rate can be more specifically achieved.

Feature F10. The first timing is set to a timing at which the game ball easily passes through the specific passage portion than the second timing,
The first predetermined number is set as a number larger than the second predetermined number,
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F9, wherein the first timing is set to be closer to the timing at which the transition determination is performed than the second timing.

  According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which the greater the number of special information stored in the information storage means, the easier it is to pass through the specific passage section, the greater the number of special information, the earlier the mode switching control is executed. Therefore, it is possible to realize a game in which the number of special information is increased to facilitate passing through the specific passage portion, and a smooth and quick game is realized.

  Feature F11. The variable distribution control means may execute the mode switching control based on a result of the transition determination by the transition determination means being a result that the special information corresponds to the transition information. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F10, characterized in that:

  According to the above configuration, the special information obtained based on the ball entry into the ball entry unit is a target of the transition determination, and the determination result of the transition determination is a result that corresponds to the transition information Based on this, the mode switching control of the distribution unit is executed by the variable distribution control unit. Then, it is determined whether the mode switching control makes it easy to pass through the specific passage section. By applying a characteristic configuration of changing the mode switching control according to the number of stored special information of the feature F1 to such a gaming machine, in a game starting from a ball entry to a ball entry portion, The ball entry rate itself is given the highest priority, and a novel gaming property can be created while emphasizing the original pleasure of a gaming machine, such as allowing a game ball to enter a predetermined ball entry section. . Therefore, the interest can be improved.

<Characteristic G group>
Feature G1. Launching means (gaming ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation of a player;
Variable receiving means (role) provided in the game area and capable of switching between a first state (open state) in which game balls can be received and a second state (closed state) in which game balls are harder to receive than the first state. Object device 150),
Variable reception control means for executing a state switching control between the first state and the second state of the variable reception means based on occurrence of a predetermined event (start of a round game) (open / close processing by the main control device 81 Function), and
A first passage portion (V winning passage 191a) and a second passage portion (exit passage 191b) through which the game ball received by the variable receiving means can pass;
First privilege granting means (opening / closing processing by the main control device 81) for granting a first privilege (continuation of round game or occurrence of an opening / closing execution mode) to the player based on the passing of the game ball through the first passing portion. Function to execute)
A first mode in which the game balls received by the variable receiving means are easily distributed to the first passage portion side (for example, the first distribution member 300 is in a non-distributed state, and the second distribution member 310 (If there is a distribution state), and a second mode (for example, if the first distribution member 300 is in the distribution state, the second distribution member 310 is less likely to be distributed to the first passage portion side than the first mode). And a distributing means (distributing members 300 and 310 and the rotating body 201) that can be switched at a predetermined timing.
Based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, a specific control (round game) in which the state switching control of the variable receiving means is performed a plurality of times (for example, 19 times, RC2) can be executed as the first privilege. A game state transition unit (a function of executing a game state transition process by the main control device 81) capable of transitioning to a special game state (opening / closing execution mode of the continuation rate fluctuation mode);
In the special game state, in one of the specific controls, grasping means for grasping that a game ball has passed through the first passing section (a function of executing the processing of steps S1329 and S1330 by the main control device 81);
With
The variable reception control means,
During the specific control, the state switching control is performed at a first timing based on the first condition being satisfied (for example, a condition that is likely to generate a V winning such as the opening / closing pattern A is satisfied). The first switching execution means to be executed (the timing at which V distribution by the main control device 81 such as the setting process for each round by the main control device 81, the process for the opening / closing pattern A in the setting process for each opening, etc. Function to execute a process for controlling the opening and closing of the opening and closing accessory 168).
During the specific control, based on the fact that a second condition different from the first condition has been satisfied (for example, a condition that is unlikely to generate a V winning, such as open / close patterns B and C, has been satisfied) Second switching executing means for executing the state switching control at a second timing different from the first timing (a setting process for each round by the main controller 81, and a setting process for the opening and closing patterns B and C in the setting process for each opening). A function of executing processing for controlling the opening and closing of the opening and closing accessory 168 such that processing is performed at a timing at which V distribution is difficult to perform, and
With
A second privilege granting unit (step S1408 by the main control device 81) capable of granting a second privilege (each distribution table in FIG. 35, the display mode in FIG. 41B) according to the grasping result of the grasping unit. (A function of executing the processing of step SB105 by the effect control device 82).

  According to the above configuration, during the normal game state, when the game ball received by the variable receiving means passes through the first passage section, the game ball shifts to the special game state as the first privilege. In this special game state, the control timing of the state switching control of the variable receiving means is different between the case of the first switching execution means and the case of the second switching execution means, and as a result, the passage to the first passage section is performed. The rate will change. In this case, since the mode is switched at a predetermined timing, even if the passing rate to the first passing section is different as described above, the distrusting or unfair feeling given to the player is Can be reduced.

  Further, in the special game state, it is grasped by the grasping means that the vehicle has passed the first passage portion, and the second privilege can be given based on the grasping result. Therefore, it is considered that the player wants the control to be performed by the first switching execution means so as to pass the first passing portion during the special game state so that the second privilege is provided. As a result, the degree of attention to the game can be appropriately increased.

  Feature G2. The gaming machine according to feature G1, wherein the first timing is set to a timing at which a game ball easily passes through the first passage portion side than the second timing.

  According to the above configuration, when the state switching control is performed by the first switching execution means, that is, when the first condition is satisfied, the game ball easily passes through the first passing portion. It is easy to shift to the next specific control. Therefore, it is considered that the player has great interest in whether the first condition is satisfied or the second condition is satisfied, and as a result, the degree of attention to the game can be appropriately increased.

Feature G3. A high advantage mode (opening / closing pattern of pattern A, rescue mode or special mode) in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high and low, and a low advantage mode (opening / closing pattern of patterns B and C and normal mode) are provided. Is set,
The second privilege is set as the high advantage mode or the low advantage mode,
The second privilege providing means is configured to set one of the high advantage mode and the low advantage mode based on a grasp result of the grasp means, wherein the feature G1 or the feature G2. A gaming machine according to claim 1.

  According to the above configuration, during the special game state, the mode is set to the high advantage mode or the low advantage mode according to the passing situation to the first passing section. As a player, of course, he / she will want to be set to the advantageous high advantage mode, and naturally the passage situation to the first passage section is of high interest. Therefore, the degree of attention to the game is increased.

  Feature G4. The feature G3 is characterized in that the second privilege granting means grants the second privilege based on the number of times or timing of passage to the first passing section as a grasp result by the grasping means. Gaming machine.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to cause a higher interest in the passing situation to the first passing section.

Feature G5. As the special game state, a first special game state (opening / closing execution mode of the 2R continuation mode) in which the continuation possible number of the specific control is set as a first number (for example, two times), and a number of times greater than the first number And a second special game state (opening / closing execution mode of the 16R continuation mode or the continuous fluctuation mode) set as a second number (for example, 16 times),
Setting means for setting which of the first switching execution means and the second switching execution means to execute the specific control in each of the special game states (the function of executing the processing of step S1408 by the main control device 81) )
The setting means is easily set by the first switching execution means in the specific control in the first special game state, and is easily set by the second switching execution means in the specific control in the second special game state. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G4, wherein

  According to the configuration, each special game state in which the number of continuations of the specific control is different is set as the special game state, and in the first special game state in which the number of continuations is small, the pass rate to the first passage portion is high. In the second special game state in which the number of times of continuation is larger than that of the first switching execution means, the second switching execution means having a low passing ratio to the first passing portion is easily set. Then, the passage to the first passage section during the special game state is grasped by the grasping means, and the second privilege is given based on the result. In this way, the advantage / disadvantage relationship of the special game state can be associated with the grant of the second privilege by the second privilege granting unit, and the diversification of the game can be achieved. Therefore, it can be used to enhance interest.

Feature G6. A high advantage mode (opening / closing pattern of pattern A, rescue mode or special mode) in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high and low, and a low advantage mode (opening / closing pattern of patterns B and C and normal mode) are provided. Is set,
The second privilege is set as the high advantage mode or the low advantage mode,
The second privilege granting means,
As the grasping result of the grasping means, based on the first grasping result that the number of times the game ball has passed the first passing portion is less than a specific number of times or that the passing timing is earlier than the specific passing timing. Set to the high advantage mode,
As the grasping result of the grasping means, based on the second grasping result that the number of times the game ball has passed through the first passing portion is equal to or more than the specific number of times or the passing timing is after the specific passing timing, The gaming machine according to Feature G5, wherein the gaming machine is set to an advantageous mode.

  According to the above configuration, in the gaming machine having the feature G5, in the first special game state, the number of times of the specific control is small, so that the game machine is easy to pass to the first passing portion, while the number of times of passing and the timing of passing are the second special game. Can be faster than condition. Therefore, in such a case, if the configuration is set to the high advantage mode in which the advantage for the player is high, the advantage of the first special game state that is easy to pass through the first passage portion can be made more prominent. Becomes possible. As a result, interest can be improved.

  Feature G7. The gaming machine according to Feature G6, wherein the high advantage mode or the low advantage mode is set at the end of the special gaming state.

  According to the above configuration, the high advantage mode is easily set after the first special game state, and the low advantage mode is easily set after the second special game state. In the first special game state, the pass rate of the first passage portion is higher than that of the second special game state, but the number of specific controls is smaller than that of the second special game state. Therefore, if the balance between the advantages of the first special game state and the second special game state is configured as described above, even in the first special game state where the player tends to feel disadvantageous, it is advantageous thereafter. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in willingness to play the game.

  Feature G8. The gaming machine according to Feature G7, wherein the high advantage mode and the low advantage mode are set such that the predetermined condition is more easily satisfied in the high advantage mode.

  According to the above configuration, after the first special game state, the predetermined condition is satisfied again, and the game easily shifts to the special game state. In this way, even in the first special game state in which the number of times of the specific control is small, it is considered that the player is satisfied and continues the game. Therefore, the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

Feature G9. When the state switching control is performed by the first switching execution unit, the timing at which the game balls received by the variable receiving unit can easily reach the distribution unit in the situation where the distribution unit is in the first mode ( The variable receiving means enters the first state at the first timing including the timing at which the V distribution can be performed,
When the state switching control is performed by the second switching execution unit, the timing at which the game balls received by the variable receiving unit do not easily reach the distribution unit when the distribution unit is in the first mode ( The gaming machine according to any one of features G5 to G8, wherein the variable receiving means enters the first state at the second timing including a timing at which V distribution is not easily performed.

  According to the above configuration, the difference in the advantage between the high-advantage mode and the low-advantage mode with a simple configuration in which the timing of each state switching control by the first switching execution unit and the second switching execution unit is different (special game state) Transfer rate). Here, a configuration in which the winning probability of the shift lottery to the special gaming state is changed (the probability of satisfying the predetermined condition is changed) is also conceivable. However, in this case, various inconveniences such as a complicated processing configuration inside the gaming machine and a decrease in the player's understanding level may occur. Therefore, if the configuration is such that the timing of the state switching control of the variable receiving means as described above is changed and the timing of the distribution means is not changed, the transition rate of such a special game state is changed. In addition, it is possible to diversify the game while avoiding the above-described inconvenience.

Feature G10. A ball entry portion (first operation port 38, second operation port 39) provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball;
Information acquisition means (a function of executing a winning process for an operating port by the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on a game ball having entered the ball entry portion;
A transition determination unit (a function of executing a hit / fail determination process by the main control device 81) that determines whether or not the special information acquired by the information acquisition unit corresponds to predetermined transition information; ,
Based on the fact that the transition determination is made by the transition determination means, a predetermined effect is started by predetermined notification means, and the predetermined effect is ended as a stop result corresponding to the result of the transition determination. Notification control means for controlling the predetermined notification means (a function of executing effect processing by the effect control device 82) as one game time;
A period setting means (a function of executing a setting process of a variable display time by the main control device 81) for setting an effect period of the game times;
With
The variable accepting unit executes the state switching control based on that, as the predetermined event, the transition determination by the transition determination unit is notified by the notification control unit as a result corresponding to the transition information. And
The distribution means is configured to switch to the first mode after a predetermined period has elapsed based on the fact that the special information has been a target of the transition determination,
A high advantage mode (opening / closing pattern of pattern A, rescue mode or special mode) in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high and low, and a low advantage mode (opening / closing pattern of patterns B and C and normal mode) are provided. Is set,
The second privilege is set as the high advantage mode or the low advantage mode,
In the high advantage mode, the period setting unit is configured to determine whether the game ball received by the variable receiving unit can easily reach the distribution unit in the situation where the distribution unit is in the first mode (when the V distribution is The gaming machine according to any one of features G5 to G9, wherein the effect period is set such that the timing can be performed.

  According to the above configuration, the transition determination is performed based on the ball entry into the ball entry unit, and if the result of the transition determination corresponds to the transition information, the variable receiving unit enters the first state after the game. In this case, in the high advantage mode, in order to set the production period of the game times so that it is easy to be distributed to the first passage portion when the distribution means is switched, if the vehicle passes through the first passage portion thereafter, Transition to the special game state. As described above, even in the first special game state in which the number of times of the specific control is small, it is configured to be a so-called extended game, and it is very simple to change the timing of the state switching control of the variable receiving means. By realizing with the configuration, a novel game can be realized.

<Characteristic H group>
Feature H1. Launching means (gaming ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation of a player;
Variable receiving means (role) provided in the game area and capable of switching between a first state (open state) in which game balls can be received and a second state (closed state) in which game balls are harder to receive than the first state. Object device 150),
Variable reception control means for executing a state switching control between the first state and the second state of the variable reception means based on occurrence of a predetermined event (start of a round game) (open / close processing by the main control device 81 Function), and
A specific passage portion (V winning prize passage 191a) through which a game ball received by the variable receiving means can pass;
The specific control (round game) in which the state switching control of the variable receiving means is performed a plurality of times (for example, 19 times, RC2) based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition is performed a plurality of times (for example, 16 times, RC1). ), A game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process by the main control unit 81) capable of transitioning to a special game state (open / close execution mode of the continuation rate fluctuation mode) that can be executed over a period of time.
With
In the specific control, a high advantageous control mode and a low advantageous control mode in which the timing of the state switching control is different are set such that the advantage for the player is relatively high and low,
In the special game state, a setting means for setting whether to execute the control mode of each of the specific controls in the high advantageous control mode or the low advantageous control mode (executes a setting process of each round by the main control device 81) Function),
Switching means (a function of executing a setting process for each opening by the main control device 81) for causing a switch from the low advantageous control mode to the high advantageous control mode in the predetermined specific control of the special game state;
In the predetermined specific control, a special notification executing means (a function of executing an opening corresponding process by the effect control device 82) for executing a special notification by a predetermined notifying means (symbol display device 51);
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the above configuration, during the special game state, the special notification is performed at different timings of the control mode of the variable receiving means. That is, the special notification is performed at a timing (predetermined specific control) at which the low advantageous control mode having a low degree of advantage for the player is switched to the high advantageous control mode having a high degree of advantage. In this way, the player is more pleased with the fact that the low advantageous control mode has been switched to the high advantageous control mode when shifting to the special gaming state. Therefore, the degree of attention to the game can be appropriately increased.

Feature H2. In the special game state, in one of the specific controls, the continuation condition is that the game ball has passed through the specific passage portion, and the next specific control can be performed based on the continuation condition being satisfied. Configuration,
The low-advantageous control mode and the high-advanced control mode differ in the mode of the state switching control of the variable receiving means, thereby changing the satisfaction rate of the continuation condition, and setting the level of the degree of advantage. The gaming machine according to feature H1, wherein the gaming machine is a game machine.

  According to the above configuration, the low advantage control mode and the high advantage control mode are realized by the level of the continuation rate of the specific control during the special game state, and the level of the continuation rate is determined by the state switching control of the variable receiving means. This is achieved by the mode. In this way, the game machine can enjoy the operation mode of the game ball such as whether or not the game ball is accepted by the variable receiving means and whether or not it passes through the specific passage portion, while maintaining the original pleasure of the gaming machine. Therefore, the game is diversified such that special notification is expected by a predetermined notification means.

  Feature H3. In the special game state, a first special game state in which a switch from the low advantageous control mode to the high advantageous control mode can occur in the predetermined specific control, and the switch occurs in the predetermined specific control. The gaming machine according to Feature H1 or Feature H2, wherein a second special gaming state is set.

  According to the above configuration, the player is highly interested in whether the generated special game state is the first special game state or the second special game state, and furthermore, it is determined that the first special game state is in the first special game state (highly advantageous control mode). (Replacement). As a result, it is considered that the degree of attention to the specific control increases and the degree of interest in the special notification increases. As a result, it is possible to appropriately increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature H4. In the first special gaming state, in the specific control before the predetermined specific control from the start of the first special gaming state, the state switching control of each specific control is performed in the low advantageous control mode,
In the second special game state, in the specific control prior to the predetermined specific control from the start of the second special game state, the state switching control of each specific control is performed in the low advantageous control mode. The gaming machine according to Feature H3.

  According to the above configuration, it is not possible to identify which of the first and second special game states from the start of the special game state from the control mode of the variable receiving means. Therefore, the expectation for the special notification at the time of the specific control is increased.

  Feature H5. The gaming machine according to Feature H4, wherein the special game state is set as having a higher probability that the second special game state is selected than the first special game state.

  According to the above configuration, even if the player shifts to the special game state, it is likely that the player will be in the second special game state and the degree of attention may decrease. At such a timing, by executing the special notification and performing the effect of switching to the high advantageous control mode (actually, the first special game state), it is possible to appropriately realize the surprise and joy of the player. It becomes possible.

  Feature H6. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H5, wherein the switching means is performed at a specific number of times (RC2 = 11) of each state switching control in the predetermined specific control.

  According to the above configuration, switching from the low advantageous control mode to the high advantageous control mode occurs during the specific control (the specific number of times of the state switching control performed a plurality of times). By doing so, it can be expected that the above-described switching will occur for each specific control performed a plurality of times in the special game state, and it is possible to increase interest in each specific control. .

  Feature H7. The specific control includes a first specific control (pattern F) in which switching from the low advantageous control mode to the high advantageous control mode may occur, and a second specific control (pattern C) in which the switching does not occur. , Is set, the gaming machine according to Feature H6.

  According to the above configuration, the player is highly interested in whether each specific control in the special game state is the first specific control or the second specific control, and furthermore, the control is switched to the first specific control (highly advantageous control mode). ). As a result, it is considered that the degree of attention to the specific control increases and the degree of interest in the special notification increases. As a result, it is possible to appropriately increase the degree of interest in the game.

Feature H8. In the first specific control, in the state switching control before the state switching control of the specific number of times from the start of the first specific control, each state switching control is performed in the low advantageous control mode,
The method according to Feature H7, wherein in the second specific control, in the state switching control of the specific number of times from the start of the second specific control, each state switching control is performed in the low advantageous control mode. Gaming machine.

  According to the above configuration, in the special game state, from the start of each specific control, it is not possible to identify which of the first and second specific controls is based on the control mode of the variable receiving means. Therefore, the sense of expectation for the special notification of the specific number of times is increased.

<Characteristic I group>
Feature I1. Launching means (gaming ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation of a player;
A first mode in which game balls flowing down the game area are distributed in a first direction, and a second mode in which the game balls are distributed in a second direction different from the first direction at a predetermined timing. Distributing means (rotary body 201, first distributing member 300, second distributing member 310);
A second distribution means (switchable accessory) capable of switching between a third mode in which game balls flowing down the game area are distributed in a third direction and a fourth mode in which game balls are distributed in a fourth direction different from the third direction. 168),
Grasping means for grasping which of the first mode and the second mode the first sorting means is based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition (the processing of step S2105 by the main control device 81 Function to perform)
Setting means for setting a mode of switching between the third mode and the fourth mode of the second distribution means based on the grasping result by the grasping means (the processing of steps S2107 to S2114 by the main control device 81 is performed) Function to perform)
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the above configuration, the first distribution unit switches between the first mode and the second mode at a predetermined timing, and the second distribution unit responds to the mode of the first distribution unit. The switching mode is set. That is, the first distribution unit that performs a certain operation and the second distribution unit that performs an irregular operation are linked. This makes it possible to associate a plurality of distribution means for changing the flowing direction of the game ball, ie, the first distribution means and the second distribution means, with each other. Therefore, it is possible to make the flow form of the game balls flow variously, and it is possible to improve the interest.

  Feature I2. The gaming machine according to Feature I1, wherein the first distribution unit is provided downstream of the two distribution units in a flow path of the game ball.

  According to the above configuration, by controlling the second distribution unit, the first distribution unit on the downstream side is also controlled. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the flow-down mode of the game ball using a plurality of distribution means, while simplifying the control configuration.

Feature I3. A predetermined passage portion (V winning opening 182a) is provided on the downstream side of the first distribution means in the flow path of the game ball,
Privilege granting means (game state transition processing by the main control device 81) capable of granting a privilege (for example, open / close execution mode or round continuation) to the player based on the passing of the game ball by the predetermined passing portion. The gaming machine according to feature I2, further comprising:

  According to the above configuration, the player can obtain a privilege if the game ball passes through the predetermined passing portion through the distribution by the distribution means. In this case, one of the distributing means disposed upstream of the predetermined passage portion may be operated periodically, and the other may be operated irregularly. While the fairness of the game is ensured by the distribution means side (first distribution means side) to be performed, the award rate of the privilege is set by the distribution means side (second distribution means side) where irregular operations are performed. It can be adjusted. Therefore, the interest can be improved.

  Feature I4. The first distributing means and the second distributing means such that a path from the first distributing means is shorter than a path from the second distributing means as a flow-down path to the predetermined passage portion. The gaming machine according to feature I3, wherein the position with the means is set.

  According to the above configuration, the distribution means on the side where the periodic operation is performed is arranged at a position closer to the predetermined passing portion. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to feel unfair.

  Feature I5. The flow path of the game ball is determined such that the flow path of the game ball can reach the predetermined passage portion regardless of whether the game ball is distributed in the first direction or the second direction by the first distribution means. The gaming machine according to Feature I3 or Feature I4.

  According to the above configuration, even if the regular distribution is performed by the first distribution means, it is possible to reach the predetermined passing portion, and thus fairness of the game is easily ensured.

In order to clarify the significance of the distribution by the first distribution means,
"The arrival rate to the predetermined passage portion is set to be relatively high and low when the distribution is performed in the first direction and when the distribution is performed in the second direction." Is also good.

Feature I6. The arrival rate to the predetermined passage portion is set to be relatively high and low when the distribution is performed in the first direction and when the distribution is performed in the second direction,
The setting unit is configured to set the second sorting unit based on the grasping result of the grasping unit so that the first sorting unit sorts the direction toward the side having a lower arrival rate to the predetermined passing unit. The gaming machine according to feature I5, wherein the gaming machine is capable of performing.

  According to the above configuration, it is considered that the player is delighted if the player is assigned to the side having the higher arrival rate to the predetermined passing portion. On the other hand, as described in the feature I5, since it is possible to reach the predetermined passing portion regardless of the direction in which it is sorted, if it is sorted to the side with the higher arrival rate, it is determined whether or not to reach the predetermined passing portion. The pleasure of watching the operation mode of the game ball may be reduced. Therefore, the distribution by the second distribution means is set as described above, and it is possible to fully enjoy the game of whether or not a privilege is obtained depending on the operation mode of the game ball.

  Feature I7. The side where the arrival rate to the predetermined passage section is lower is set so that the visibility from the front of the gaming machine is higher than the side where the arrival rate to the predetermined passage section is higher. A gaming machine according to feature I6.

  According to the above configuration, the pleasure of watching the operation mode of the game ball can be more effectively exhibited.

<Feature J group>
Feature J1. Launching means (gaming ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation of a player;
A variable receiving means provided in the game area and capable of switching between a first state (open state) in which game balls can be received and a second state (closed state) in which game balls cannot be received more than the first state ( Character device 150),
Variable reception control means (a function of executing a game control process by the main control device 81) for performing a state switching control of the variable reception means between the first state and the second state;
A first passage portion (V winning passage 191a) and a second passage portion (exit passage 191b) through which the game balls received by the variable receiving means can pass;
A privilege granting means for granting a privilege to the player based on the passing of the game ball through the first passing portion (a function of executing a game state transition process by the main control device 81);
A first mode in which the game ball received by the variable receiving unit is easily distributed to the first passage portion side (a position where the game ball is easily led out to the V winning side by the rotating body 201); A distributing means (rotating body 201) that can be switched at a predetermined timing to a second mode (position that is easily led to the off side by the rotating body 201) that is difficult to be distributed to the passing portion side;
Grasping means for grasping the switching state between the first mode and the second mode by grasping the distribution means (a function of executing the process of step S2105 by the main control device 81);
Based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition (the entry of the ball into the working ports 38, 39, the end of the opening standby time, the end of the variable display time, etc.), the result of the grasp by the grasping means is added. Then, a game state transition unit (main unit) capable of transitioning to a specific state in which the state switching control of the variable receiving unit can be executed a predetermined number of times (a state in which processing during control is performed based on a normal release result or the like). A function of executing a game control process by the control device 81),
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the above configuration, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the state switching control is performed so that the variable reception means can receive the variable reception means. Then, when the game ball received by the variable receiving means passes through the first passing section, a privilege is given to the player. In this case, the grasping means grasps the state of the distribution member which determines whether or not the light passes through the first passage portion, and the state switching control is performed in consideration of the grasping result of the grasping means. Therefore, for example, it is possible to make it easier to pass through the first passage portion, and to make it difficult to pass through the first passage portion. As a result, the pitching is performed as designed by the gaming machine designer, and the pitching rate can be appropriately managed.

Feature J2. The game state transition means,
On the basis of the grasping result of the grasping means, the first timing at which the game ball accepted by the variable receiving means easily reaches the sorting means in the situation where the sorting means is in the first mode (V A first state switching control mode (the opening / closing control of the opening / closing role object 168 so that the timing becomes easy to perform the V distribution) so that the variable receiving means includes the first state so as to include a timing that can be performed. ,
Based on the grasping result of the grasping means, the game ball received by the variable receiving means does not easily reach the allocating means in the situation where the allocating means is in the first mode (the second timing (V A second state switching control mode (the opening / closing control of the opening / closing role member 168 so that the timing becomes difficult to perform the V distribution) so as to include the variable receiving means in the first state so as to include a timing that is difficult to perform. ,
The gaming machine according to Feature J1, wherein the gaming machine is configured to be able to shift to the specific state including any one of the following.

  According to the above configuration, based on the grasping result by the grasping unit, it is determined whether the game ball received by the variable receiving unit reaches the sorting unit in consideration of whether or not the game ball can be sorted to the first passing unit side. Is done. By doing so, it is possible to make the ball more as designed by the designer.

  Feature J3. The grasping means grasps a position of the distribution means or a period (a result of detection by the rotational position detection sensor 196) from a previous switching timing, and thus a switching state between the first mode and the second mode. The gaming machine according to Feature J1 or Feature J2, wherein the gaming machine has a configuration capable of grasping the condition.

  According to the above configuration, the excellent effect of the above-described J1 can be obtained with a simple configuration in which the grasping unit grasps the position of the distribution unit or the period from the previous switching timing of the distribution unit.

  Feature J4. The grasping means is configured such that, based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition, when the game ball is received by the variable receiving means during the period in which the variable receiving means is in the first state, The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J3, wherein a configuration of the distributing unit at a timing when the distributing unit is reached can be grasped.

  According to the above configuration, even if a game ball is received at any time during the period in which the variable receiving means is in the first state, the mode of the distribution means at the timing when the game ball reaches the distribution means is changed. Since it can be grasped, the distribution rate by the distribution means can be determined more accurately.

Feature J5. The distribution means has a rotating body that rotates at least in a predetermined cycle,
The grasping means has a detection sensor for detecting a position of the rotating body, and is configured to be able to grasp the position of the rotating body at least for the rotating body based on a detection result of the detection sensor. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J4.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to suitably divert a conventional configuration to achieve the excellent effects described in J1 above.

Feature J6. The distributing unit includes a first distributing unit (distributing members 300 and 310) and a second distributing unit (rotary body 201) as a plurality of distributing units,
The first distribution unit is disposed upstream of the second distribution unit,
The first passage portion and the second passage portion are disposed downstream of the second distribution means,
The grasping means is configured so as to be able to grasp any position of the first distributing means and the second distributing means or a period from a previous switching timing. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J5, wherein the grasping result of said second distribution means has a higher priority than the grasping result of (1).

  According to the configuration described above, by prioritizing the grasping result on the downstream side, it is possible to determine the distribution situation at a position closer to the first passage portion or the second passage portion. As a result, it is possible to set the state switching control of the variable receiving unit in which the privilege grant rate based on the passage to the first passage unit is more accurately taken into account.

Feature J7. The distributing unit includes a first distributing unit (distributing members 300 and 310) and a second distributing unit (rotary body 201) as a plurality of distributing units,
The first distribution unit is disposed upstream of the second distribution unit,
The first passage portion and the second passage portion are disposed downstream of the second distribution means,
When a game ball is sorted by the first distribution means, the game ball can be led out to the first passage portion without passing through the second distribution means,
Even if the grasping means grasps that the first distributing means can distribute to the first passage portion side, the first distributing means can determine whether the first distributing means can be distributed to the first passage portion side. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J6, wherein the switching status is grasped.

  According to the above configuration, even if the situation can be distributed to the first passage portion side by the first distribution means, if the state of the second distribution means is grasped, the state switching control of the variable receiving means can be performed. Regarding the setting, the status of the second distribution means can be reflected. By doing so, it is possible to perform more various state switching control settings.

Feature J8. The distributing unit includes a first distributing unit (distributing members 300 and 310) and a second distributing unit (rotary body 201) as a plurality of distributing units,
The second distribution unit is disposed at a position where visibility from a player is higher than that of the first distribution unit,
The gaming state transition means, when the grasping means determines that the game can be sorted to the first passage portion side by either the first sorting means or the second sorting means, The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J7, wherein the state switching control can be set such that the state switching control can be distributed to the first passage portion side by a dividing means.

  According to the above configuration, the player who has been sorted by the sorting means (second sorting means) on the side with higher visibility can confirm that as the player. Therefore, the feature J1 is wonderful, based not on the viewpoint of simply passing through the first passage portion (the only benefit being provided) but on the pleasure of the gaming machine such as enjoying the operation of the gaming ball. The effect can be achieved.

<Feature K group>
Feature K1. Launching means (gaming ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation of a player;
Distributing means (opening / closing role 168) that can be switched between a first mode of distributing game balls flowing down the game area in a first direction and a second mode of distributing the game balls in a second direction different from the first direction. When,
A predetermined passing portion (V winning opening 182a) provided on the downstream side of the distribution means in the flow path of the game ball;
Privilege granting means (game state transition processing by the main control device 81) capable of granting a privilege (for example, open / close execution mode or round continuation) to the player based on the passing of the game ball by the predetermined passing portion. Function to execute)
With
A flow-down route of the game ball is determined so that the game ball can reach the predetermined passage portion, regardless of whether the game ball is distributed in the first direction or the second direction by the distribution means,
The arrival rate to the predetermined passage portion is set to be relatively high and low when the distribution is performed in the first direction and when the distribution is performed in the second direction,
Means for changing so that the distribution rate to the predetermined passing portion is lower when the arrival rate to the predetermined passing portion is higher (the main control device 81 performs the (A function of executing (2) opening / closing timing change processing).

  According to the above configuration, a privilege is given to the player by the passing of the game ball through the predetermined passing portion, and the distribution means is provided on the upstream side of the predetermined passing portion, and depending on the distribution direction. The flow-down route is set such that the arrival rate to a predetermined passage portion is relatively high and low. In such a configuration, it is considered that the player wishes to be assigned to the side having the higher arrival rate to the predetermined passing portion. However, if it is possible to reach the predetermined passage portion regardless of which of the distribution portions, it is determined whether the distribution to the side where the arrival rate to the predetermined passage portion is lower is to reach the predetermined passage portion. It is possible to enjoy a thrilling feeling. In this regard, if the device is provided with a means for changing to a low arrival side when the arrival rate is allocated to the high side as in the above configuration, the flow of such a game ball can be fully enjoyed. It can be used to improve interest.

  Feature K2. It is set so that visibility on the front side of the gaming machine is higher on the side having a lower arrival rate to the predetermined passage section than on the side having a higher arrival rate to the predetermined passage section. A gaming machine according to feature K1.

  According to the above configuration, the pleasure of watching the operation mode of the game ball can be more effectively exhibited.

  In addition, the technical idea shown in each invention of each of the features A to K may be applied to each invention of each of the features A to K, and a part or all of the invention may be combined. The invention may be applied to each invention of the K group. In addition, all or some of the various configurations shown in each invention of each of the features A to K can be arbitrarily combined.

  Hereinafter, a basic configuration of a gaming machine to which the above features can be applied will be described.

  Pachinko gaming machine: operating means operated by a player, gaming ball firing means for firing game balls based on the operation of the operating means, a ball path for guiding the fired game balls to a predetermined game area, A gaming machine comprising: a plurality of game components arranged in a region; and a bonus is provided to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passage portion of the game components.

  Spinning-type gaming machines such as slot machines: provided with variable display means for variably displaying a symbol row composed of a plurality of symbols and then finally displaying the symbol row, and starting to change the symbol due to the operation of the starting operation means. The variation of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means or by the lapse of a predetermined time, and a special game advantageous to the player as a necessary condition that the final stopped symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A gaming machine that generates a state (such as a bonus game).

  Ball-using belt-type gaming machine: equipped with variable display means for displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then displaying the symbol row as a final stop, and the variation of the symbol is started and stopped by the operation of the starting operation means. The fluctuation of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the operating means or after a lapse of a predetermined time, and a special game state (bonus) advantageous to the player is required on condition that the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. And a payout device for paying out game balls to the ball tray, and a payout device for providing a ball tray and taking in game balls from the ball tray. A gaming machine configured such that the operation of the starting operation means is enabled when a game ball is thrown in the game machine.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Pachinko machine, 24 ... Game board, 38 ... First operating port, 39 ... Second operating port, 51 ... Symbol display device, 60 ... Launch handle, 81 ... Main control device, 82 ... Production control device, 150 ... Position Object device, 168 opening / closing accessory, 182a V winning opening, 182b opening opening, 192 V winning sensor, 193 disconnecting sensor, 300 first distribution member, 300a first distribution driving section, 310 ... Second distributing member, 310a Second distributing drive unit, A special opening, B special opening.

Claims (2)

Firing means for firing a game ball toward a game area based on a player's firing operation;
A variable receiving means provided in the game area and capable of switching between a first state in which game balls can be received and a second state in which game balls are less likely to be received than the first state;
Variable reception control means for executing state switching control between the first state and the second state of the variable reception means based on the occurrence of a predetermined event;
A specific passing portion through which the game ball received by the variable receiving means can pass;
A privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player based on that the game ball has passed through the specific passing portion,
At a predetermined timing, a first mode in which the game balls received by the variable receiving means are easily distributed to the specific passing section, and a second mode in which the game balls are less likely to be distributed to the specific passing section than the first mode. Switchable sorting means,
A game in which the specific control in which the state switching control of the variable receiving means is performed a plurality of times based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition can be shifted to a special game state that can be executed a plurality of times. State transition means;
With
In the special game state, in one of the specific control, based on that the game ball has passed through the specific passing portion, it is possible to perform the next specific control,
The variable reception control means,
A first switching execution unit that executes the state switching control at a first timing in the specific control;
A second switching execution unit configured to execute the state switching control at a second timing different from the first timing in the specific control;
With
It is set such that the state switching control is performed at the first timing, so that the game ball can easily pass through the specific passage section than the state switching control is performed at the second timing,
A game wherein the specific control before and after the specific control in which the state switching control is performed by the second switching executing means is set such that the state switching control is performed by the first switching performing means. Machine. 2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising a launch operation means for performing the launch operation by a player.